SD750

SOFTWARE AND
PROGRAMMING MANUAL

LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE

Software and Programming Manual
SDP2G_5.2.0

Edition: December 2019

SD75MTSW01HI Rev. H
SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

PURPOSE

This manual contains important instructions for the installation and maintenance of Power Electronics
SD750 variable speed drives.

TARGET AUDIENCE

This manual is intended for qualified customers who will install, operate and maintain Power Electronics
SD750 variable speed drives.

Only trained electricians may install and commission the drives.

REFERENCE MANUALS

The following reference documents are available for SD750 variable speed drives:

• Hardware and Installation Manual.

• Programming and Software Manual.

• Maintenance Manual.

• Pumps Application Manual.

POWER ELECTRONICS CONTACT INFORMATION

Power Electronics USA Inc. Power Electronics España, S.L.

4777 N 44th Ave Polígono Industrial Carrases
Phoenix Ronda del Camp d’Aviació nº 4
AZ 85031 46160, Llíria (Valencia)
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA SPAIN

US Sales: 602-354-4890 / (480) 519-5977 Fax: (+34) 96 131 82 01

Fax: (415) 874-3001 Website: www.power-electronics.com

2 ABOUT THIS MANUAL

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

REVISIONS CONTROL
DATE REVISION DESCRIPTION
24 / 10 / 2017 A First Edition.
Visualization parameters, Description of programming parameters,
21 / 11 / 2017 B Commissioning Recommendations, Fault messages. Description and
actions. Configuration register.
Safety instructions, Display unit and control keypad, Status messages,
Visualization parameters, programming parameters Description,
12 / 01 / 2018 C
Commissioning Recommendations, Fault messages. Description and
actions. Configuration register.
Update software version SDP2G_2.0.0.
Added default value in visualization parameters. Misprint and image
12 / 03 / 2018 D
update. Sections: Fault Messages. Modbus communication.
Configuration register.
Updated to software version SDP2G_3.0.0.
10 / 05 / 2018 E
Misprints correction.
Updated to software version SDP2G_4.0.0. Status, warning and fault
29 / 11 / 2018 F
messages. Misprints correction.
20 / 06 / 2019 G
Updated to software version SDP2G_4.1.0. Status, warning and fault
messages. Misprints correction.
EN
About this manual. Misprints correction. Updated to software version
10 / 12 / 2019 H
SDP2G_5.2.0. Status, warning and fault messages.

The equipment and technical documentation are periodically updated. Power Electronics reserves the right to modify all or part of the
contents of this manual without previous notice. To consult the most updated information of this product, you may access our website
www.power-electronics.com, where the latest version of this manual can be downloaded. The reproduction or distribution of the present
manual is strictly forbidden, unless express authorization from Power Electronics.

REVISIONS 3
SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ABOUT THIS MANUAL ............................................................................................................................... 2

SAFETY SYMBOLS ..................................................................................................................................... 7

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................................................................ 8

1. DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPAD ........................................................................................... 9

Keypad Unit Description ....................................................................................................................... 9
LED for status indication .................................................................................................................. 10
Alphanumeric LCD Display .............................................................................................................. 10
Control Keys .................................................................................................................................... 10
Menu .................................................................................................................................................. 11

2. STATUS & WARNING MESSAGES ..................................................................................................... 13

List of Status Messages ..................................................................................................................... 13
List of Warning Messages .................................................................................................................. 14

3. FAULT MESSAGES. DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS ...................................................................... 16

Description of Fault List ...................................................................................................................... 17
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................. 20

4. VISUALIZATION PARAMETERS ......................................................................................................... 25

Group V1: Motor Visualization ............................................................................................................ 26
Group V2: Drive Visualization ............................................................................................................. 27
Group V3: External Visualization ........................................................................................................ 27
Group V4: Internal Visualization ......................................................................................................... 28
Group V5: Programmable Parameters ............................................................................................... 29
Group V6: Registers ........................................................................................................................... 29
Group V8: Date and time .................................................................................................................... 29
Group V9: Last fault Registers ........................................................................................................... 30
Subgroup V9.1: Motor registers ....................................................................................................... 30
Subgroup V9.2: Drive registers ........................................................................................................ 30
Subgroup V9.3: External registers ................................................................................................... 31
Subgroup V9.4: Internal registers .................................................................................................... 32

5. DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS ......................................................................... 33

Group 1: Options ................................................................................................................................ 34
Group 2: Motor Nameplate Data ........................................................................................................ 35
Group 3: References .......................................................................................................................... 36
Group 4: Inputs ................................................................................................................................... 37
Subgroup 4.1: Digital Inputs ............................................................................................................ 37
Subgroup 4.2: Analogue Input 1 ...................................................................................................... 42
Subgroup 4.3: Analogue Input 2 / Pulse .......................................................................................... 43
Subgroup 4.4: Analogue Input 3 / PT100......................................................................................... 45
Subgroup 4.5: Analogue input 4 ...................................................................................................... 46
Subgroup 4.6: Analogue input 5 ...................................................................................................... 48
Subgroup 4.7: Analogue input 6 ...................................................................................................... 49

4 TABLE OF CONTENTS
POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Subgroup 4.8: Analogue input 7 ...................................................................................................... 50

Group 5: Acceleration / deceleration rates ......................................................................................... 52
Subgroup 5.1: Acceleration ............................................................................................................. 52
Subgroup 5.2: Deceleration ............................................................................................................. 52
Subgroup 5.3: Motorized potentiometer........................................................................................... 52
Others ............................................................................................................................................. 53
Group 6: PID Control .......................................................................................................................... 53
Group 7: Start / Stop Control .............................................................................................................. 54
Subgroup 7.1: Start.......................................................................................................................... 54
Subgroup 7.2: Stop .......................................................................................................................... 55
Subgroup 7.3: Spin start .................................................................................................................. 56
Group 8: Outputs ................................................................................................................................ 56
Subgroup 8.1: Digital outputs .......................................................................................................... 56
Subgroup 8.2: Analogue output 1 .................................................................................................... 61
Subgroup 8.3: Analogue output 2 / Pulse ........................................................................................ 62
Subgroup 8.4: Analogue output 3 .................................................................................................... 63
Subgroup 8.5: Analogue output 4 .................................................................................................... 63
Subgroup 8.6: Analogue output 5 .................................................................................................... 64 EN
Subgroup 8.7: Analogue output 6 .................................................................................................... 64
Group 9: Comparators ........................................................................................................................ 65
Subgroup 9.1: Comparator 1 ........................................................................................................... 65
Subgroup 9.2: Comparator 2 ........................................................................................................... 66
Subgroup 9.3: Comparator 3 ........................................................................................................... 67
Group 10: Limits ................................................................................................................................. 68
Group 10.1: Speed .......................................................................................................................... 68
Group 10.2: Current/Torque ............................................................................................................ 68
Group 11: Protections......................................................................................................................... 69
Group 11.1: Input ............................................................................................................................. 69
Group 11.2: Motor............................................................................................................................ 70
Group 12: Auto Reset ......................................................................................................................... 71
Group 13: Fault History ...................................................................................................................... 72
Group 14: Multi-references ................................................................................................................. 72
Group 15: Inch Speeds....................................................................................................................... 73
Group 16: Skip Frequencies ............................................................................................................... 73
Group 17: Brake ................................................................................................................................. 74
Group 19: Fine Tuning........................................................................................................................ 75
Subgroup 19.1: IGBT Control .......................................................................................................... 75
Subgroup 19.2: Motor load .............................................................................................................. 76
Subgroup 19.3: Motor model ........................................................................................................... 77
Subgroup 19.4: Vector PID .............................................................................................................. 77
Group 20: Serial Communication........................................................................................................ 78
Subgroup 20.1: Modbus RTU .......................................................................................................... 78
Subgroup 20.2: Profibus Configuration ............................................................................................ 79
Subgroup 20.6: Custom Modbus configuration................................................................................ 80
Subgroup 20.7: Custom Modbus values .......................................................................................... 80
Group 21: Networks............................................................................................................................ 81
Subgroup 21.1: Ethernet.................................................................................................................. 81
Subgroup 21.2: Client TCP .............................................................................................................. 81
Subgroup 21.3: EtherNet / IP ........................................................................................................... 82
Subgroup 21.4: Profinet ................................................................................................................... 84
Group 23: Expansion .......................................................................................................................... 86
Subgroup 23.2: Input/Output ........................................................................................................... 86

TABLE OF CONTENTS 5
SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Subgroup 23.3: Communications..................................................................................................... 86

Group 25: Master / Slave .................................................................................................................... 88
Group 26: Fans................................................................................................................................... 88

6. MODBUS COMMUNICATION ............................................................................................................. 89

Supported Modbus Function Codes ................................................................................................... 89
Modbus Function Code Nº 3: Registers Reading ............................................................................ 89
Modbus Function Code Nº 16: Registers Writing............................................................................. 90
Addressing Modes .............................................................................................................................. 91
Broadcast Addressing Mode ............................................................................................................ 91
Remote Control Functions .................................................................................................................. 91
Summary of Modbus Addresses......................................................................................................... 92
Modbus Register ‘COMMS STATUS’ .............................................................................................. 92
Programming Parameters .................................................................................................................. 93
Visualization Parameters .................................................................................................................. 112

7. COMMON CONFIGURATIONS ......................................................................................................... 119

Start / Stop Commands and Speed Reference by Keypad............................................................... 119
Parameter Configuration ................................................................................................................ 119
Start / Stop Commands by Terminals and Speed Reference by Analogue Input ............................. 120
Parameter Configuration ................................................................................................................ 120
Connection Drawing ...................................................................................................................... 121
Start / Stop Commands by Terminals and Speed Reference by Motorized Potentiometer .............. 122
Parameter Configuration ................................................................................................................ 122
Connection Drawing ...................................................................................................................... 123
Start / Stop Commands by Terminals and Seven Speed References Selectable by Digital Inputs .. 124
Parameter Configuration ................................................................................................................ 124
Connection Drawing ...................................................................................................................... 125

8. CONFIGURATION REGISTER .......................................................................................................... 126

6 TABLE OF CONTENTS
POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

SAFETY SYMBOLS

Always follow safety instructions to prevent accidents and potential hazards from occurring.

In this manual, safety messages are classified as follows:

Identifies potentially hazardous situations where dangerous voltage may

be present, which if not avoided, could result in minor personal injury,
serious injury or death.
WARNING
Be extremely careful and follow the instructions to avoid the risk of
electrical shocks.

Identifies potentially hazardous situations, which if not avoided, could

result in product damage, or minor or moderate personal injury.
EN
CAUTION
Read the message and follow the instructions carefully.

Identifies important measures to take in order to prevent damage

NOTICE equipment and warranty lost, as well as encouraging good use and
environmental practices.

Other symbols used in this manual for safety messages are the following:

Hot surface. Be careful and follow the instructions to avoid burns and personal injuries.

Risk of fire. Be careful and follow the instructions to prevent causing an unintentional fire.

Caution, risk of electric shock. Energy storage timed discharge. Wait for the indicated
time to avoid electrical hazards.

Caution, risk of hearing damage. Wear hearing protection.

SAFETY SYMBOLS 7
SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

IMPORTANT!
Read carefully this manual to maximize the performance of the product and to ensure its safe use.

In order to appropriately use the drive, please, follow all instructions described in the Hardware and
Installation Manual which refer to transportation, installation, electrical connection and commissioning of
the equipment.

Power Electronics accepts no responsibility or liability for partial or total damages resulting from incorrect
use of equipment.

CAUTION

Read carefully the Hardware and Installation Manual and all documentation related to the drive to
ensure its safe use and prevent personal injuries and equipment damage.

Comply with local and national regulation.

8 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
 POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

1. DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL

KEYPAD 1
Keypad Unit Description
The graphic display is a removable display unit for remote installation. There is a LED indicator integrated
in the Power Electronics logo on the display which provides information about the operation status of the
equipment. In addition, there is a 2.8 '' LCD screen and eight control keys.

EN

Display and Keypad

NOTICE
If the USB terminal is connected to the control board, do not connect the micro USB connection
of the display cable to any other equipment different from the SD750 drive’s display. Otherwise the
equipment connected may be damaged.

The display is connected to the control board using a cable with a micro USB terminal on the end of the
display and a USB terminal on the control card side.

DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPAD 9

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

LED for status indication

The status LED shows the drive status while it is on. It is located in the Power Electronics logo, and
will change its color as follows:

• Green: The equipment is in RUN status.

• Red: The equipment has stopped due to a FAULT.

• Yellow: The equipment is in WARNING status.

Alphanumeric LCD Display

The main screen of the display is divided into two areas:

a) Status bar: Shows the main indicators of equipment status.

From left to right (see figure "Application screen"):

▪ Current Fault.

▪ Current Warning.
a
▪ Status.

▪ Output current in Amperes.

▪ Current motor speed or equipment power:

Displays the current motor speed or the b
current equipment power in%. If negative
sign, it indicates the motor rotates anti-
clockwise.
Application screen
b) Visualization Area: Shows the main
visualization of the parameters and the different menus of the application.

Control Keys
The display integrates eight control keys with the following functions:

This key is used to scroll up in the Menu or modify the value of the parameters.

Scroll left the main visualization screen or return to the previous screen in the Menu
options. Cancel changes made to a parameter.

Scroll right the main visualization screen or enter to the different options of the
Menu. Save changes made to a parameter.

This key is used to scroll down in the Menu or modify the value of the parameters.

10 DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPAD

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Enter or exit the menu. It can also be used as editing help during parameter
adjustment. To enable it, go to Menu – Settings – Variables edit mode and select
“Manual precision”. Use the arrows righ/left to increase/decrease the digit “ED”.
See example below. See section 5.

This key is used to start the equipment using the keyboard when the control has
been set to Local.

This key is used to stop the converter from the keyboard when the control has
been set to Local. In the event of a fault, this button can be used to reset the
equipment when the LOCAL control is enabled.
This key is used for the selection of the control mode. When set to Local, the device
is controlled as Local. When set to Remote, the equipment works with the option
configured in the active control mode at that moment (either the one set in
parameter G4.1.1 "Main control mode" or in G4.1.2 "Alternative control mode ").

EN
Menu

Access and exit of the menu

This section includes the following submenus:

▪ Parameters:

This menu contains all the configuration, visualization and favorite parameters (it also allows you
to establish a list of favorite parameters). These parameters are grouped into subgroups or sub-
menus to facilitate their location.

DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPAD 11

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

▪ Versions:

This menu contains the information of the versions associated with the equipment in terms of MCF,
uP, DSP, HW and display.

▪ Options:

This menu allows creating custom display screens on the main screen, selecting the parameters to
be included.

▪ Backups:

This menu allows making copies of the system and restore the system from one copy.

▪ Settings:

This menu contains all the general settings of the display:

▪ Contrast.

▪ Show / hide group index: it will show on the screen the subgroup index of the different
parameters (ex: G1.1).

▪ Animations.

▪ Display language.

▪ Show / hide the value of variables.

▪ Variable editing mode.

▪ Go back to home with timeout.

▪ File download:

This menu allows the download of the MCF file, firmware files and files by bootloader.

▪ MCF: File that contains the definition of display screens, variables and properties.

▪ Firmware: Allows updating of the software version of the display.

▪ Bootloader: Enabling the option allows updating the display by PC through USB port.

12 DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPAD

 POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

2. STATUS & WARNING MESSAGES

2
In the status bar of the display we can see the status of the equipment, the average intensity consumed
by the motor (A) and the motor speed (%). It always remains visible on the display and can not be modified
by the user:
a b c d e

a) Last fault

b) Current Warning message status

c) Current message status

d) Output current EN
e) Current speed

Note: User can access to the information displayed in status line via Modbus communication. See section
‘Modbus Communication’.

List of Status Messages

The following table indicates the possible status of the drive.

Screen Name Description

OFF Deactivated power Drive power is deactivated.
ON Activated power Drive power is activated.
Drive is increasing the output frequency. Motor increasing in speed, it is
ACL Accelerating
accelerating.
RUN Running Drive is operating at reference speed. Operation at steady status.
Drive is decreasing the output frequency. Motor decreasing in speed, it is
DEC Decelerating
decelerating.
Drive is decreasing the output frequency due to a stop command. Motor is
STP Stopping
stopping by ramp until zero speed is reached.
FLT Fault The drive is in a fault status
This message will be shown whenever any of the faults related to analog
RFLT Fault with ramp stop input loss is triggered (F42, F43, F59, F89, F104, F105, F106…).
After the fault the, drive will stop with ramp.
‘Flying start’ operation must be configured if required. The SD750 will search
SPN Flying start for the actual motor shaft speed once the drive has received a start
command.
The drive is obtaining the values of the motor magnitudes.

AUT Automatic adjustment CAUTION: Although the motor is not running there is dangerous
voltage. Run Led will be lit during this process. Be careful to avoid damages
and personal injury.
BRK Brake The DC brake of the motor is active.

STATUS & WARNING MESSAGES 13

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Screen Name Description

SD750 is injecting DC current to prevent moisture condensing within the
motor.
Non-condensing current is
IHEAT
activated CAUTION: Although the motor is not running there is dangerous
voltage. Run Led will be lit during this process. Be careful to avoid damages
and personal injury.
When a delay time has been set in order to start the equipment, after the
DLY Start Delay Time start command has been activated, this message will be displayed until this
time has elapsed.
SD750 is working according to inch speed 1 command and ‘Start + Inch
speed 1' mode is active. When operated in this mode the "Start + Inch speed
1" command is dominant over other inputs programmed for "Start"
IS1 Inch speed 1 functionality. Therefore, if one input is configured as ‘Start’ and it is
deactivated; despite this deactivated input, the drive will start when ‘Start +
Inch speed 1' command is received. This is also valid for Inch speed 2 and
3.
SD750 is working according to inch speed 2 command. ‘Start + Inch speed
IS2 Inch speed 2
2' mode is active.
SD750 is working according to inch speed 3 command. ‘Start + Inch speed
IS3 Inch speed 3
3' mode is active.

List of Warning Messages

The following table details all the possible warning messages. If none exists, the message "NO WRN"
will be displayed on the STATUS LINE of the display.

Warning Acronym Name Description

This message will appear when motor thermal model is increasing
W1 MOL Motor overload
the estimated motor temperature.
W3 MOC Motor over-current Motor current is higher than the rated current value.
This message will appear if the output current is higher than 125%
W4 DOC Drive over-current
of the nominal current.
W5 ILT Current limitation Current limit algorithm has been activated.
W6 TLT Torque limitation Torque limit algorithm has been activated.
A high DC Link voltage level has been detected and the voltage
W7 VLT Voltage limitation
limit control algorithm has been activated to protect the drive.
W8 ACO Asymmetric current Asymmetry in output currents of the drive has been detected.
Output voltage
W9 AVO Asymmetry in output voltage of the drive has been detected.
imbalance
W10 AVI Input voltage imbalance Asymmetry in input voltage of the drive has been detected.
Input voltage of the equipment is reaching a dangerous level. The
W11 OVV High input voltage
value is above the set value (protections settings).
Input voltage of the equipment is reaching a dangerous level. The
W12 UNV Low input voltage
value is below the set value (protections settings).
Motor speed has reached the maximum speed limit that is active
W13 SLMAX Max speed limit
at the moment.
The drive does not increase speed because input voltage is not
W14 CWR Cells enough. This warning only applies to permanent magnet
synchronous motors.
Motor speed has reached the minimum speed limit that is active at
W15 SLMIN Min speed limit
the moment.

14 STATUS & WARNING MESSAGES

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Warning Acronym Name Description

W16 RTL Reg torque limit Regenerative torque limit algorithm has been activated.
Remaining voltage in After stopping the converter, the motor retains a voltage higher
W17 MVR
the motor than 10% of its rated voltage.
The motor current reaches the regeneration current limit set in the
W18 RIL Regenerative I Limit
screen [G10.2.11].
There is a communications problem with the digital I/O expansion
W36 DE_A Digital A expansion
board A.
W37 EPB Profibus expansion There is a communications problem with the Profibus board.
There is a communications problem with the digital I/O expansion
W44 DE_B Digital B expansion
board B.
W45 EVCOMM Expansion fans comm There is a communications problem with the fans expansion board.
There is a communications problem with the analogue I/O
W46 AE_A Analog A expansion
expansion board A.
There is a communications problem with the analogue I/O
W47 AE_B Analog B expansion
expansion board B.
W48 PNE Profinet expansion There is a communications problem with the Profinet board.
W49 EIPE EthernetIP expansion There is a communications problem with the Ethernet/IP board.

EN

STATUS & WARNING MESSAGES 15

 SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

3. FAULT MESSAGES.
DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS 3
When a fault occurs, the SD750 will stop the motor, showing the fault in the display.

Without resetting the fault it is possible to navigate through the display lines where we will have access to
the rest of the display parameters, providing us data of the exact moment in which the failure happened.

On the other hand, the LED of the display will show a fixed red color, and the fault message will remain
until the fault is solved and the equipment is reset.

Fault Visualization

16 FAULT MESSAGES. DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Description of Fault List

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
F0 Drive is operative. There is no fault.
Output current has reached a dangerous level. Its value is above 220% of the drive rated current.
F1:Overcurrent
Protection is activated instantaneously.
DC Bus voltage has reached a dangerous level >850VDC. Hardware Protection. Drive will turn off the
F2:Overvoltage
output to the motor.
F3:PDINT DC Bus voltage and the output current of the equipment have reached dangerous levels.
F4:Overload U
F5:Overload V Internal protection within the appropriate IGBT semiconductor has acted.
F6:Overload W
F7:Multiple Overload The internal protection of several power semiconductors has acted simultaneously.
F8:Dinamic brake The internal protection for the dynamic brake semiconductor has acted.
overload Note: Only applies to sizes 1 and 2.
Automatic internal protection of several of the IGBT semiconductors has acted or safe stop contact of
F10:Safety stop (STO) the drive (connected to an external circuit by the user) has been activated (for example, emergency

F11:Input voltage Lost

stop).
Power supply loss of any input phase for a time higher than 20ms has occurred.
EN
Input voltage imbalance greater than ±10% of average input power supply of SD750 for a time higher
F12:V input Unbal.
than 100ms.
Average supply voltage has exceeded the value set in ‘G11.1.3 Supply over voltage’ for greater than the
F13:V input high
time set in ‘G11.1.4 Over voltage timeout”.
Average supply voltage is lower than the value set in ‘G11.1.1 Supply under voltage’ for greater than
F14:V input low
the time set in ‘G11.1.2 Under voltage timeout’.
Unstable bus voltage. There is a DC Bus voltage ripple higher than 100VDC during more than 1.1
F15:Bus ripple
seconds.
F16:Bus Overvoltage DC Bus voltage has exceeded critical operating level (>850VDC). Software Protection.
F17:Bus under voltage DC Bus voltage is lower than critical operating level (<350VDC).
Voltage imbalance of more than ±5% of the average drive output average voltage for a time higher than
F18:Unbal.V output
100ms.
Current imbalance of more than ±25% of the average output motor current for a time higher than 1
F19:Unbal.I output
second.
F20:Ground current Current level to the ground has exceeded the level set in ‘G11.2.2 Ground current limit’.
Motor current has exceeded the current limit set in ‘G10.2.1 Current limit’ for the time set in ‘G10.2.2 I
F21:Overcurrent limit
limit timeout’.
Motor torque has exceeded the torque limit set in parameter ‘G10.2.6 Torque limit’ for the time set in
F22:Torque limit
‘G10.2.7 Torque limit timeout’.
Motor speed does not reach the speed limit (parameters G10.1.1 and G10.1.3) for the time set in
F23:Min speed limit
[G10.1.6 Minimum lim timeout].
Motor torque has exceeded the torque limit set in parameter ‘G10.2.13 Reg torque limit’ for the time set
F24:Regen. torque limit
in [G10.2.14 Reg torque limit time].
F25:Motor overload Motor overload calculated by SD750 thermal model has exceeded 110%.
F26:Internal
There is a problem in the internal electronics.
communications
F27:Softcharge The DC Bus has not been charged in the expected time.
F28:Regenerative I Limit Fault for regenerative converters. See the corresponding manual.
F31:SCR L1 Trip on conduction status of thyristor 1. The thyristor has not turned on correctly.
F32:SCR L2 Trip on conduction status of thyristor 2. The thyristor has not turned on correctly.
F33:SCR L3 Trip on conduction status of thyristor 3. The thyristor has not turned on correctly.
F34:IGBT temperature IGBT internal temperature has reached a level of 110°C (see parameter SV2.5.2).
F35:DSP Watchdog An unknown fault has reset the microprocessor of the control board.
F36:Encoder card com. There is a communication problem between the encoder card and central control.
F37:Encoder card timeout The encoder card is not detected.
F38:Encoder Incorrect encoder measurement while working in closed loop.

FAULT MESSAGES. DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS 17

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
F39:No load There is no load connected to the drive output.
The external trip device or PTC of the motor has operated. The circuit that controls the external
F40:PTC temperature sensor (PTC, thermostat, etc.) of the motor winding has acted. (Connection between
terminals 8 and 9). Values lower than 90Ω ± 10% or greater than 1K5 ± 10% generate the fault.
Trip generated through RS232 or RS485 communication. Master (PLC or PC) is generating a fault in
F41:Serial comms
the SD750 through serial communication.
F42:Analog input 1 The SD750 is not receiving a signal on analogue input 1 while [G4.2.14 AI1 loss protection] is set to
missing ‘Yes’. The signal introduced through this input has been lost.
F43:Analog input 2 The SD750 is not receiving a signal on the analogue input 2 while [G4.3.14 AI2 loss protection] is set
missing to ‘Yes’. The signal introduced through this input has been lost.
F44:Drive calibration Internal reference voltage levels are wrong.
Trip generated by excessive delay in the motor stop. The time elapsed since the stop signal has
F45:Stop timeout
exceeded the value set in [G11.2.1 Maximum stop timeout].
F46:Data fault The non-volatile memory (EEPROM) is defective.
Trip generated by excessive delay in serial communication. The time elapsed since the last successful
F47:Comms
reception frame has exceeded the value set in the screen [G20.2 COMMS F / T].
F48:Internal
Trip due to bad transfer of the data bus.
communications
Motor speed has exceeded the speed limit (parameters G10.1.2 and G10.1.4) for the time set in
F49:Max speed limit
[G10.1.5 Maximum lim timeout].
Internal power supply is not supplying the correct voltage. One voltage level has decreased to zero
F50:Power supply
value for 100ms approx.
F52:Lost control voltage External digital control voltage signal fault.
F53:Max internal
Internal temperature of the equipment control electronics chamber has reached a dangerous level.
temperature
F54:Watchdog reset Internal fault of the microcontroller.
The digital input configured as "YES Digital RL" has not received the feedback of the digital output
F55:Contactor Feedback
before the time set in [G4.1.27].
F56:External emergency
Digital input configured as ‘EXTERN EMERGE’ has been activated (NC contact).
stop
This fault is generated when the output current of the drive is higher than the current set in [G11.2.8]
F57:Pump overload
during the time adjusted in [G11.2.10].
F58:CAN interface Reserved. Contact Power Electronics.
F59:Analog input 3 The SD750 has stopped receiving a signal through the analog input 3 while [G4.4.14 AI3 loss protection]
missing is set to "YES". The device has lost the signal entered through this input.
The connection of the equipment (server) to the Ethernet / IP client (PLC) in connector 1 of the board
F60:Lost CIP c1 comms has been lost. If there is no configuration to indicate another option, by default, the CIP standard forces
the drive to stop the motor and trip Timeout fault.
F61:EIP Fault Failure in the Ethernet/IP board. This fault is triggered by the PLC.
F62:CANopen comm lost Reserved. Contact Power Electronics.
F63:CANopen sdo
Reserved. Contact Power Electronics.
transmission
F64:CANopen
Reserved. Contact Power Electronics.
transmission
Fault generated when the output current of the inverter is lower than the value set in [G11.2.11] during
F68:Pump underload
the time set in [G11.2.13].
F69:Serial I/O comm Communication fault with the I / O control electronics.
F71:Exp digital I/O A
Failure in communication with the digital inputs and outputs expansion board A.
comm
F72:Expansion Profibus
Communication failure with the Profibus communication expansion board.
comm
F73:Comparator 1 Failure of the comparator 1
F74:Comparator 2 Failure of the comparator 2
F75:Comparator 3 Failure of the comparator 3
F76:STO Malfunction Problem in the STO circuit.
F77:Incompat. IO Exp Incompatible software version of the I / O expansion board.
F78:Fremaq Temperature of the filter has reached a dangerous value.
F79:PT100 PT100 sensor temperature fault

18 FAULT MESSAGES. DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
F84:SCR temperature SCR temperature fault
F85:Fan power A fault in the power supply to the cooling fans has occurred.
F87:Incompatible Dsp
Incompatible DSP software version.
Version
F89:Analog input 4 The SD750 has stopped receiving a signal through the analog input 4 while [G4.5.14 AI4 loss protection]
missing is set to "YES". The device has lost the signal entered through this input.
F93:Time out optical fiber Timeout of the optical fiber has been exceeded.
Synchronism in permanent magnet motor is lost. It only works when we operate with permanent magnet
F94:Sync lost
motors (G19.1.1 = PMSM).
When working in the Master / Slave system (G1.9 = YES), the slave reports this fault because the
F95:Slave
master has failed. To activate the fault, G25.3 = YES.
When working in the Master / Slave system (G1.9 = YES), the Master reports this fault because a slave
F96:Master
has failed. To activate the fault, set G25.3 = YES.
F99:PowerPLC The PowerPLC macro has triggered a fault.
F100:Expansion fans
Failure in communication with the fans board.
comm
F101:I/O exp version
The software version of the I/O expansion board does not match the software version of the drive.
mismatch
F102:Exp analog I/O A
comm
Failure in communication with analog I/O expansion board A. EN
F103:Exp analog I/O B
Failure in communication with analog I/O expansion board B.
comm
F104:Analog input 5 The SD750 has stopped receiving a signal through the analog input 5 while [G4.6.14 AI5 loss protection]
missing is set to "YES". The device has lost the signal entered through this input.
F105:Analog input 6 The SD750 has stopped receiving a signal through the analog input 6 while [G4.7.14 AI6 loss protection]
missing is set to "YES". The device has lost the signal entered through this input.
F106:Analog input 7 The SD750 has stopped receiving a signal through the analog input 7 while [G4.8.14 AI7 loss protection]
missing is set to "YES". The device has lost the signal entered through this input.
F107:Exp digital I/O B
Failure in communication with digital I/O expansion board B.
comm
F108:Expansion Profinet
Failure in communication with the Profinet board.
comm
F109:Exp EthernetIP
Failure in communication with the Ethernet/IP board.
comm
F110:Lost PNET c1
Failure in communication with the connector 1 of the Profinet board.
comms
F111:Lost PNET c2
Failure in communication with the connector 2 of the Profinet board.
comms
F112:Lost CIP c2 comms Failure in communication with the connector 1 of the Ethernet/IP board.
F113: Lost PBUS c1
Failure in communication with the connector 1 of the Profibus board.
comms

FAULT MESSAGES. DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS 19

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Troubleshooting
DISPLAY POSSIBLE CAUSE ACTIONS
F0 - -
Motor output short circuit:
Wiring fault. Check output cables and motor for possible wiring
F1:Overcurrent
Circuit fault. faults or short circuits.
Motor fault.
High voltage peak on the input.
High load regeneration. Check conditions of input power supply. Decrease
F2:Overvoltage
Deceleration ramp too high (parameters G5.2.1 deceleration ramps.
and G5.2.2).
F3:PDINT See faults F1 and F2. See faults F1 and F2.
F4:Overload U Check if there are possible wiring faults or a motor
F5:Overload V Short circuit. fault. If the fault persists after disconnecting output
F6:Overload W wires request technical assistance.
See actions for faults F4, F5 and F6 (individual
F7:Multiple Overload See faults F4, F5 and F6.
overloads).
Check the braking resistor. If the fault persists once
F8:Dinamic brake
Short circuit or overload in the braking resistor. the cables of the braking resistor have been
overload
disconnected, request technical assistance.
See possible causes for faults F4 – F9. See actions for F4 – F9.
F10:Safety stop (STO) Revise the external circuit, where the safe stop
Safe stop contact of the drive has been activated. contact is connected, that produces the activation of
this contact into the drive.
Input power is incorrect, damaged fuses. Check conditions of input power supply.
F11:Input voltage Lost
Input wiring is incorrect. Check wiring.
Input power is incorrect, damaged fuses. Check conditions of input power supply.
F12:V input Unbal
Input wiring is incorrect. Check wiring.
Input power is incorrect. Check input power conditions.
F13:V input high Incorrect setting of parameter [G11.1.3 Supply over
Check parameters settings.
voltage].
Input power is incorrect, damaged fuses. Check input power conditions.
F14:V input low Incorrect setting of parameter [G11.1.1 Supply
Check parameters settings.
under voltage].
Input power is incorrect. Check input power conditions, load type of the
application, and all the motor mechanical parts. If the
F15:Bus ripple Motor is driving an unstable load.
fault persists after disconnecting output wires,
One of the input fuses is damaged. request technical assistance.
High voltage peak on the input. Check conditions of input power supply.

F16:Bus Overvoltage High load regeneration. Check stop conditions of the drive.
Deceleration ramp is too high (parameters G5.2.1
Decrease deceleration ramps.
and G5.2.2).
F17:Bus under voltage Input power is wrong, damaged fuses. Check conditions of input power supply.
Motor is driving an unstable load. Check motor circuit completely in case of possible
wiring faults or motor fault. If the fault persists after
F18:Unbal.V output Motor wiring fault.
disconnecting output wires, request technical
Motor is wrong. assistance.
Motor is supporting unstable loads.
Check motor circuit completely in case of possible
F19:Unbal.I output Motor wiring fault.
wiring faults or motor fault.
Motor is wrong.
Disconnect the motor and wiring of the SD750 and
Motor or wiring has short-circuited to ground.
F20:Ground current check motor insulation.
Ground is incorrectly connected or wrong. Check and improve the ground connection system.

20 FAULT MESSAGES. DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

DISPLAY POSSIBLE CAUSE ACTIONS

Motor stalled. Heavy load. Check the motor load.
F21:Overcurrent limit
Motor mechanical brake is coupled. Increase maximum current limit.
Motor stalled. Heavy load. Check the motor load.
F22:Torque limit
Motor mechanical brake is coupled. Increase maximum torque limit.
Speed reference is lower or equal than the speed
Check the reference source and the motor load.
limit.
F23:Min speed limit
Motor speed is out of control or motor is not
Verify speed limits.
accelerating due to the load.
Decrease deceleration ramp.
Excessive regeneration is produced due to
F24:Regen. torque limit Check the setting of parameters related to
deceleration ramp to high.
regenerating current limitation (G10.12 and G10.13).

High current used by the motor due to heavy load. Check motor load.

The load exceeds the capacity of motor cooling Check the motor load.
under normal operating conditions. Check the setting of parameters ‘G2.1 MTR CUR’
F25:Motor overload
Incorrect setting of the thermal model parameters.
and ‘G2.7 MTR COOL’ relating to the motor thermal
model. Increasing the parameter ‘G2.7 MTR COOL’,
EN
Phase loss of the motor or a fault in motor can be undertaken when there is a motor PTC fitted
windings. and it is connected to the SD750.
F26:Internal
There is a problem in the internal electronics. Contact the Technical Service.
communications
Try resetting the fault. Disconnect and connect the
The soft charge resistors of the equipment are not
F27:Softcharge power again. If the fault persists, contact Power
working correctly.
Electronics technical service.
F28:Regenerative I
Regenerative VSD fault. See the corresponding manual.
Limit
F31:SCR L1
A conduction fault has been produced in the Try to reset the fault. Disconnect and re-connect
F32:SCR L2 corresponding thyristor. The thyristor is OFF when again the input power. If the fault persists request
it should be on. technical assistance.
F33:SCR L3
Check if there is an object blocking ventilation.
Blocked or poor ventilation.
Improve the cooling.
Check if the heat sink and the cooling fan are
F34:IGBT temperature Heat sink and cooling fan fault on the SD750.
operating correctly.
Check the cooling and thermal conditions. Request
Ambient temperature is higher than 50°C.
technical assistance.
Reset the fault; if it persists, request technical
F35:DSP Watchdog Input power fault.
assistance.
There is a communication problem between the Remove drive power supply and turn it on again.
F36:Encoder card com.
encoder card and central control. Check the encoder configuration.
F37:Encoder card
The encoder card is not detected. Verify the card is connected correctly.
timeout
F38:Encoder Wrong encoder reading Check the encoder wiring and its power.

Check the motor is connected.

F39:No load There is no load on the output of the equipment.
Check that the current meters work correctly (current
transducers, wiring).
Actuation of the external trigger device. Check the external trip switch (if any).
Check the temperature of the motor.
The motor is overheated (the motor load exceeds
F40:PTC the cooling capacity at operating speed). To reset the fault, the motor must be at a normal
temperature.
Fault in the sensor connection. Check the sensor connection.
Fault triggered by a computer via serial Disconnect the communication and check if the fault
F41:Serial comms
communication. persists.

FAULT MESSAGES. DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS 21

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

DISPLAY POSSIBLE CAUSE ACTIONS

F42:Analog input 1 Analogue input cable has become loose or Verify the wiring and the device which provides the
missing disconnected (terminals 17 y 18). analogue signal.
F43:Analog input 2 Analogue input cable has become loose or Verify the wiring and the device which provides the
missing disconnected (T19 y T20). analogue signal.

F44:Drive calibration Incorrect internal reference voltage levels. Check the drive select. Request technical assistance

Deceleration ramps (parameters G5.2.1 and Verify that the time set in parameter ‘G11.2.1 Max
G5.2.2) are too slow. stop timeout’ to stop the system after setting
F45:Stop timeout
SD700 is voltage limiting voltage due to deceleration ramps and checking the system
regeneration from the motor. performance.
F46:Data fault Integrated circuit fault. Request technical assistance.

Communications cable is loose or has been cut. Verify the wiring of communications system.
F47:Comms
Master device has not sent valid data in the
Verify the data and settings of the master device.
required frame or it has sent incorrect data.
F48:Internal Reset the equipment and if the fault persists request
Input power fault.
communications technical assistance.
Speed reference is higher or equal than the speed
Check the reference source and the motor load.
limit.
F49:Max speed limit
Motor speed is out of control or motor is
Check the reference source and the motor load.
accelerating because of the load.
Reset the equipment and if the fault persists request
F50:Power supply Damaged power supply.
technical assistance.
Incorrect network voltage. Check power conditions.
F52:Lost control
voltage
Incorrect wiring. Check wiring.
Verify that the ambient conditions are proper for the
equipment.
F53:Max internal The internal temperature limits of the equipment
temperature have been exceeded. Make sure that there is nothing obstructing the
cooling fans (dust, papers, dirt, etc.) and that they
rotate correctly.
Remove power and reconnect it.
F54:Watchdog reset There has been a failure in the microcontroller.
If the fault persists contact Power Electronics.
F55:Contactor The timeout set in parameter G4.1.27 has been Verify the feedback of the digital output configured in
Feedback exceeded. parameter G4.1.27.
An external trip has been produced by closing a Verify the wiring of digital input.
F56:External
contact on the digital input configured in this
emergency stop Check the installation.
option.
High current used by the motor due to heavy load. Check the motor load.
The load exceeds the capacity of the motor cooling
Check if the motor cooling is appropriate.
under normal operating conditions.
F57:Pump overload
Incorrect setting of the parameters related to pump Check the setting of the parameters related to pump
overload. overload in group G11.
Phase loss of the motor or a fault in motor
Contact Power Electronics.
windings.
F58:CAN interface Reserved. Contact Power Electronics.
F59:Analog input 3 Check wiring and the equipment that provides the
Analogue input 3 missing
missing analogue signal.
The active connection with the Ethernet/IP Client Check the Ethernet/IP connection of the client (PLC,
F60:Lost CIP c1 comms
has been lost. PC).
Verify the cable of the board connector is properly
The PLC has detected a fault in the Ethernet/IP
F61:EIP Fault connected.
board.
Verify the board is connected correctly.
F62:CANopen comm
Reserved. Contact Power Electronics.
lost
F63:CANopen sdo
Reserved. Contact Power Electronics.
transmission

22 FAULT MESSAGES. DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

DISPLAY POSSIBLE CAUSE ACTIONS

F64:CANopen
Reserved. Contact Power Electronics.
transmission
The minimum value set in G11.2.12 has been Check the motor load.
F68:Pump underload
reached. Check G11.2.12, G11.2.13 and G11.2.14.
F69:Serial I/O comm The serial I / O board does not work correctly. Check the wiring. Contact Power Electronics.
F71:Exp digital I/O A
The I / O board does not work correctly. Check the wiring. Contact Power Electronics.
comm
F72:Expansion Profibus The communication between Profibus Master and Revise the Profibus wiring and the configuration in
comm Slave is cut off. the Master (PLC).
F73:Comparator 1 The comparator 1 has been disabled. Check the configuration of the comparator 1.
F74:Comparator 2 The comparator 2 has been disabled. Check the configuration of the comparator 2.
F75:Comparator 3 The comparator 3 has been disabled. Check the configuration of the comparator 3.
Short circuit on a line of safe stop circuit with power
or grounded.
Check the STO circuit (Pins STO1, STO2, TEST1,
F76:STO Malfunction
TEST2, etc.)
The push of the safe stop circuit is detected, but
only in one of the 2 lines of the circuit. EN
F77:Incompat. IO Exp Software version is incompatible. Contact Power Electronics.
Check ventilation.
Check the thermal contacts.
F78:Fremaq The temperature of the filter is very high. Check the power contactor.
Verify the wiring of the digital input configured as
"FREEMAQ FLL"
The controller has detected a temperature in the
F79:PT100 Check the ventilation of the transformer cabinet
excessive transformer
Verify the environmental conditions are appropriate
for the equipment.
The temperature limits for the radiator have been
F84:SCR temperature Make sure there is nothing obstructing the cooling
exceeded.
fans (dust, paper, dirt in general) and they rotate
normally.
Verify that fans are not obstructed.
Fans of the equipment are operating wrong.
Check that fans are not dirty and rotate correctly.
Wait for the temperature of the power supply
decreases down to a value in normal conditions and
F85:Fan power
restart it. You can disconnect the equipment, connect
Power supply of the fans has been overheated.
it again, and restart the power supply again. If the
fault persists request technical assistance of Power
Electronics.
F87:Incompatible Dsp The software versions of the micro and DSP are
Contact Power Electronics.
Version not compatible.
F89:Analog input 4 Check wiring and the equipment that provides the
Analogue input 4 missing
missing analogue signal.
The fiber has been broken. Check the wiring.
F93:Time out optical One of the computers in the network has been
Check the status of the equipment.
fiber turned off.
Incorrect connection
The torque demanded by the application is higher Check current limit G10.5 and torque G10.9
F94:Sync lost
than that allowed by the engine. adjusted.
F95:Slave One of the slaves has failed. Check the fault produced in the slave.
F96:Master The Master has failed. Check the fault produced in the master.
F99:PowerPLC As defined by the user of the program. See PowerPLC program.
F100:Expansion fans Check wiring
Communication with the fans board is not correct.
comm Consult with Power Electronics.
The version of software loaded in the expansion
F101:I/O exp version
board does not match the current software version Contact Power Electronics
mismatch
of the drive.

FAULT MESSAGES. DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS 23

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

DISPLAY POSSIBLE CAUSE ACTIONS

F102:Exp analog I/O A Communication with the analog I/O expansion
comm board A is not correct. Check wiring
F103:Exp analog I/O B Communication with the analog I/O expansion Consult with Power Electronics.
comm board B is not correct.
F104:Analog input 5
Analogue input 5 missing
missing
F105:Analog input 6 Check wiring and the equipment that provides the
Analogue input 6 missing
missing analogue signal.
F106:Analog input 7
Analogue input 7 missing
missing
F107:Exp digital I/O B Communication with the digital I/O expansion Check wiring
comm board B is not correct. Consult with Power Electronics.
F108:Expansion Communication with the Profinet board is not
Profinet comm correct.
F109:Exp EthernetIP Communication with the Ethernet/IP board is not
comm correct.
F110:Lost PNET c1 Communication with the connector 1 of the
comms Profinet board is not correct. Verify the board is connected correctly.
F111:Lost PNET c2 Communication with the connector 2 of the Consult with Power Electronics.
comms Profinet board is not correct.
F112:Lost CIP c2 Communication with the connector 2 of the
comms Ethernet/IPboard is not correct.
F113: Lost PBUS c1 Communication with the connector 1 of the
comms Profibus board is not correct.

24 FAULT MESSAGES. DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS

 POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

4. VISUALIZATION PARAMETERS
4
These parameters constantly indicate the input signal status and dynamic parameter status of the SD700.
Visualization lines are the second and the third lines. To access these parameters, user must enter the
Menu by pressing Menu-Parameters-Visualization.

EN
Navigation in Settings

KEY DESCRIPTION

To access an area, group, subgroup or parameter, the user must scroll using the
arrows up and down the display, and press the right arrow

Pressing the right arrow user accesses to each group.

To exit and return to the previous one, the user must press the left arrow.

There is also the possibility of creating favorite display screens that allow quick access to information.

NOTICE

Parameters marked in gray color indicate the parameter value is conditioned to another parameter or
variable.

VISUALIZATION PARAMETERS 25
SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Group V1: Motor Visualization

This group shows information related to motor parameters.

Screen Units Description

SV1.1 Speed reference = 0.0 % % Shows the present reference value of speed which is applied to the motor.

SV1.2 Torque reference = 0.0 % % Shows the present reference value of torque which is applied to the motor.

SV1.3 Motor speed (%) = 0.0 % % Shows the motor speed in %.

SV1.4 Motor speed (rpm) = 0 rpm rpm Shows the motor speed in revs per minute.

SV1.5 Motor frequency = 0.0 Hz Hz Shows the frequency being applied to the motor.

SV1.6 Motor voltage = 0 V V Shows the present voltage applied to the motor.

SV1.7 Motor current = 0.0 A A Shows the present current flowing to the motor.

SV1.8 Motor torque = 0.0 % % Shows the present torque applied to the motor.

SV1.9 Motor phi cosine = 0.85 None Shows the motor's cos phi.

SV1.10 Motor power = 0.0 kW kW Shows the instantaneous power consumption of the motor.

SV1.11.1 U motor current= 0.0 A A Shows the instantaneous current of each phase of the motor (U).

SV1.11.2 V motor current = 0.0 A A Shows the instantaneous current of each phase of the motor (V)

SV1.11.3 W motor current= 0.0 A A Shows the instantaneous current of each phase of the motor (W)

SV1.12.1 U-V motor voltage = 0.0 V V Shows the instantaneous voltage applied (UV)

SV1.12.2 V-W motor voltage = 0.0 V V Shows the instantaneous voltage applied (VW)

SV1.12.3 W-U motor voltage = 0.0 V V Shows the instantaneous voltage applied (UW)
Shows whether the motor PTC is connected or disconnected. Visible if
SV1.13 PTC Status = No None
[G4.1.10 = PTC].
SV1.14 Estimated. Motor temp(%) = 0.0 % % Shows the estimated motor temperature.
Shows the motor temperature measured with the PT100 sensor. Visible if
SV1.15 Motor temperature = 0 ºC ºC
[G4.4.0 = YES].
SV1.17 Encoder speed = 0 rpm rpm Real speed measured by the encoder. Visible if [G18.1 = Yes].

26 VISUALIZATION PARAMETERS
POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Group V2: Drive Visualization

This group shows respective information to the drive parameters.

Screen Units Description

SV2.1.1 L1-L2 supply voltage = 0 V V Shows the input instantaneous voltage applied to the drive (RS)

SV2.1.2 L2-L3 supply voltage = 0 V V Shows the input instantaneous voltage applied to the drive (ST)

SV2.1.3 L3-L1 supply voltage = 0 V V Shows the input instantaneous voltage applied to the drive (RT)

SV2.2 Input voltage average = 0 V V Shows the average input voltage to the drive.

SV2.3 DC bus voltage = 0 V V Shows DC Link voltage of the drive.

SV2.4 Input frequency = 0.0 Hz Hz Shows the frequency of the drive input voltage.
Shows the temperature measured inside the electronics chamber of the
SV2.5.1 Drive temperature = 0 ºC ºC
drive.
SV2.5.2 IGBT temperature = 0 ºC ºC Shows the temperature measured at the power stage of the drive output.

SV2.10 Relative Humidity = 0 % % Shows the internal relative humidity of the converter.
EN
Group V3: External Visualization
Note: The parameters associated with analogue inputs 4 to 7 and analogue outputs 3 to 6 will only be
displayed if an inputs and outputs expansion board has been connected.

Screen Units Description

See units
SV3.1 AI1 value = 0.00 V Shows the value of Analogue Input 1.
G4.2.3
Shows the value of the PID reference proportional to Analogue Input 1 in
SV3.2 AI1 percentage = 100.0 % %
percentage.
See units
SV3.3 AI1 sensor value = 0.0 l/s Shows the value of sensor 1 associated to the Analogue Input 1.
G4.2.2
SV3.4 AI2 value = 0.00 mA mA Shows the value of the Analogue Input 2. Visible if [G4.3.0 = NO]
Shows the value of the PID reference proportional to the Analogue Input 2
SV3.5 AI2 percentage = 100.0 % %
signal. Visible if [G4.3.0 = NO]
See units Shows the value of sensor 2 associated to the Analogue Input 2. Visible if
SV3.6 AI2 sensor value = 0.0 Bar
G4.3.2 [G4.3.0 = NO] and [G4.3.1 = YES]
See Shows the value of sensor 3 associated to the Analogue Input 3. Visible if
SV3.7 AI3 value = 0.00 V
unitsG4.4.3 [G4.4.0 = NO]
Shows the value of the PID reference proportional to the Analogue Input 3
SV3.8 AI3 percentage = 100.0 % %
signal. Visible if [G4.4.0 = NO]
See units Shows the value of sensor 3 associated to the Analogue Input 3. Visible if
SV3.9 AI3 sensor value = 0.0 l/s
G4.4.2 [G4.4.1 = YES]
See units
SV3.10 AI4 value = 0.00 V Shows the value of the Analogue Input 4 (AI4).
G4.5.3
Shows the value of the PID reference proportional to the Analogue Input 4
SV3.11 AI4 percentage = 100.0 % %
signal.
See units Shows the value of sensor 4 associated to the Analogue Input 4. Visible if
SV3.12 AI4 sensor value = 0.0 l/s
G4.5.2 [G4.5.1 = YES].
See units
SV3.13 AI5 value = 0.00 V Shows the value of the Analogue Input 5.
G4.6.3
Shows the value of the PID reference proportional to the Analogue Input 5
SV3.14 AI5 percentage = 100.0 % %
signal.
See units Shows the value of sensor 5 associated to the Analogue Input 5. Visible if
SV3.15 AI5 sensor value = 0.0 l/s
G4.6.2 [G4.6.1 = YES].
See units
SV3.16 AI6 value = 0.00 V Shows the value of the Analogue Input 6.
G4.7.3
Shows the value of the PID reference proportional to the Analogue Input 6
SV3.17 AI6 percentage = 100.0 % %
signal.
See units Shows the value of sensor 6 associated to the Analogue Input 6.. Visible if
SV3.18 AI6 sensor value = 0.0 l/s
G4.7.2 [G4.7.1 = YES].
See units
SV3.19 AI7 value = 0.00 V Shows the value of the Analogue Input 7.
G4.8.3

VISUALIZATION PARAMETERS 27
SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Screen Units Description

Shows the value of the PID reference proportional to the Analogue Input 7
SV3.20 AI7 percentage = 100.0 % %
signal.
See units Shows the value of sensor 7 associated to the Analogue Input 7. Visible if
SV3.21 AI7 sensor value = 0.0 l/s
G4.8.2 [G4.8.1 = YES].
See units
SV3.22 AO1 value = 0.00 V Shows the value of the Analogue output 1.
G8.2.2
SV3.23 AO1 percentage = 0.0 % % Shows the magnitude value associated to the Analogue Output 1
See units
SV3.24 AO2 value = 0.00 V Shows the value of the Analogue output 1. Visible if [G8.3.0 = NO]
G8.3.2
SV3.25 AO2 percentage = 0.0 % % Shows the magnitude value associated to the Analogue Output 2.
See units
SV3.26 AO3 value = 0.00 V Shows the value of the Analogue output 3.
G8.4.2
SV3.27 AO3 percentage = 0.0 % % Shows the magnitude value associated to the Analogue Output 3.
See units
SV3.28 AO4 value = 0.00 V Shows the value of the Analogue output 4.
G8.5.2
SV3.29 AO4 percentage = 0.0 % % Shows the magnitude value associated to the Analogue Output 4.
See units
SV3.30 AO5 value = 0.00 V Shows the value of the Analogue output 5.
G8.6.2
SV3.31 AO5 percentage = 0.0 % % Shows the magnitude value associated to the Analogue Output 5.
See units
SV3.32 AO5 value = 0.00 V Shows the value of the Analogue output 6.
G8.7.2
SV3.33 AO5 percentage = 0.0 % % Shows the magnitude value associated to the Analogue Output 6.
Shows the value of the digital inputs (6, 10 or 16 bits, depending on the
SV3.34 DI status = 000000 -
number of expansion boards connected)
Shows the value of the states of the output relays (3, 8 or 11 bits, depending
SV3.35 Output relays status = 000 -
on the number of expansion boards connected.)
SV3.37 Fans = Off - Shows the status of the fans (on / off)
See units
SV3.38 Pulse Input = 0.0 l/s Shows the measurement of the pulse input. Visible if [G4.3.0 = YES]
G4.3.2

Group V4: Internal Visualization

Screen Units Description
SV4.1 Present fault = 0 - Shows the present fault code.

SV4.2 Nominal V = 500 V V Shows the drive rated voltage.

SV4.3 Nominal I = 46.0 A A Shows the drive rated current.

Shows the reference value in PID mode of the equipment standard
SV4.4 Reference PID = 100.0 %
program.
SV4.4 PID setpoint = 100.0 % % Shows the feedback value in PID mode of the equipment standard program.

SV4.8.1 Comp status 1 = O - Shows the status of the three comparators (C1).

SV4.8.2 Comp status 2 = O - Shows the status of the three comparators (C2).

SV4.8.3 Comp status 3 = O - Shows the status of the three comparators (C3).

SV4.9 Prior to fault status = OFF - Shows the status of the drive before the fault.

28 VISUALIZATION PARAMETERS
POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Group V5: Programmable Parameters

Screen Units Description
SV5.1 Speed local reference = 100.0 % % Shows the speed reference in local mode.

SV5.2 PID local setpoint = 100.0 % % Shows the PID setting in local mode.

SV5.3 Multireference 1 = 10.00 % % Shows the speed value assigned to Multi-reference 1.

SV5.4 Multireference 2 = 20.00 % % Shows the speed value assigned to Multi-reference 2.

SV5.5 Multireference 3 = 30.00 % % Shows the speed value assigned to Multi-reference 3.

SV5.6 Multireference 4 = 40.00 % % Shows the speed value assigned to Multi-reference 4.

SV5.7 Multireference 5 = 50.00 % % Shows the speed value assigned to Multi-reference 5.

SV5.8 Multireference 6 = 60.00 % % Shows the speed value assigned to Multi-reference 6.

SV5.9 Multireference 7 = 70.00 % % Shows the speed value assigned to Multi-reference 7.

SV5.10 Inch speed 1 = 0.00 % % Shows the fixed speed 1.

SV5.11 Inch speed 2 = 0.00 % % Shows the fixed speed 2. EN

SV5.12 Inch speed 3 = 0.00 % % Shows the fixed speed 3.

Group V6: Registers

Screen Units Description
SV6.1.1 Total days counter = 0 days Days Shows the total time during which the drive is running (RUN).

SV6.1.2 Total hours counter = 0 h Hours Shows the total time during which the drive is running (RUN).

SV6.2.1 Partial days counter = 0 days Days Shows the total time during which the drive is running (RUN).

SV6.2.2 Partial hours counter = 0 h Hours Shows the partial time during which the drive is running (RUN).

SV6.3 Clear partial counter = No - Allows resetting the counter of partial time for running status (RUN).

SV6.4.1 Total energy GWh = 0 GWh GWh Shows the drive total energy consumption.

SV6.4.2 Total energy MWh = 0 MWh MWh Shows the drive total energy consumption.

SV6.4.3 Total energy kWh = 0 kWh kWh Shows the drive total energy consumption.

SV6.5.1 Partial energy GWh = 0 GWh GWh Shows the drive partial energy consumption.

SV6.5.2 Partial energy MWh = 0 MWh MWh Shows the drive partial energy consumption.

SV6.5.3 Partial energy kWh = 0 kWh kWh Shows the drive partial energy consumption.

SV6.6 Partial energy reset = No - Allows resetting the counter of partial energy.

Group V8: Date and time

Screen Units Description
SV8.1 Seconds = 0 - Shows the seconds of the current time.

SV8.2 Minutes = 0 - Shows the minutes of the current time.

SV8.3 Hours = 0 - Shows the hours of the current time.

SV8.4 Day = 1 - Shows the day of the current date.

SV8.5 Month = 1 - Shows the month of the current date.

SV8.6 Year = 2015 - Shows the year of the current date.

VISUALIZATION PARAMETERS 29
SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Group V9: Last fault Registers

These registers show the conditions that were present at the moment when the last fault occurred. They
are divided into the following subgroups:

Subgroup V9.1: Motor registers

Screen Units Description
SV9.1.1 Speed reference = 0.0 % % Shows the value of the current speed reference.

SV9.1.2 Torque reference = 0.0 % % Shows the value of the current torque reference.

SV9.1.3 Motor speed (%) = 0.0 % % Shows the motor speed in%.

SV9.1.4 Motor speed (rpm) = 0 rpm rpm Shows the motor speed in rpm.

SV9.1.5 Motor frequency = 0.0 Hz Hz Shows the frequency which the motor is running.

SV9.1.6 Motor voltage = 0 V V Shows the current voltage applied to the motor.

SV9.1.7 Motor current = 0.0 A A Shows the present current to the motor.

SV9.1.8 Motor torque = 0.0 % % Shows the current torque applied to the motor.

SV9.1.9 Motor phi cosine = 0.85 - Shows the motor power factor.

SV9.1.10 Motor power = 0 kW kW Shows the instantaneous power consumption of the motor.

SV9.1.11.1 U motor current = 0.0 A A Shows the instantaneous current per phase of the motor (U).

SV9.1.11.2 V motor current = 0.0 A A Shows the instantaneous current per phase of the motor (V).

SV9.1.11.3 W motor current = 0.0 A A Shows the instantaneous current per phase of the motor (W).

SV9.1.12.1 U-V motor voltage = 0 V V Shows the instantaneous line voltage (U-V).

SV9.1.12.2 V-W motor voltage = 0 V V Shows the instantaneous line voltage (V-W).

SV9.1.12.3 W-U motor voltage = 0 V V Shows the instantaneous line voltage (W-U).
Shows whether the motor PTC is connected or not. Visible if [G4.1.10 =
SV9.1.13 PTC Status = No -
PTC]
SV9.1.14 Motor temperature(%) = 0.0 % % Shows the theoretical heating level of the motor.
Shows the temperature of the motor measured with the PT100 sensor.
SV9.1.15 Motor temperature = 0 ºC ºC
Visible if [G4.4.0 = YES].
SV9.1.16 Encoder pulses = 0 - Shows the pulse count of the Encoder.

SV9.1.17 Encoder speed = 0 rpm RPM Shows the speed seen by the Encoder.

Subgroup V9.2: Drive registers

Screen Units Description
SV9.2.1.1 L1-L2 supply volt = 0 V V Shows the instantaneous input voltage between L1 and L2.

SV9.2.1.2 L2-L3 supply volt = 0 V V Shows the instantaneous input voltage between L2 and L3.

SV9.2.1.3 L3-L1 supply volt = 0 V V Shows the instantaneous input voltage between L3 and L1.

SV9.2.2 Input voltage average = 0 V V Shows the average value of input voltages between phases.

SV9.2.3 DC bus voltage = 0 V V Shows the DC bus voltage.

SV9.2.4 Input frequency = 0.0 Hz Hz Shows the frequency of the input voltage.

SV9.2.5 Drive temperature = 0 ºC ºC Shows the temperature of the drive.

SV9.2.9 IGBT temperature = 0 ºC ºC Shows the temperature measured at the power stage of the drive output.

SV9.2.10 Relative Humidity = 0 % % Shows the internal relative humidity of the drive.

30 VISUALIZATION PARAMETERS
POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Subgroup V9.3: External registers

Screen Units Description

SV9.3.1 AI1 value = 0.00 V V Shows the average value of the analogue input 1.
Shows the speed reference or the PID proportional setting for the analogue
SV9.3.2 AI1 percentage = 100.0 % %
input 1.
SV9.3.3 AI1 sensor value = 0.0 l/s l/s Shows the value of sensor 1 associated with analogue input 1.

SV9.3.4 AI2 value = 0.00 mA mA Shows the average value of the analogue input 2.
Shows the speed reference or the PID proportional setting for the analogue
SV9.3.5 AI2 percentage = 100.0 % %
input 2.
SV9.3.6 AI2 sensor value = 0.0 Bar Bar Shows the value of sensor 1 associated with analogue input 2.

SV9.3.7 AI3 value = 0.00 V See units G4.4.3 Shows the average value of the analogue input 3.
Shows the speed reference or the PID proportional setting for the analogue
SV9.3.8 AI3 percentage = 100.0 % %
input 3.
SV9.3.9 AI3 sensor value = 0.0 l/s See units G4.4.2 Shows the value of sensor 1 associated with analogue input 3.

SV9.3.10 AI4 value = 0.00 V

SV9.3.11 AI4 percentage = 100.0 %

See units G4.5.3 Shows the average value of the analogue input 4.

%
Shows the speed reference or the PID proportional setting for the analogue
EN
input 4.
SV9.3.12 AI4 sensor value = 0.0 l/s See units G4.5.2 Shows the value of sensor 1 associated with analogue input 4.

SV9.3.13 AI5 value = 0.00 V See units G4.6.3 Shows the average value of the analogue input 5.
Shows the speed reference or the PID proportional setting for the analogue
SV9.3.14 AI5 percentage = 100.0 % %
input 5.
SV9.3.15 AI5 sensor value = 0.0 l/s See units G4.6.2 Shows the value of sensor 1 associated with analogue input 5.

SV9.3.16 AI6 value = 0.00 V See units G4.7.3 Shows the average value of the analogue input 6.
Shows the speed reference or the PID proportional setting for the analogue
SV9.3.17 AI6 percentage = 100.0 % %
input 6.
SV9.3.18 AI6 sensor value = 0.0 l/s See units G4.7.2 Shows the value of sensor 1 associated with analogue input 6.

SV9.3.19 AI7 value = 0.00 V See units G4.8.3 Shows the average value of the analogue input 7.
Shows the speed reference or the PID proportional setting for the analogue
SV9.3.20 AI7 percentage = 100.0 % %
input 7.
SV9.3.21 AI7 sensor value = 0.0 l/s See units G4.8.2 Shows the value of sensor 1 associated with analogue input 7.

SV9.3.22 AO1 value = 0.00 V See units G8.2.2 Shows the value of analogue output 1.

SV9.3.23 AO1 percentage = 0.0 % % Shows the value of sensor 1 associated with analogue output 1.

SV9.3.24 AO2 value = 0.00 V See units G8.3.2 Shows the value of analogue output 2.

SV9.3.25 AO2 percentage = 0.0 % % Shows the value of sensor 1 associated with analogue output 2.

SV9.3.26 AO3 value = 0.00 V See units G8.4.2 Shows the value of analogue output 3.

SV9.3.27 AO3 percentage = 0.0 % % Shows the value of sensor 1 associated with analogue output 3.

SV9.3.28 AO4 value = 0.00 V See units G8.5.2 Shows the value of analogue output 4.

SV9.3.29 AO4 percentage = 0.0 % % Shows the value of sensor 1 associated with analogue output 4.

SV9.3.30 AO5 value = 0.00 V See units G8.6.2 Shows the value of analogue output 5.

SV9.3.31 AO5 percentage = 0.0 % % Shows the value of sensor 1 associated with analogue output 5.

SV9.3.32 AO6 value = 0.00 V See units G8.7.2 Shows the value of analogue output 6.

SV9.3.33 AO6 percentage = 0.0 % % Shows the value of sensor 1 associated with analogue output 6.
Shows the status of each of the digital inputs of the central control: 000000
SV9.3.34 DI status = 000000 -
(input 1: first from the left).
Shows the status of digital inputs: 00000000000 (entry 1: first from the left).
SV9.3.35 DI status = 00000000000 - Note: Only displayed if an expansion board has been connected. If there are
two expansion boards connected, 16 bits will be displayed.

VISUALIZATION PARAMETERS 31
SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Screen Units Description

Shows the status of each of the digital outputs of the central control: 000000
SV9.3.36 DO status = 000 -
(input 1: first from the left).
Shows the status of the digital outputs: 00000000000 (entry 1: first from the
left).
SV9.3.37 DO status = 00000000 -
Note: Only displayed if an expansion board has been connected. If there are
two expansion boards connected, 16 bits will be displayed.

Subgroup V9.4: Internal registers

Screen Units Description
SV9.4.1 Last fault = 0 NINGUNA Shows the present fault code.
SV9.4.2 Drive nominal current =
A Shows the rated current of the drive.
46.0 A
SV9.4.3 Drive nominal voltage =
V Shows the rated voltage of the drive.
500 V
SV9.4.6 PID setpoint = 100.0 % % Shows the setpoint value of the PID of the standard equipment program.
SV9.4.7 PID feedback value =
% Shows the PID feedback value of the standard equipment program.
100.0 %
SV9.4.8.1 Comp status 1 = O - Shows the status of the three comparators (C1)

SV9.4.8.2 Comp status 2 = O - Shows the status of the three comparators (C2)

SV9.4.8.3 Comp status 3 = O - Shows the status of the three comparators (C3)

32 VISUALIZATION PARAMETERS
 POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

5. DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING
PARAMETERS 5
This menu contains all the configuration parameters. These parameters are organized in subgroups or
sub-menus to facilitate their location.

To access these parameters, enter: Menu - Parameters - Configuration:

EN

Navigation in Settings

KEY DESCRIPTION

To access an area, group, subgroup or parameter, user must scroll using the
arrows up and down, and press the right arrow.

Pressing the right arrow user accesses each group.

To exit and return to the previous screen, user must press the left arrow.

Use this key to change the scale when adjusting a parameter (x1, x10, x100,
x1000, x10000).
1. Enable edit mode by pressing “Menu” key. “EDx1” will appear
in the top of the screen.

2. Choose the scale by using the left/right arrow keys (see

example).

3. Adjust the digit – according to the selection made on step 2 –

by using the up/down arrow keys.

Example: Value that will be entered = 1453,2

Parameter
1 4 5 3 , 2
value
Scale
X10000 X1000 X100 X10 X1
adjustment

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 33

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Group 1: Options
Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows user to lock SD750 parameters totally or partially. To lock you must introduce a password
in G1.2.

OPT DESCRIPTION FUNCTION

0 NO Parameter lock is not active.
G1.1 Lock
0-3 All parameters are locked except for G1.1, G1.2, G3.3 YES
parameters = No 1 PARTIAL LOCK
and G6.2 (PID reference).
2 TOTAL LOCK Only G1.1 and G1.2 can be modified.
Parameters cannot be modified using the display. To
3 DISP LOCK perform any changes, user must unlock them or
connect through Modbus.
Allows user to introduce a password to lock parameters and avoid unauthorized changes in the
G1.1a Lock password programming.
0 - 65535 YES
=0 If any lock option has been enabled in G1.1, then this parameter appears automatically.
Unlock: In [G1.1 = 1 or 2] set 0➔ NO. The [G1.1a Lock password] screen will appear.
G1.1b Unlock It provides information for the recovery of the blocking code introduced with the expression:
0 -65535 YES
password recov. = 0 Unlock password = (XXXX/2)-3.
G1.2 Language = Spanish Allows selecting the language of the web access of the equipment. The display language is
YES
Spanish English selected in the "Settings" menu.

Allows selecting the parameters that we desire to initialize back to the factory default value.

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION

G1.3 Initialize = No
0-3 0 No init None of parameters is initialized. YES
init
1 User parameters User parameters are only initialized.
2 Motor parameters Motor data are only initialized.
3 All parameters All parameters of the drive are initialized.

G1.4 Short menu = NO If it is active, then configuration menus will not be accessible. Only visible G1 OPTIONS MENU,
YES
No YES G10 LIMITS, and Display groups.
G1.5 Activate Standard, Standard: Normal equipment functionalities.
YES
programs = Standard 1-8 1 to 8: Additional user functions programmed with PowerPLC, such as the PUMPS MACRO.
G1.6 Service group
Group reserved for the Technical Service or Power Electronics authorized personnel.
password = 0
G1.7 Network No
Allows to select whether the inverter has the bypass mode. NO
synchronization = 0 Yes
Synchronization between different equipment in the same application. There must necessarily
G1.9 Master/slave Disable = 0
always be a MASTER (there can only be one), and a SLAVE (there can be several). The YES
config = Disable Enable = 1
connection between the equipment by optical fiber is needed.

34 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Group 2: Motor Nameplate Data

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G2.1 Motor plate Allows setting of the motor rated current according to its nameplate
0.2In - 1.5In A NO
current = 1.0In A Note: In = Rated motor current.
G2.2 Motor plate
0 - 700 V Allows setting of the motor rated voltage according to its nameplate. NO
voltage = 0 V (*)
G2.3 Motor plate Allows setting of the motor rated power according to its nameplate. This value depends on the
0.0 - 6500.0 kW NO
power = Pn (*) rated current of the drive.

G2.4 Motor plate rpm 0 - 24000 rpm Allows setting of the motor rated speed according to its nameplate. NO
= 1485 rpmNota:
G2.5 Motor plate phi
0.01 - 0.99 Allows setting of motor cosine Phi according its nameplate. NO
cosine = 0.85
G2.6 Motor plate Allows setting of the motor rated frequency according to its nameplate.
0 - 599 Hz NO
frequency = 50 Hz Note: For operating frequencies above 100 Hz consult Power Electronics.
It provides adjustment of sensitive of the motor thermal model based on actual motor cooling.
The following settings can be taken as reference:
Submersible pumps and non-deflagrating motor ➔ 5%
Self-cool motor ➔ 63%
G2.7 Motor cooling =
63 %
50% - 100%,
off
Forced-cool motor ➔ 100%
Note: If the drive is working at low speeds for a long time and several trips caused by motor
thermal model are produced even though the motor was not hot then this value can be increased
YES EN
slightly to avoid further tripping.
Note: If it is set to ‘OFF’, thermal model will be deactivated.
Note: This protection estimates the temperature in the motor. To guarantee the motor protection,
it is recommended to use the motor sensor (PTC).

Note: If all these values are not entered correctly, the SD700 will not operate correctly. When the motor nameplate offers
multiple configuration possibilities, as in case of the start-delta motor connection, ensure the correct data is entered for
the appropriate configuration.

(*) The default value of these parameters depends on the motor nameplate.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 35

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Group 3: References
Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows selecting the source 1 or 2 for the speed reference.

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION

0 None Reference source 1 has not been selected.
1 Analog Input 1 Reference will be introduced through the Analogue Input 1.
2 Analog Input 2 Reference will be introduced through the Analogue Input 2.
G3.1 Speed ref 1 Reference will be the sum of the signals introduced through
3 Analog Input 1+2 YES
source = Local the Analogue Inputs 1 and 2.
Reference will be given by keypad and will be set in [G3.3
5 Local
Local Speed Reference].
Multi-Reference. Different references activated by the digital
6 Multireferences inputs. It will be necessary to configure the digital inputs. See
[G4.1 ➔ Digital Inputs].
Motorized
7 Motorized potentiometer with or without reference memory.
potentiometer
0 - 17 It will take as reference the value set in the parameters of the
8 PID
PID function.
9 Analog Input 3 Reference will be introduced through the Analogue Input 3.
10 Comunicaciones The reference will be introduced through the communications.
11 Fiber Reserved.
12 PowerPLC Reference will be introduced through PowerPLC.
G3.2 Speed ref 2 13 Analog Input 4 Reference will be introduced through the Analogue Input 4.
14 Analog Input 5 Reference will be introduced through the Analogue Input 5. YES
source = Local
15 Analog Input. 6 Reference will be introduced through the Analogue Input 6.
16 Analog Input 7 Reference will be introduced through the Analogue Input 7.
17 EthernetIP Reference will be introduced through the Ethernet/IP network.

Notes:
• Options 13 to 16 will only be visible if an IO expansion board has been connected.
• Option 17 will only be available if the Ethernet/IP board has been connected.
G3.3 Speed local Allows the user to set the motor speed value if the reference source for speed has been set to
-250 - 250% YES
reference = 100.0 % ‘LOCAL’.
Allows selecting the source of the torque control reference (G3.4) and the reference source of the
alternative torque control (G3.5).

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION

0 None Reference source 1 has not been selected.
1 Analog Input 1 Reference will be introduced through the Analogue Input 1.
G3.4 Torque ref 1 2 Analog Input 2 Reference will be introduced through the Analogue Input 2.
YES
source = Local Analog Input Reference will be the sum of the signals introduced through the
3
1+2 Analogue Inputs 1 and 2.
Reference will be given by keypad and will be set in ‘G3.3’Local
5 Local
Speed Reference’.
Multi-Reference. Different references activated by the digital
6 Multireferences inputs. It will be necessary to configure the digital inputs. See
‘G4.1 ➔ Digital Inputs’.
Motorized
7 Motorized potentiometer with or without reference memory.
potentiometer
0 - 17 It will take as reference the value set in the parameters of the
8 PID
PID function.
9 Analog Input 3 Reference will be introduced through the Analogue Input 3.
10 Comunicaciones The reference will be introduced through the communications.
11 Fiber Reserved.
12 PowerPLC Reference will be introduced through PowerPLC.
G3.5 Torque ref 2 13 Analog Input 4 Reference will be introduced through the Analogue Input 4.
YES
source = Local 14 Analog Input 5 Reference will be introduced through the Analogue Input 5.
15 Analog Input 6 Reference will be introduced through the Analogue Input 6.
16 Analog Input 7 Reference will be introduced through the Analogue Input 7.
17 EthernetIP Reference will be introduced through the Ethernet IP network.

Notes:
• Options 13 to 16 will only be visible if an IO expansion board has been connected.
• Option 17 will only be available the corresponding board has been connected and the
Ethernet/IP protocol enabled.
G3.6 Torque local
-250 - 250% Adjust the local torque reference. YES
reference = 100.0 %

36 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Group 4: Inputs
This group of programming parameters is divided into different subgroups.

Subgroup 4.1: Digital Inputs

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows setting the control mode for the drive commands (Start/Stop, Reset, ...)

OPT. FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

0 None Control mode 1 is not operative.
None 1 Local Drive control is done by keypad.
Local 2 Remote Drive controlled through control terminals.
Remote 3 Communications Drive controlled through communication bus.
G4.1.1 Main control
Communications Drive controlled through optical fiber NO
mode = Local 4 Fiber
Fiber Note: When G25.1 = master.
PowerPLC Drive controlled with the PowerPLC macro.
EthernetIP 5 PowerPLC
Note: This option will not be available if the macro is disabled.
Drive controlled through the Ethernet IP network.
6 EthernetIP Note:This option will only appear if an Ethernet/IP board has
been connected.
EN
Allows setting the control mode for the drive commands (Start/Stop, Reset, ...).

OPT. FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

0 None Control mode 2 is not operative.
1 Local Drive control is done by keypad.
2 Remote Drive controlled through control terminals.
None
3 Communications Drive controlled through communication bus.
Local
Remote Drive controlled through optical fiber
G4.1.2 Alternative 4 Fiber
Communications Note: When G25.1 = master. NO
ctrl mode = Remote Drive controlled with the PowerPLC macro.
Fiber 5 PowerPLC
PowerPLC Note: This option will not be available if the macro is disabled.
EthernetIP Drive controlled through the Ethernet IP network.
6 EthernetIP Note:This option will only appear if the Ethernet/IP board has
been connected and the protocol enabled.

Note: Control mode 2 will be activated exclusively through the digital inputs. For this, some of these
must be set to 17 ➔ Control 2. When the input is activated, the auxiliary control mode will enter
into operation, inhibiting the main mode.
Allows user to reset faults from the keypad unit (LOCAL).
G4.1.3 Allow local No
OPT. FUNCTION YES
reset = Yes Yes
No It is not possible to reset from the keypad unit.
Yes The drive can be reset via the reset button on the keypad unit.
Allows user to configure the digital inputs for different functions. All options described below will
program to all the digital inputs simultaneously, except for option ‘1 ➔ All Programmable’, which
allows configuring them separately.

OPT. FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

All
1 Inputs configuration individually by user. See G4.1.5 to G4.1.10.
programmable
Digital inputs 5 and 6 are programmed as multiple references (of
speed or PID references) for up to 4 preset speeds. The
remaining inputs are user programmable.
G4.1.4 Digital input PARM DI5 DI6 NO
mode = All 0–5 2 Mref 2 wires G14.4 0 0
programmable G14.5 0 X
G14.6 X 0
G14.7 X X

Note: It is necessary to set G3.1 or G3.2 to “Multireferences”.

Note: Continues in the following page.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 37

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Note: Comes from the previous page.

OPT FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

Digital inputs 4, 5 and 6 are programmed as multiple references
(of speed or PID references) for up to 7 preset speeds. The
remaining inputs are user programmable.

PARM DI4 DI5 DI6

G14.1 0 0 X
3 Mref 3 wires G14.2 0 X 0
G14.3 0 X X
G14.4 X 0 0
G14.5 X 0 X
G14.6 X X 0
G4.1.4 Digital input G14.7 X X X
mode = All Note: It is necessary to set G3.1 or G3.2 to “Multireferences”.
programmable 0-5 It assigns the up and down reference function for two of the digital
inputs.
DI5 = Up (NO contact)
DI6 = Down (NC contact)
Reference limits will be the speed limits set in ‘G10 LIMITS’.
Programming a change ramp is possible at:
G5.3.1 Mot pot accel rate 1 =3%/s
Motorized
4 G5.3.2 Mot pot decel rate 1 =3%/s
potentiometer
G5.3.3 Mot pot accel rate 2 =1%/s
G5.3.4 Mot pot decel rate 2 =1%/s
G5.3.5 Mot pot rate brk speed = 0 %

Note: In this mode, the reference set by potentiometer will be

memorized even if the motor is stopped and in the case of a
power loss.
It operates in the same way as option 4, but when the motor is
stopped, or a power loss occurs, the reference will not be
Resettable memorized. In this case the minimum reference value set in
5
potentiometer G10.1 or G10.1.3 will be the default speed. This will happen when
the limit is above zero, if the limit is equal or below zero, the
default speed will be zero.

Caution: Digital input configuration changes their settings automatically. Make sure there
is not a hazard due to accidental motor starting that can cause property damage or personal injury.
Allows user to configure the digital inputs for individual use.

OPT FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

00 No use Input is disabled.
‘Start’ command from a normally open push button (NO).
G4.1.5 Digital Input 1 01 Start (NO) First, it is necessary to configure another input as a ‘Stop’
command from a normally closed contact (NC). NO
= Start / Stop
‘Stop’ command from a normally closed push button. Stop
02 Stop 1 (NC)
mode is adjusted in G7.2.1 Main stop mode. (NC)
‘Stop’ command from a normally closed pushbutton. Stop
03 Stop 2 / Reset mode is adjusted in G7.2.2 Alternative stop mode. Activation
of the input in this mode also acts as a ‘Reset’ signal. (NC)
‘Stop’ command from a normally closed pushbutton. Stop
0 – 48
04 Stop 1 / Reset mode is adjusted in G7.2.1 Main stop mode. Activation of the
input in this mode also acts a ‘Reset’ signal. (NC)
Allows start when closed and stop when open (2 wires start /
05 Start / Stop
stop). (NO)
Start / Reset / Allows start when closed and stop when open (2 wires start /
06
Stop stop). Activation of this input also acts a fault reset. (NO)
G4.1.6 Digital Input 2 ‘Reset’ signal by push button. (NC). User can choose this NO
= Reference 2 option independently of the selected program and the
07 Reset (NC)
control mode used (LOCAL, REMOTE,
COMMUNICATION)

Note: Continues in the following page.

38 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN

Note: Comes from the previous page.

OPT FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

Start’ command and inch speed 1 when closed. Inch
08 Start + Inch 1
speed is programmed in G15.1 Inch speed 1. (NO)
G4.1.7 Digital Input 3 Start’ command and inch speed 2 when closed. Inch NO
= Control 2 speed is programmed in G15.2 INCH2. (NO). If two
inputs configured with the options 08 ➔Run +
09 Start + Inch 2 VFit1 and 09 ➔ Run + VFit2 are activated
simultaneously, the combination of Run + Fixed
Speed 3 programmed in [G15.3 VEL FIJ3] is
obtained.
It causes deceleration of the motor until motor is
stopped and inverts the rotation direction. (NO). To
10 Invert speed
allow the motor to rotate at negative speeds,
[G10.1.7= Yes] is required.
It inverts the fixed speed reference set in G15.1, G15.2
13 Invert inches or G15.3. (NO). To allow the motor to rotate at
negative speeds, [G10.1.7 = Yes] is required.
If active, acceleration and deceleration ramps are
G4.1.8 Digital Input 4
14 Acc / Dec 2 enabled. Alternative acceleration and deceleration NO
= Reset (NC)

15 Reference 2
rates are programmed in G5.1.3 and G5.2.1. (NO)
Allows selecting the alternative speed reference as
EN
programmed in G3.2. (NO)
It activates the alternative control mode as programmed
17 Control 2
in G4.1.2. (NO)
Like the option 06, but ‘Reset’ signal will be activated
18 Start / Stop / Reset
after the drive is stopped. (NO)
Stop’ command from a normally closed pushbutton.
19 Stop 2 (NC) Stop mode is adjusted in G7.2.2 Alternative stop mode.
(NC)
It will change to the alternative speed limits as
20 Speed limit 2
programmed in G10.1.3 and G10.1.4. (NO).
0 - 48 To select the alternative starting mode (Ramp / Spin)
22 Start mode 2
(NO)
G4.1.9 Digital Input 5 23 Current limit 2 To select the alternative current limit. (NO)
NO
= Not used 24 External emergency To generate the fault ‘F56 EMERGEN.STOP’. (NC).
It is an emergency stop which indicates fault in the
25 Freemaq Fault freemaq filter (NC). Drive will trip by fault 78 TMP
FREEMAQ.
Start/Stop + rotation reversal. Start the equipment with
27 Start/Stop + Inv this digital input means starting in the opposite direction
of the reference speed sign.
28 LCL Regenerative fb Not available
To generate the fault 'F79 PT100'. Only valid for
29 PTC
Digital Input 6.
Allows changing the control mode by Speed (input = 0)
32 Speed / Torque
or by Torque (input = 1)
33 Output 1 Feedback 1
34 Output 1 Feedback 2
35 Output 1 Feedback 3
If the status of the input is different during the time set
36 Output 4 Feedback 4
in G4.1.27 to the state of the corresponding output, fault
37 Output 5 Feedback 5
G4.1.10 Digital Input "F55: contactor feedback"
38 Output 6 Feedback 6 NO
6/PTC = Not used 39 Output 7 Feedback 7
40 Output 8 Feedback 8
It stops the drive regardless of control mode & program
41 Universal Stop
selection configured (NO).
43 Output 9 Feedback 9
44 Output 10 Feedback 10 If the status of the input is different during the time set
45 Output 11 Feedback 11 in G4.1.27 to the state of the corresponding output, fault
46 Output 12 Feedback 12 "F55: contactor feedback"
47 Output 13 Feedback 13
Allows selecting the alternative torque limit reference as
48 Torque limit 2
programmed in G10.2.8

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 39

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Configure external inputs for individual use. Available only if an I / O expansion board is
connected.

OPT FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

G4.1.11 Digital Input 00 Not used Input is disabled. NO
7 = Not used Start’ command from a normally open push button
01 Start (NO) (NO). First, it is necessary to configure another input as
a ‘Stop’ command from a normally closed contact (NC).
‘Stop’ command from a normally closed push button.
02 Stop 1 (NC)
Stop mode is adjusted in G7.2.1 Main stop mode. (NC)
‘Stop’ command from a normally closed pushbutton.
Stop mode is adjusted in G7.2.2 Alternative stop mode.
03 Stop 2 / Reset
Activation of the input in this mode also acts as a
‘Reset’ signal. (NC)
G4.1.12 Digital Input ‘Stop’ command from a normally closed pushbutton. NO
8 = Not used Stop mode is adjusted in G7.2.1 Main stop mode.
04 Stop 1 / Reset
Activation of the input in this mode also acts a ‘Reset’
0 – 48 signal. (NC)
Allows start when closed and stop when open (2 wires
05 Start / Stop
start / stop). (NO)
Allows start when closed and stop when open (2 wires
06 Start / Reset / Stop start / stop). Activation of this input also acts a fault
reset. (NO)
G4.1.13 Digital Input ‘Reset’ signal by push button. (NC). User can choose
this option independently of the selected program NO
9 = Not used 07 Reset (NC)
and the control mode used (LOCAL, REMOTE,
COMMUNICATION)
Start’ command and inch speed 1 when closed. Inch
08 Start + Inch 1
speed is programmed in G15.1 Inch speed 1. (NO)
Start’ command and inch speed 2 when closed. Inch
speed is programmed in G15.2 (NO). If two inputs
configured with the options 08 ➔Run + VFit1 and 09
09 Start + Inch 2
G4.1.14 Digital Input ➔ Run + VFit2 are activated simultaneously, the
combination of Run + Fixed Speed 3 programmed in NO
10 = Not used
[G15.3] is obtained.
It causes deceleration of the motor until motor is stopped
and inverts the rotation direction. (NO). To allow the
10 Invert speed
motor to rotate at negative speeds, [G10.1.7 = Yes] is
required.
It inverts the fixed speed reference set in G15.1, G15.2
13 Invert inches or G15.3. (NO). To allow the motor to rotate at
G4.1.15 Digital Input negative speeds, [G10.1.7 = Yes] is required.
NO
11 = Not used It active acceleration and deceleration ramps are
14 Acc / Dec 2 enabled. Alternative acceleration and deceleration rates
are programmed in G5.1.3 and G5.2.1. (NO)
Allows selecting the alternative speed reference as
15 Reference 2
programmed in G3.2. (NO)
It activates the alternative control mode as programmed
17 Control 2
in G4.1.2. (NO)
Like the option 06, but ‘Reset’ signal will be activated after
G4.1.16 Digital Input 18 Start / Stop / Reset
the drive is stopped. (NO) NO
12 = Not used ‘Stop’ command from a normally closed pushbutton. Stop
19 Stop 2 (NC)
mode is adjusted in G7.2.2 Alternative stop mode. (NC)
It will change to the alternative speed limits as
20 Speed limit 2
programmed in G10.1.3 and G10.1.4. (NO).
To select the alternative starting mode (Ramp / Spin)
22 Start mode 2
(NO)
23 Current limit 2 To select the alternative current limit. (NO)
G4.1.17 Digital Input 24 External emergency To generate the fault ‘F56 EMERGEN.STOP’. (NC).
It is an emergency stop which indicates fault in the NO
13 = Not used
25 Freemaq Fault freemaq filter (NC). Drive will trip by fault 78 TMP
FREEMAQ.
Start/Stop + rotation reversal. Start the equipment with
27 Start/Stop + Inv this digital input means starting in the opposite direction
of the reference speed sign.
Feedback for the contactor of the LCL filter. Only for
28 LCL Regenerative fb
regenerative drives.
G4.1.18 Digital Input
NO
14 = Not used
Note: Continues in the following page.

40 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Note: Comes from the previous page.

OPT FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

To generate the fault 'F79 PT100'. Only valid for Digital
G4.1.19 Digital Input 29 PTC
Input 6. NO
15 = Not used
Allows changing the control mode by Speed (input = 0)
32 Speed / Torque
or by Torque (input = 1)
33 Output 1 Feedback 1
34 Output 2 Feedback 2
0 - 48 35 Output 3 Feedback 3
If the status of the input is different during the time set in
36 Output 4 Feedback 4
G4.1.27 to the state of the corresponding output, fault
37 Output 5 Feedback 5
"F55: contactor feedback"
38 Output 6 Feedback 6
39 Output 7 Feedback 7
40 Output 8 Feedback 8
It stops the drive regardless of control mode & program
G4.1.20 Digital Input 41 Universal Stop
selection configured (NO). NO
16 = Not used 43 Output 9 Feedback 9
44 Output 10 Feedback 10 If the status of the input is different during the time set in
45 Output 11 Feedback 11 G4.1.27 to the state of the corresponding output, fault
46 Output 12 Feedback 12 "F55: contactor feedback"
47
48
Output 13 Feedback 13
Torque limit 2
Allows selecting the second torque limit reference as
EN
programmed in G10.2.8

If a digital input is configured as "Output X Feedback X" (Output Feedback 1 to 8) sets the time
G4.1.27 Feedback
Error Timeout = 1.0 s
0.5 - 60.0 s that the value of the selected output and input must remain different so that the" F55: contactor YES
feedback "appears.
Select which of the inputs works in inverted mode.

The default value and range of this parameter depends on the number of available digital inputs
G4.1.28 Invert Input
mode= (*)
DI1 - DI16 (6, 11 or 16 bits will appear). YES
Each of the six, eleven or sixteen digital inputs (ED1 to ED16) is selected individually using this
parameter.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 41

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Subgroup 4.2: Analogue Input 1

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows user to configure analogue input 1 for use with a sensor and activates the parameters
which are necessary to set it up. See G4.2.2 up to G4.2.7.
G4.2.1 Enable sensor N
OPTION FUNCTION NO
= No Y
N=NO The analogue input will remain scaled in default units (%).
The analogue input and any variables relating to the analogue input will be
Y=YES
configured in the engineering units selected in G4.2.2.
%
l/s
m3/s
l/m
m3/m
l/h
Allows selecting different units of measurement for analogue input 1 according to the sensor that
m3/h
is used.
m/s
If this parameter is modified, the minimum and maximum values of the sensor range must be
m/m
G4.2.2 Sensor unit = adjusted to ensure correct configuration. Therefore, the following set values should be checked:
m/h NO
l/s 'G4.2.5 Smi1=+0.0l/s' ➔ Minimum range of sensor.
bar
'G4.2.7 Sma1=+10.0l/s' ➔ Maximum range of sensor.
kPa
psi
Available if [G4.2.1 = YES].
m
ºC
ºF
K
Hz
rpm
G4.2.3 AI1 Format = V Allows configuring the analogue input 1 format for either a voltage or current signal. Set according
NO
V mA to the sensor that will be used.
G4.2.4 AI1 low level = -10.0V to G4.2.6 Determines the minimum voltage or current value for analogue input 1. Set according to the
0.0 V +0.0mA to G4.2.6 characteristics of the sensor that will be connected.
YES

Sets the minimum units value of the sensor connected to analogue input 1. This value should
G4.2.5 Sensor low -3200 to G4.2.7 also correspond to the minimum voltage or current level of the sensor set in 'G4.2.4 INmin1'.
level = 0.0 l/s Engineering units Note: This value should be checked if the units are changed in 'G4.2.2 SENSOR 1'. It will be set
YES
to operate in open loop and close loop.
G4.2.6 AI1 high level G4.2.4 to +10V Determines the maximum voltage or current value for analogue input 1. Set according to the
= 10.0 V G4.2.4 to +20mA characteristics of the sensor that will be connected.
YES

Sets the maximum units value of the sensor connected to analogue input 1. This value should
also correspond to the maximum voltage or current level of the sensor set in 'G4.2.6 INmax1'.
G4.2.7 Sensor high G4.2.5 to +3200
level = 10.0 l/s Engineering units
Available if [G4.2.1 = YES]. YES
Note: This value should be checked if the units are changed in 'G4.2.2 SENSOR 1'. For this, it is
necessary to set this value in open loop and close loop configurations.
Allows scaling of the speed reference to correspond with the minimum range of the analogue input
G4.2.8 AI1 Ref speed
min = 0.0 %
-250.0 to G4.2.9 1 as set in 'G4.2.4 INmin1'. YES
The value is a percentage of the motor rated speed.
Allows scaling of the speed reference to correspond with the maximum range of the analogue
G4.2.9 AI1 Ref speed
max = 100.0 %
G4.2.8 to 250.0% input 1 as set in 'G4.2.6 INmax1'. YES
The value is a percentage of the motor rated speed.
Sets the minimum operating range, if the real operating range is different than the range of the
G4.2.10 Sensor min -3200 to G4.2.12 sensor which will be used as sensor in open loop. It corresponds with the voltage or current level
value = 0.0 l/s Engineering units set in ‘G4.2.4INmin1’. This parameter should be configured to operate with sensor in open loop.
YES
Available if [G4.2.1 = YES].
Allows setting the minimum speed range corresponding to the minimum sensor range set in
G4.2.11 Open loop
min speed = 0.0 %
-250% to +250% ‘G4.2.10 FB1’, when the sensor will be used in open loop. YES
The value is a percentage of the motor rated speed. Available if [G4.2.1 = YES].
Sets the maximum operating range, if the real operating range is different than the range of the
G4.2.12 Sensor max G4.2.10 to +3200 sensor which will be used as sensor in open loop. It corresponds with the voltage or current level
value = 10.0 l/s Engineering units set in ‘G4.2.6INmin1’. This parameter should be configured to operate with sensor in open loop.
YES
Available if [G4.2.1 = YES].
Allows setting the maximum speed range corresponding to the maximum sensor range set in
G4.2.13 Open loop
max speed = 100.0 %
-250% to +250% ‘G4.2.12 FA1’, when the sensor will be used in open loop. YES
The value is a percentage of the motor rated speed. Available if [G4.2.1 = YES].

42 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Sets the drive stop mode when a loss of the analogue input 1 signal occurs.

OPTION FUNCTION
G4.2.14 AI1 loss N
protection = No Y
N=NO Function disabled. YES
When the analogue input level decreases down to zero value, sensor will be
Y=YES considered damaged and the drive will stop generating a fault 'F42 AIN1
LOSS'.
G4.2.15 AI1 zero OFF = 0.0, Filtering of analogue input 1 signal. Setting this value, we can filter analogue input 1 to avoid
band filter = Off 0.1 to 2.0% possible electrical noise preventing the analogue reading a zero value.
YES

Allows filtering the Analogue Input 1 signal. Setting the value of this time constant we can eliminate
G4.2.16 AI1 stabilizer OFF = 0.0, possible instabilities in the value of the same ones due to noise, wiring faults, etc.
filter = Off 0.1 to 20.0% Note: When applying a Low Pass filter to any analogue signal, a delay time in the own signal is
YES
generated. This delay time is the value of the configured time constant approximately.

Subgroup 4.3: Analogue Input 2 / Pulse

Screen Range Function
Set on
RUN
EN
Allows the user to enable analogue input 2 as a pulse input.

OPTION FUNCTION
No The analogue input remains as AI2

If pulse input is enabled, the EA2 must be configured to work with a pulse
sensor via jumper "Jumper" J21 connected in position 2-1. This jumper is
integrated in the control card.
G4.3.0 Enable Pulse No
NO
Input Mode = No Yes
Yes

Allows user to configure analogue input 2 for use with a sensor and activates the parameters
which are necessary to set it up. See G4.3.2 up to G4.3.7. Available if [G4.3.0 = NO]
G4.3.1 Enable sensor No
OPTION FUNCTION NO
= No Yes
No The analogue input will remain scaled in defaults units (%).
The analogue input and any variables relating to the analogue input will be
Yes
configured in the engineering units selected in G4.3.2.

%
l/s
m3/s
l/m
m3/m
l/h Allows selecting different units of measurement for the analogue input 2 according to the sensor
m3/h that is used.
m/s If this parameter is modified, the minimum and maximum values of the sensor range must be
m/m adjusted to ensure correct configuration. Therefore, the following set values should be checked:
G4.3.2 Sensor unit =
m/h 'G4.3.5 Smi2=+0.0bar' ➔ Minimum range of sensor. NO
bar
bar 'G4.3.7 Sma2=+10.0bar' ➔ Maximum range of sensor.
kPa
psi
m Available if [G4.3.1 = YES].
ºC
ºF
K
Hz
rpm

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 43

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
%
l/s
m3/s
l/m
Allows selecting the units of the input when it is configured as "pulse input".
G4.3.2 Sensor unit m3/m
Pulse Input = l/s l/h
YES
Available if [G4.3.0 = YES]
m3/h
m/s
m/m
m/h
G4.3.2b Pulses per Allows adjusting the number of pulses per unit of measurement of the sensor (G4.3.2). For
unit = 100
1 to G4.3.2c
example, 100 pulses = 1 l / s. Available if [G4.3.0 = YES].
YES
G4.3.2c Max pulses =
1000
1 to 32000 Allows adjusting the maximum number of pulses of the sensor. Available if [G4.3.0 = YES]. YES
Allows configuring the format of the analogue input 2 to connect a voltage or current signal based
G4.3.3 AI2 Format = V
mA mA
on the sensor or signal that is going to be used for entering the setpoint. Available if [G4.3.0 = YES
NO].
G4.3.4 AI2 low level = -10.0V to G4.3.6 Defines the minimum voltage or current value for analogue input 2 according to the characteristics
NO
4.0 mA +0.0mA to G4.3.6 of the sensor connected. Available if [G4.3.0 = NO].
Sets the minimum value of units of the sensor connected to analogue input 2, corresponding to
G4.3.5 Sensor low -3200.0 to G4.3.7 the minimum voltage or current level of the sensor set in [G4.3.4 Enmin2].
level = 0.0 Bar Engineering units Note: This value must be checked if the units are changed in [G4.3.2 SENSOR 2]. It will be
YES
adjusted for working in open and closed loop. Available if [G4.3.1 = YES].
G4.3.6 AI2 high level G4.3.4 to +10V Defines the maximum voltage or current value for analogue input 2 according to the characteristics
= 10.0 mA G4.3.4 to +20mA of the sensor to be connected. Available if [G4.3.0 = NO].
YES
Sets the maximum value of units of the sensor connected to analogue input 2, corresponding to
G4.3.7 Sensor high G4.3.5 to +3200 the maximum voltage or current level of the sensor set in [G4.3.6 Enmax2].
level = 10.0 Bar Engineering units Note: This value must be checked if the units are changed in [G4.3.2 SENSOR 2]. This value
YES
must be adjusted in the open and closed loop configurations. Available if [G4.3.1 = YES].
Allows setting the speed reference corresponding to the minimum range of analogue input 2,
G4.3.8 AI2 Ref speed corresponding to the minimum voltage or current level set in [G4.3.4 Enmin2]. It is configured to
min = 0.0 %
-250.0 to G4.3.9
enter the speed reference using analogue input. Set the parameter [G4.3.1 SENSOR 2 = N].
YES
The value is a percentage of the nominal motor speed. Available if [G4.3.0 = NO].
Allows setting the speed reference corresponding to the maximum range of analogue input 2,
G4.3.9 AI2 Ref speed corresponding to the maximum voltage or current set in [G4.3.6 Enmax2]. It is configured to enter
max = 100.0 %
G4.3.8 to 250.0%
the speed reference using analogue input. Set the parameter [G4.3.1 SENSOR 2 = N].
YES
The value is a percentage of the nominal motor speed. Available if [G4.3.0 = NO].
To set the minimum operating range, if the real operating range is different than the range of the
G4.3.10 Sensor min
value = 0.0 Bar
-3200.0 to G4.3.12 sensor which will be used as sensor in open loop. Corresponds to the voltage or current level set YES
in G4.2.4. It must be configured to work with the sensor in open loop. Available if [G4.3.1 = YES].
Allows setting the minimum speed range corresponding to the minimum range of the sensor set
G4.3.11 Open loop
min speed = 0.0 %
-250.0 to 250.0% in G4.3.12, when the sensor is going to be used in open loop. YES
The value is a percentage of the nominal motor speed. Available if [G4.3.1 = YES].
To set the minimum operating range, if the real operating range is different than the range of the
G4.3.12 Sensor max G4.3.10 to 3200.0
value = 10.0 Bar Engineering units
sensor which will be used as sensor in open loop. Corresponds to the voltage or current level set YES
in G4.3.6. It must be configured to work with the sensor in open loop. Available if [G4.3.1 = YES].
Allows adjusting the maximum speed range corresponding to the maximum range of the sensor
G4.3.13 Open loop
max speed = 100.0 %
-250.0 to 250.0% set in G4.3.14, when the sensor is going to be used in open loop. YES
The value is a percentage of the nominal motor speed. Available if [G4.3.1 = YES].
Sets the drive stop mode when a loss of the analogue input 2 signal occurs.

OPTION FUNCTION
G4.3.14 AI2 loss No N=NO Function disabled.
protection = No Yes
YES
When the analogue input level decreases down to zero value, sensor will be
Y=YES considered damaged and the drive will stop generating a fault 'F43 AIN2
LOSS'.
Available if [G4.3.0 = NO].
Filtering of analogue input 2 signal. By setting this value, we can filter analogue input 2 to avoid
G4.3.15 AI2 zero OFF=0.0,
band filter = Off 0.1 to 2.0%
possible electrical noise preventing the analogue reading a zero value. Available if [G4.3.0 = YES
NO].
Allows filtering the Analogue Input 2 signal. By setting the value of this time constant we can
eliminate possible instabilities in the value of the same ones due to noise, wiring faults, etc.
G4.3.16 AI2 stabilizer OFF = 0.0,
Available if [G4.3.0 = NO]. YES
filter = Off 0.1 to 20.0%
Note: When applying a Low Pass filter to any analogue signal, a delay time in the own signal is
generated. This delay time is the value of the configured time constant approximately..

44 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Subgroup 4.4: Analogue Input 3 / PT100

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Configures the AI3 to work with a PT100 sensor. When enabled, all other parameters within
this group will become disabled.
G4.4.0 PT100 Mode = No
Note: In case of activating the PT100 mode, besides configuring the analogue input 3 in mode NO
No Yes
PT100 (G4.4.0 = Yes), one of the analogue outputs must be configured in mode 10mA (G8.2.2 or
G8.3.2 = 10mA). See hardware configuration in the Hardware and Installation Manual.
Allows the user to enable the use of analogue input 3 and enables the necessary screens to
configure it. See [G4.4.2] to [G4.4.7].

OPTION FUNCTION
G4.4.1 Enable sensor No The sensor connected to this input can be used to introduce the speed
No NO
= No Yes reference and as open loop sensor.
Yes Analogue input enabled as feedback in closed loop control.

Available if [G4.4.0 = NO].

%
l/s
m³/s
l/m
m³/m
Allows choosing different measure units for the analogue input 3 depending on the function of the
EN
l/h
sensor to be used.
m³/h
m/s
Changing this parameter implies that the minimum and maximum values of the sensor range will
m/m
G4.4.2 Sensor unit = be affected by the corresponding conversion. Thus, it is necessary to verify the values adjusted
m/h NO
l/s in:
Bar
[G4.4.5 Sensor low level =+0.0l/s] ➔ Sensor minimum level.
kPa
[G4.4.7 Sensor high level =+10.0l/s] ➔ Sensor maximum level.
Psi
m
Available if [G4.4.1 =YES].
ºC
ºF
K
Hz
rpm
G4.4.3 AI3 Format = V Allows configuring the format of the analogue input 3 to connect a voltage or current signal,
NO
V mA depending on the sensor to be used to introduce the reference. Available if [G4.4.0 = NO].
G4.4.4 AI3 low level = -10.0V to G4.4.6 Defines the minimum value of voltage or current for analogue input 3 according to the
YES
0.0 V +0.0mA to G4.4.6 characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected. Available if [G4.4.0 = NO].
Adjusts the minimum unit value of the sensor connected to the analogue input 3, which
corresponds with the minimum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.4.4].
G4.4.5 Sensor low -3200 to G4.4.7
Available if [G4.4.1 = YES]. YES
level = 0.0 l/s Engineering units
Note: This value must be revised if the units are changed in [G4.4.2]. It must be adjusted for
operation in open and closed loop.
G4.4.6 AI3 high level G4.4.4 to +20.0V Defines the maximum value of voltage or current for analogue input 3 according to the
YES
= 10.0 V G4.4.4 to +20mA characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected. Available if [G4.4.0 = NO].
Adjusts the maximum unit value of the sensor connected to the analogue input 3, which
corresponds with the maximum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.4.6].
G4.4.7 Sensor high G4.4.5 to +3200
Available if [G4.4.1 = YES]. YES
level = 10.0 l/s Engineering units
Note: This value must be revised if the units are changed in [G4.4.2]. It must be adjusted for
operation in open and closed loop.
Allows adjusting the speed reference for the minimum range of analogue input 3, which
corresponds with the minimum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.4.4]. It is
G4.4.8 AI3 Ref speed
-250% to G4.4.9 configured to introduce the speed reference through the analogue input. Adjust parameter YES
min = 0.0 %
‘G4.4.1 Enable sensor = N’. The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed. Available if
[G4.4.0 = NO].
Allows adjusting the speed reference for the maximum range of analogue input 3, which
corresponds with the maximum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.4.6]. It
G4.4.9 AI3 Ref speed
G4.4.8 to +250% is configured to introduce the speed reference through the analogue input. Adjust parameter YES
max = 100.0 %
‘G4.4.1 Enable sensor = N’. The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed. Available if
[G4.4.0 = NO].
Adjust the minimum working range, if the real working range is different than the one covered by
G4.4.10 Sensor min the sensor that is going to be used as sensor in open loop. Corresponds with the level of voltage
-3200 to G4.4.12 YES
value = 0.0 l/s or current set in G4.4.4. It must be configured to work with the sensor in open loop. Available if
[G4.4.1 = SI].
Allows adjusting the minimum speed range which corresponds to the minimum sensor range set
G4.4.11 Open loop
-250% to +250% in G4.4.10, when the sensor is going to be used in open loop. YES
min speed = 0.0 %
The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed. Available if [G4.4.1 = SI].

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 45

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Adjust the maximum working range, if the real working range is different than the one covered by
G4.4.12 Sensor max -3200 to +3200 the sensor that is going to be used as sensor in open loop. Corresponds with the level of voltage
YES
value = 10.0 l/s Engineering units or current set in G4.4.6. It must be configured to work with the sensor in open loop. Available if
[G4.4.1 = SI].
Allows adjusting the minimum speed range which corresponds to the minimum sensor range set
G4.4.13 Open loop
-250% to +250% in G4.4.12, when the sensor is going to be used in open loop. YES
max speed = 100.0 %
The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed. Available if [G4.4.1 = SI].
Adjusts stop mode of the drive in case the signal from analogue input 3 is lost.

OPTION FUNCTION
G4.4.14 AI3 loss No
No Function is disabled. YES
protection = No Yes
Whenever a sudden drop on the analogue input level is detected, terminating
Yes
in zero, it indicates the sensor is damaged.
Available if [G4.4.0 = NO].
Analogue input 3 signal filtering. By adjusting this value, the analogue signal is filtered to eliminate
G4.4.15 AI3 zero Off = 0.0,
possible electrical noise that prevents reading a zero value when it should. Available if [G4.4.0 = YES
band filter = Off 0.1 to 2.0%
NO].
Allows adjusting a filtering to the analogue input 3 signal. By adjusting the value of this time
constant, it is possible to eliminate possible instabilities in the signal caused by noise, wiring faults,
G4.4.16 AI3 stabilizer Off = 0.0, 0.1 to
etc. Available if [G4.4.0 = NO]. YES
filter = Off 20.0s
Note: The application of a low pass filter to any analogue signal produces a delay of approximately
the value of the configured time constant.

Subgroup 4.5: Analogue input 4

Note: This group will only be shown if an expansion board has been connected.

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows user to configure analogue input 4 and activates the parameters which are necessary to
set it up. See [G4.5.2] to [G4.5.7].
G4.5.1 Enable sensor No
OPTION FUNCTION NO
= No Yes
The sensor connected to this input can be used to introduce the speed
No
reference and as open loop sensor.
Yes Analogue input enabled as feedback in closed loop control.
%
l/s
m3/s
l/m
m3/m
Allows choosing different measure units for the analogue input 4 depending on the function of the
l/h
sensor to be used.
m3/h
m/s
Changing this parameter implies that the minimum and maximum values of the sensor range will
m/m
G4.5.2 Sensor unit = be affected by the corresponding conversion. Thus, it is necessary to verify the values adjusted
m/h NO
l/s in:
bar
[G4.5.5 Sensor low level =+0.0l/s] ➔ Sensor minimum level.
kPa
[G4.5.7 Sensor high level =+10.0l/s] ➔ Sensor maximum level.
psi
m
Available if [G4.5.1 = YES].
ºC
ºF
K
Hz
rpm
G4.5.3 AI4 Format = V Allows configuring the format of the analogue input 4 to connect a voltage or current signal,
NO
V mA depending on the sensor to be used to introduce the reference.
G4.5.4 AI4 low level = -10.0V to G4.5.6 Defines the minimum value of voltage or current for analogue input 4 according to the
YES
0.0 V +0.0mA to G4.5.6 characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected.
Adjusts the minimum unit value of the sensor connected to the analogue input 4, which
corresponds with the minimum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.5.4].
G4.5.5 Sensor low -3200.0 to G4.5.7
Available if [G4.5.1 = YES]. YES
level = 0.0 l/s Engineering units
Note: This value must be revised if the units are changed in [G4.5.2]. It must be adjusted for
operation in open and closed loop.
G4.5.6 AI4 high level G4.5.4 to +20.0V Defines the maximum value of voltage or current for analogue input 4 according to the
YES
= 10.0 V G4.5.4 to +20mA characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected.

46 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Adjusts the maximum unit value of the sensor connected to the analogue input 4, which
corresponds with the maximum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.5.6].
G4.5.7 Sensor high G4.5.5 to 3200.0
Available if [G4.5.1 = YES]. YES
level = 10.0 l/s Engineering units
Note: This value must be revised if the units are changed in [G4.5.2]. It must be adjusted for
operation in open and closed loop.
Allows adjusting the speed reference for the minimum range of analogue input 4, which
G4.5.8 AI4 Ref speed corresponds with the minimum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.5.4]. It is
-250.0 to G4.5.9 YES
min = 0.0 % configured to introduce the speed reference through the analogue input. Adjust parameter
‘G4.5.1 Enable sensor = N’. The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed.
Allows adjusting the speed reference for the maximum range of analogue input 4, which
G4.5.9 AI4 Ref speed corresponds with the maximum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.5.6]. It
G4.5.8 to 250.0% YES
max = 100.0 % is configured to introduce the speed reference through the analogue input. Adjust parameter
‘G4.5.1 Enable sensor = N’. The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed.
Adjust the minimum working range, if the real working range is different than the one covered by
G4.5.10 Sensor min -3200.0 to G4.5.12 the sensor that is going to be used as sensor in open loop. Corresponds with the level of voltage
YES
value = 0.0 l/s Engineering units or current set in G4.5.4. It must be configured to work with the sensor in open loop. Available if
[G4.5.1 = SI].
Allows adjusting the minimum speed range which corresponds to the minimum sensor range set
G4.5.11 Open loop
-250.0 to 250.0% in G4.5.10, when the sensor is going to be used in open loop. YES
min speed = 0.0 %
The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed. Available if [G4.5.1 = SI].
Adjust the maximum working range, if the real working range is different than the one covered by
G4.5.12 Sensor max
value = 10.0 l/s
G4.5.10 to 3200.0 the sensor that is going to be used as sensor in open loop. Corresponds with the level of voltage
Engineering units or current set in G4.5.6. It must be configured to work with the sensor in open loop. Available if
[G4.5.1 = SI].
YES EN
Allows adjusting the minimum speed range which corresponds to the minimum sensor range set
G4.5.13 Open loop
-250.0 to 250.0% in G4.5.12, when the sensor is going to be used in open loop. YES
max speed = 100.0 %
The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed. Available if [G4.5.1 = SI].
Adjusts stop mode of the drive in case the signal from analogue input 4 is lost.

OPTION FUNCTION
G4.5.14 AI4 loss No
No Function is disabled. YES
protection = No Yes
Whenever a sudden drop on the analogue input level is detected, terminating
Yes in zero, it indicates the sensor is damaged and the drive will stop, triggering a
fault F42.
G4.5.15 AI4 zero Off = 0.0; 0.1% to Analogue input 4 signal filtering. By adjusting this value, the analogue signal is filtered to eliminate
YES
band filter = Off 2.0% possible electrical noise that prevents reading a zero value when it should.
Allows adjusting a filtering to the analogue input 4 signal. By adjusting the value of this time
constant, it is possible to eliminate possible instabilities in the signal caused by noise, wiring faults,
G4.5.16 AI4 stabilizer Off = 0.0; 0.1 to
etc. YES
filter = Off 20.0s
Note: The application of a low pass filter to any analogue signal produces a delay of approximately
the value of the configured time constant.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 47

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Subgroup 4.6: Analogue input 5

Note: This group will only be shown if an expansion board has been connected.

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows user to configure analogue input 5 and activates the parameters which are necessary to
set it up. See [G4.6.2] to [G4.6.7].
G4.6.1 Enable sensor No OPTION FUNCTION NO
= No Yes The sensor connected to this input can be used to introduce the speed
No
reference and as open loop sensor.
Yes Analogue input enabled as feedback in closed loop control.
%
l/s
m3/s
l/m
m3/m
Allows choosing different measure units for the analogue input 5 depending on the function of the
l/h
sensor to be used.
m3/h
m/s
Changing this parameter implies that the minimum and maximum values of the sensor range will
m/m
G4.6.2 Sensor unit = be affected by the corresponding conversion. Thus, it is necessary to verify the values adjusted
m/h NO
l/s in:
bar
[G4.6.5 Sensor low level =+0.0l/s] ➔ Sensor minimum level.
kPa
[G4.6.7 Sensor high level =+10.0l/s] ➔ Sensor maximum level.
psi
m
Available if [G4.6.1 =YES].
ºC
ºF
K
Hz
rpm
G4.6.3 AI5 Format = V Allows configuring the format of the analogue input 5 to connect a voltage or current signal,
NO
V mA depending on the sensor to be used to introduce the reference.
G4.6.4 AI5 low level = -10.0V to G4.6.6 Defines the minimum value of voltage or current for analogue input 5 according to the
YES
0.0 V +0.0mA to G4.6.6 characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected.
Adjusts the minimum unit value of the sensor connected to the analogue input 5, which
corresponds with the minimum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.6.4].
G4.6.5 Sensor low -3200.0 to G4.6.7
Available if [G4.6.1 = YES]. YES
level = 0.0 l/s Engineering Units
Note: This value must be revised if the units are changed in [G4.6.2]. It must be adjusted for
operation in open and closed loop.
G4.6.6 AI5 high level G4.6.4 to +10V Defines the maximum value of voltage or current for analogue input 5 according to the
YES
= 10.0 V G4.6.4 to +20mA characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected.
Adjusts the maximum unit value of the sensor connected to the analogue input 5, which
corresponds with the maximum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.6.6].
G4.6.7 Sensor high G4.6.5 to 3200.0
Available if [G4.6.1 = YES]. YES
level = 10.0 l/s Engineering Units
Note: This value must be revised if the units are changed in [G4.6.2]. It must be adjusted for
operation in open and closed loop.
Allows adjusting the speed reference for the minimum range of analogue input 5, which
G4.6.8 AI5 Ref speed corresponds with the minimum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.6.4]. It is
-250.0 to G4.6.9 YES
min = 0.0 % configured to introduce the speed reference through the analogue input. Adjust parameter
‘G4.6.1 Enable sensor = N’. The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed.
Allows adjusting the speed reference for the maximum range of analogue input 5, which
G4.6.9 AI5 Ref speed corresponds with the maximum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.6.6]. It
G4.6.8 to 250.0% YES
max = 100.0 % is configured to introduce the speed reference through the analogue input. Adjust parameter
‘G4.6.1 Enable sensor = N’. The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed.
Adjust the minimum working range, if the real working range is different than the one covered by
G4.6.10 Sensor min -3200.0 to G4.6.12 the sensor that is going to be used as sensor in open loop. Corresponds with the level of voltage
YES
value = 0.0 l/s Engineering Units or current set in G4.6.4. It must be configured to work with the sensor in open loop. Available if
[G4.6.1 = SI].
Allows adjusting the minimum speed range which corresponds to the minimum sensor range set
G4.6.11 Open loop
-250.0 to 250.0% in G4.6.10, when the sensor is going to be used in open loop. YES
min speed = 0.0 %
The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed. Available if [G4.6.1 = SI].
Adjust the maximum working range, if the real working range is different than the one covered by
G4.6.12 Sensor max G4.6.10 to 3200.0 the sensor that is going to be used as sensor in open loop. Corresponds with the level of voltage
YES
value = 10.0 l/s Engineering Units or current set in G4.6.6. It must be configured to work with the sensor in open loop. Available if
[G4.6.1 = SI].
Allows adjusting the minimum speed range which corresponds to the minimum sensor range set
G4.6.13 Open loop
-250.0 to 250.0% in G4.6.12, when the sensor is going to be used in open loop. YES
max speed = 100.0 %
The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed. Available if [G4.6.1 = SI].

48 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Adjusts stop mode of the drive in case the signal from analogue input 5 is lost.

OPTION FUNCTION
G4.6.14 AI5 loss No
No Function is disabled. YES
protection = No Yes
Whenever a sudden drop on the analogue input level is detected, terminating
Yes in zero, it indicates the sensor is damaged and the drive will stop, triggering a
fault F42.
G4.6.15 AI5 zero Off = 0.0; 0.1% to Analogue input 5 signal filtering. By adjusting this value, the analogue signal is filtered to eliminate
YES
band filter = Off 2.0% possible electrical noise that prevents reading a zero value when it should.
Allows adjusting a filtering to the analogue input 5 signal. By adjusting the value of this time
constant, it is possible to eliminate possible instabilities in the signal caused by noise, wiring faults,
G4.6.16 AI5 stabilizer Off = 0.0; 0.1 to
etc. YES
filter = Off 20.0s
Note: The application of a low pass filter to any analogue signal produces a delay of approximately
the value of the configured time constant.

Subgroup 4.7: Analogue input 6

Note: This group will only be shown if an expansion board has been connected.

Screen Range Function

Set on EN
RUN
Allows user to configure analogue input 6 and activates the parameters which are necessary to
set it up. See [G4.7.2] to [G4.7.7].
G4.7.1 Enable sensor No OPTION FUNCTION
NO
= No Yes The sensor connected to this input can be used to introduce the speed
No
reference and as open loop sensor.
Yes Analogue input enabled as feedback in closed loop control.
%
l/s
m3/s
l/m
m3/m
Allows choosing different measure units for the analogue input 6 depending on the function of the
l/h
sensor to be used.
m3/h
m/s
Changing this parameter implies that the minimum and maximum values of the sensor range will
m/m
G4.7.2 Sensor unit = be affected by the corresponding conversion. Thus, it is necessary to verify the values adjusted
m/h NO
l/s in:
bar
[G4.7.5 Sensor low level =+0.0l/s] ➔ Sensor minimum level.
kPa
[G4.7.7 Sensor high level =+10.0l/s] ➔ Sensor maximum level.
psi
m
Available if [G4.7.1 = YES].
ºC
ºF
K
Hz
rpm
G4.7.3 AI6 Format = V Allows configuring the format of the analogue input 6 to connect a voltage or current signal,
NO
V mA depending on the sensor to be used to introduce the reference.
G4.7.4 AI6 low level = -10.0V to G4.7.6 Defines the minimum value of voltage or current for analogue input 6 according to the
YES
0.0 V +0.0mA to G4.7.6 characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected.
Adjusts the minimum unit value of the sensor connected to the analogue input 6, which
corresponds with the minimum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.7.4].
G4.7.5 Sensor low -3200.0 to G4.7.7
Available if [G4.7.1 = YES]. YES
level = 0.0 l/s Engineering Units
Note: This value must be revised if the units are changed in [G4.7.2]. It must be adjusted for
operation in open and closed loop.
G4.7.6 AI6 high level G4.7.4 to +10V Defines the maximum value of voltage or current for analogue input 6 according to the
YES
= 10.0 V G4.7.4 to +20mA characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected.
Adjusts the maximum unit value of the sensor connected to the analogue input 6, which
corresponds with the maximum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.7.6].
G4.7.7 Sensor high G4.7.5 to 3200.0
Available if [G4.7.1 = YES]. YES
level = 10.0 l/s Engineering Units
Note: This value must be revised if the units are changed in [G4.7.2]. It must be adjusted for
operation in open and closed loop.
Allows adjusting the speed reference for the minimum range of analogue input 6, which
G4.7.8 AI6 Ref speed corresponds with the minimum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.7.4]. It is
-250.0 to G4.7.9 YES
min = 0.0 % configured to introduce the speed reference through the analogue input. Adjust parameter
‘G4.7.1 Enable sensor = N’. The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 49

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows adjusting the speed reference for the maximum range of analogue input 6, which
G4.7.9 AI6 Ref speed corresponds with the maximum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.7.6]. It
G4.7.8 to 250.0% YES
max = 100.0 % is configured to introduce the speed reference through the analogue input. Adjust parameter
‘G4.7.1 Enable sensor = N’. The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed.
Adjust the minimum working range, if the real working range is different than the one covered by
G4.7.10 Sensor min -3200.0 to G4.7.12 the sensor that is going to be used as sensor in open loop. Corresponds with the level of voltage
YES
value = 0.0 l/s Engineering Units or current set in G4.7.4. It must be configured to work with the sensor in open loop. Available if
[G4.7.1 = SI].
Allows adjusting the minimum speed range which corresponds to the minimum sensor range set
G4.7.11 Open loop
-250.0 to 250.0% in G4.7.10, when the sensor is going to be used in open loop. YES
min speed = 0.0 %
The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed. Available if [G4.7.1 = SI].
Adjust the maximum working range, if the real working range is different than the one covered by
G4.7.12 Sensor max G4.7.10 to 3200.0 the sensor that is going to be used as sensor in open loop. Corresponds with the level of voltage
YES
value = 10.0 l/s Engineering Units or current set in G4.7.6. It must be configured to work with the sensor in open loop. Available if
[G4.7.1 = SI].
Allows adjusting the minimum speed range which corresponds to the minimum sensor range set
G4.7.13 Open loop
-250.0 to 250.0% in G4.7.12, when the sensor is going to be used in open loop. YES
max speed = 100.0 %
The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed. Available if [G4.7.1 = SI].
Adjusts stop mode of the drive in case the signal from analogue input 6 is lost.
OPTION FUNCTION
G4.7.14 AI6 loss No No Function is disabled. YES
protection = No Yes Whenever a sudden drop on the analogue input level is detected, terminating
Yes in zero, it indicates the sensor is damaged and the drive will stop, triggering a
fault F42.
G4.7.15 AI6 zero Off = 0.0; 0.1% to Analogue input 6 signal filtering. By adjusting this value, the analogue signal is filtered to eliminate
YES
band filter = Off 2.0% possible electrical noise that prevents reading a zero value when it should.
Allows adjusting a filtering to the analogue input 6 signal. By adjusting the value of this time
constant, it is possible to eliminate possible instabilities in the signal caused by noise, wiring faults,
G4.7.16 AI6 stabilizer Off = 0.0; 0.1 to
etc. YES
filter = Off 20.0s
Note: The application of a low pass filter to any analogue signal produces a delay of approximately
the value of the configured time constant.

Subgroup 4.8: Analogue input 7

Note: This group will only be shown if an expansion board has been connected.

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows user to configure analogue input 7 and activates the parameters which are necessary to
set it up. See [G4.8.2] to [G4.8.7].

G4.8.1 Enable sensor No OPTION FUNCTION

NO
= No Yes The sensor connected to this input can be used to introduce the speed
No
reference and as open loop sensor.
Yes Analogue input enabled as feedback in closed loop control.

%
l/s
m3/s
l/m
m3/m
Allows choosing different measure units for the analogue input 7 depending on the function of the
l/h
sensor to be used.
m3/h
m/s
Changing this parameter implies that the minimum and maximum values of the sensor range will
m/m
G4.8.2 Sensor unit = be affected by the corresponding conversion. Thus, it is necessary to verify the values adjusted
m/h NO
l/s in:
bar
[G4.8.5 Sensor low level =+0.0l/s] ➔ Sensor minimum level.
kPa
[G4.8.7 Sensor high level =+10.0l/s] ➔ Sensor maximum level.
psi
m
Available if [G4.8.1 = YES].
ºC
ºF
K
Hz
rpm
G4.8.3 AI7 Format = V Allows configuring the format of the analogue input 7 to connect a voltage or current signal,
NO
V mA depending on the sensor to be used to introduce the reference.

50 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G4.8.4 AI7 low level = -10.0V to G4.8.6 Defines the minimum value of voltage or current for analogue input 7 according to the
YES
0.0 V +0.0mA to G4.8.6 characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected.
Adjusts the minimum unit value of the sensor connected to the analogue input 7, which
corresponds with the minimum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.8.4].
G4.8.5 Sensor low -3200.0 to G4.8.7
Available if [G4.8.1 = YES]. YES
level = 0.0 l/s Engineering Units
Note: This value must be revised if the units are changed in [G4.8.2]. It must be adjusted for
operation in open and closed loop.
G4.8.6 AI7 high level G4.8.4 to +10V Defines the maximum value of voltage or current for analogue input 7 according to the
YES
= 10.0 V G4.8.4 to +20mA characteristics of the sensor that is going to be connected.
Adjusts the maximum unit value of the sensor connected to the analogue input 7, which
corresponds with the maximum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.8.6].
G4.8.7 Sensor high G4.8.5 to 3200.0
Available if [G4.8.1 = YES]. YES
level = 10.0 l/s Engineering Units
Note: This value must be revised if the units are changed in [G4.8.2]. It must be adjusted for
operation in open and closed loop.
Allows adjusting the speed reference for the minimum range of analogue input 7, which
G4.8.8 AI7 Ref speed corresponds with the minimum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.8.4]. It is
-250.0 to G4.8.9 YES
min = 0.0 % configured to introduce the speed reference through the analogue input. Adjust parameter
‘G4.8.1 Enable sensor = N’. The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed.
Allows adjusting the speed reference for the maximum range of analogue input 7, which
G4.8.9 AI7 Ref speed corresponds with the maximum level of voltage or current of the sensor configured in [G4.8.6]. It
G4.8.8 to 250.0% YES
max = 100.0 % is configured to introduce the speed reference through the analogue input. Adjust parameter
‘G4.8.1 Enable sensor = N’. The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed.
Adjust the minimum working range, if the real working range is different than the one covered by EN
G4.8.10 Sensor min -3200.0 to G4.8.12 the sensor that is going to be used as sensor in open loop. Corresponds with the level of voltage
YES
value = 0.0 l/s Engineering Units or current set in G4.8.4. It must be configured to work with the sensor in open loop. Available if
[G4.8.1 = SI].
Allows adjusting the minimum speed range which corresponds to the minimum sensor range set
G4.8.11 Open loop
-250.0 to 250.0% in G4.8.10, when the sensor is going to be used in open loop. YES
min speed = 0.0 %
The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed. Available if [G4.8.1 = SI].
Adjust the maximum working range, if the real working range is different than the one covered by
G4.8.12 Sensor max G4.8.10 to 3200.0 the sensor that is going to be used as sensor in open loop. Corresponds with the level of voltage
YES
value = 10.0 l/s Engineering Units or current set in G4.8.6. It must be configured to work with the sensor in open loop. Available if
[G4.8.1 = SI].
Allows adjusting the minimum speed range which corresponds to the minimum sensor range set
G4.8.13 Open loop
-250.0 to 250.0% in G4.8.12, when the sensor is going to be used in open loop. YES
max speed = 100.0 %
The value is a percentage of motor nominal speed. Available if [G4.8.1 = SI].
Adjusts stop mode of the drive in case the signal from analogue input 7 is lost.

OPTION FUNCTION
G4.8.14 AI7 loss NO
No Function is disabled. YES
protection = No YES
Whenever a sudden drop on the analogue input level is detected, terminating
Yes in zero, it indicates the sensor is damaged and the drive will stop, triggering a
fault F42.
G4.8.15 AI7 zero Off = 0.0; 0.1% to Analogue input 7 signal filtering. By adjusting this value, the analogue signal is filtered to eliminate
YES
band filter = Off 2.0% possible electrical noise that prevents reading a zero value when it should.
Allows adjusting a filtering to the analogue input 7 signal. By adjusting the value of this time
constant, it is possible to eliminate possible instabilities in the signal caused by noise, wiring faults,
G4.8.16 AI7 stabilizer Off = 0.0; 0.1 to
etc. YES
filter = Off 20.0s
Note: The application of a low pass filter to any analogue signal produces a delay of approximately
the value of the configured time constant.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 51

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Group 5: Acceleration / deceleration rates

Subgroup 5.1: Acceleration
Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows setting acceleration ramp 1, in acceleration units (increase in percentage of speed per
G5.1.1 Acceleration
0.01 to 650.00% / s second). For example, a 10%/s ramp means that the drive will increase its speed by 10% of motor YES
rate 1 = 1.50 %/s
rated speed per second. This ramp must be set according to the requirements of each process.
Allows the user to set the alternative acceleration ramp. Adjustment is made in acceleration units
G5.1.2 Acceleration (increase in percentage of speed per second), same as for the main ramp. The drive will apply
0.01 to 650.00% / s YES
rate 2 = 2.00 %/s acceleration ramp 1 until motor exceeds [G5.1.3] and, from here on, it will apply the alternative
ramp. If [G5.1.3 = OFF], no ramp change will occur.
This parameter offers the possibility of using the alternative acceleration ramp. Here, user can set
the speed value above which the drive will start applying the alternative acceleration ramp.
G5.1.3 Accel break Off = 0 Note: Alternative acceleration and deceleration can be selected through the digital inputs or by
YES
speed = Off 0 to 250% using the comparator output functions (for example, if the magnitude of the comparator is the drive
rated current, when the drive output current exceeds a defined level, calculated as % of In, a ramp
change occurs).
G5.1.4 Ramp after Acceleration ramp used to reach speed reference after the occurrence of a voltage drop or cut
0.05 to 650.00 %/s that has caused it to decrease. YES
V.Deep = 1.50 %/s

Subgroup 5.2: Deceleration

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows setting deceleration ramp 1, in deceleration units (decrease in percentage of speed per
G5.2.1 Deceleration
0.01 to 650.00% / s second). For example, a 10%/s ramp means that the drive will decrease its speed by 10% of motor YES
rate 1 = 1.50 %/s
rated speed per second. This ramp must be set according to the requirements of each process.
Allows the user to set the alternative deceleration ramp. Adjustment is made in deceleration units
G5.2.2 Deceleration (decrease in percentage of speed per second), same as for the main ramp. The drive will apply
0.01 to 650.00% / s YES
rate 2 = 2.00 %/s deceleration ramp 2 until motor exceeds [G5.2.3] and, from here on, it will apply the alternative
ramp. If [G5.2.3 = OFF], no ramp change will occur.
This parameter offers the possibility of using the alternative deceleration ramp. Here, user can set
the speed value above which the drive will start applying the alternative deceleration ramp.
G5.2.3 Decel break Off = 0
YES
speed = Off 0 to 250%
Note: Alternative acceleration and deceleration can be selected through the digital inputs or by
using the comparator output functions independently of the drive speed.

Subgroup 5.3: Motorized potentiometer

Note: This group will be shown if the speed reference has been set to Motorized Potentiometer in
Group 3: References.

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G5.3.1 Mot pot accel
0.01 to 650% / s Allows adjusting ramp 1 reference increase when using the motorized potentiometer function. YES
rate 1 = 1.00 %/s
G5.3.2 Mot pot decel
0.01 to 650% / s Allows adjusting ramp 1 reference decrease when using the motorized potentiometer function. YES
rate 1 = 3.00 %/s
Allows setting the ramp 2 reference increase for the motorized potentiometer function. The drive
G5.3.3 Mot pot accel
0.01 to 650% / s will apply the ramp 1 rate until the value set in [G5.3.4] is exceeded. From here on it will apply the YES
rate 2 = 1.00 %/s
alternative ramp value. If [G5.3.4 = OFF], no ramp change will occur.
Allows setting the ramp 2 reference decrease for the motorized potentiometer function. The drive
G5.3.4 Mot pot decel
0.01 to 650% / s will apply the ramp 1 rate until below the value set in [G5.3.4]. From here on it will apply the YES
rate 2 = 3.00 %/s
alternative ramp value. If [G5.3.4 = OFF] no ramp change will occur.
This parameter sets the break frequency for the alternative acceleration and deceleration
G5.3.5 Mot pot rate
0 to 250% reference ramp when using motorized potentiometer. This parameter is the speed below which YES
brk speed = 0 %
the drive will start applying the alternative ramp value.

52 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Others
Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Percentage of the acceleration ramp in which the S filter is applied. It softens acceleration and
G5.4 Speed filter = Off = 0 deceleration. Provides a filter of the S curve for speed reference changes, including Start / Stop
YES
Off 0.1 to 80.0% commands, by softening acceleration and deceleration.
Particularly useful in cranes and elevators.

Group 6: PID Control

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows user to select the reference source for the setpoint of the PID regulator.
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
0 None Source disabled.
1 Analog Input 1 PID setpoint introduced by Analogue Input 1.
2 Analog Input 2 PID setpoint introduced by Analogue Input 2.
3
Analog Input
1+2
Reference will be the sum of signals introduced by Analogue
Inputs 1 and 2.
EN
PID setpoint introduced by Digital Inputs configured as Multi-
4 Multireferences
references.
PID setpoint introduced by keypad. Value can be adjusted in
5 Local
screen [G3.3].
G6.1 Setpoint source PID setpoint introduced by keypad. Value is set in [G6.2]. Allows
0 to 13 6 Local PID NO
= Multireferences user having two speed references because [G3.3] is not modified.
7 Analog Input 3 PID setpoint introduced by Analogue Input 3.
Communication
8 PID setpoint introduced by communications.
s
9 Analog Input 4 PID setpoint introduced trough Analogue Input 4.
10 Analog Input 5 PID setpoint introduced trough Analogue Input 5.
11 Analog Input 6 PID setpoint introduced trough Analogue Input 6.
12 Analog Input 7 PID setpoint introduced trough Analogue Input 7.
13 Ethernet IP PID setpoint introduced trough Ethernet IP communications

Notes:
• Options 9 to 12 will only be visible if an I/O expansion board has been connected.
• Option 13 will only be available if an Ethernet IP board has been connected.

G6.2 Local process When the PDI source is set as “Local PID”], the setpoint used by the PID will be [G6.2]. The value
+0.0% to +300% YES
setpoint = 100.0 % of parameter [G3.3] is not used and will be available for use as speed reference.
Selects the reference source for the feedback signal to close the control loop.
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
0 None The PID function is not active.
1 Analog Input 1 Feedback signal through the Analogue Input 1.
2 Analog Input 2 Feedback signal through the Analogue Input 2.
Analog Input Feedback will be the addition of the signals introduced through
3
1+2 the Analogue Inputs 1 and 2.
4 Analog Input 3 Feedback signal through the Analogue Input 3.
Communication
5 Feedback signal through communications.
G6.3 Feedback s
source = Analog 0 to 15 6 Motor torque Motor torque. NO
Input 2 7 Absolute torque Absolute motor torque.
8 Motor current Motor output current.
9 Motor power Motor output power.
10 Bus voltage Bus voltage.
11 Motor cos phi Phi Cosine.
12 Analog Input 4 Feedback signal through the Analogue Input 4.
13 Analog Input 5 Feedback signal through the Analogue Input 5.
14 Analog Input 6 Feedback signal through the Analogue Input 6.
15 Analog Input 7 Feedback signal through the Analogue Input 7.
Note: Options 12 to 15 will only be visible if an I/O expansion board has been connected.
Allows setting the proportional gain value of the PID regulator. If you need a higher control
G6.4 Process Kc =
0.1 to 20 response, increase this value. YES
8.0
Note: If this value is increased too much, a higher instability in the system can be introduced.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 53

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows setting the integration time of the PID regulator. If you need a higher accuracy you should
G6.5 Process Ti = 0.1 0.1 to 1000s,
increase this value. YES
s Infinite
Note: If this value is increased too much, the system can become slower.
Allows setting the derivate time of the PID regulator. If you need a higher response, you can
G6.6 Process Td =
0.0 to 250.0 s increase this value. YES
0.0 s
Note: If this value is increased too much, accuracy can decrease.
Allows inverting the drive PID output.

OPTION FUNCTION
PID regulator responds in normal mode, that means, when the feedback value is
N
G6.7 Invert PID = No No above the reference signal value, speed will be decreased. If the feedback value NO
S
is below the reference signal value, speed will be increased.
PID regulator responds in inverse mode. Thus, when the feedback value is above
Yes the reference signal value, speed will be increased. If the feedback value is below
the reference signal value, speed will be decreased.
G6.8 Feedback low Off
Configures the feedback low pass filter, in seconds. If it is set to 0, it will be deactivated. YES
pass filter = Off 0.1 to 20.0 s
G6.9 Process error =
-300% to 300% Shows the difference between the reference [G6.1] and the feedback signal of [G6.3]. YES
0.0 %

Note: PID functions will be set here if this function is enabled in parameters 'G3.1 Speed ref 1 source=Local' or 'G3.2
Speed ref 2 source =Local.

Group 7: Start / Stop Control

Subgroup 7.1: Start
Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Selects the start mode of the drive. This value should be configured appropriately for each
application.
G7.1.1 Main start
OPT. FUNCTION YES
mode = Ramp
Ramp Drive will start applying a frequency ramp to the motor.
In this mode, the motor shaft speed is automatically searched for and the
Ramp
frequency output of the drive is set to match the actual motor speed. This
Spin
Spin allows starting loads that are still rotating when the drive receives a start
Spin2
command.
G7.1.2 Alternative Note: This option is valid when the motor is running in positive direction.
Operates like option ‘SPIN’. The difference lies in the possibility of starting YES
start mode = Ramp Spin2
loads that are still rotating independently of the motor rotation direction.
Note: Start mode 2 (alternative) is selected through a digital input configured with the option
[22 ➔ RUN MODE 2].
Allows setting a delay time from the moment the drive receives the start command to the beginning
G7.1.3 Start delay = Off = 0 of providing an output frequency to the motor.
YES
Off 1 to 6500s Note: After receiving the start command, the drive will wait until the delay time is elapsed. During
this time, the drive status will change to ‘DLY’.
Allows setting a delay time between the moment the drive has stopped and the next start. The
G7.1.4 Fine restart Off = 0.000;
next time the drive has to start it will consider no additional delay time unless parameter [G7.1.3] YES
delay = Off 0.001 to 10.000 s
has been set to a value different than OFF.
G7.1.5 Alt restart Off = 0, Delay time for start command after a stop. If the start command is given after the time set in this
YES
delay = Off 0.1 to 6500.0 s parameter has elapsed, the drive will start immediately.
Allows setting the drive to start automatically when a main power supply loss occurs, and it is
recovered again (power supply loss or instant power supply loss).

OPT. FUNCTION
The drive will not start after power supply recovery occurs even if the start
G7.1.6 Run on supply No No
command is active. User should deactivate this signal and activate it again. YES
loss = Yes Yes
The drive will start automatically when power supply is recovered after power
Yes
supply loss occurs, as long as the start signal is still active.

Note: If start / stop control is done by keypad, the drive will not start automatically after power
supply loss occurs and it is recovered again.

54 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Select the start mode after a voltage drop. This value must be set appropriately for each
application.

G7.1.7 Start after Ramp OPT. FUNCTION

YES
V.Deep = Spin Spin Ramp Drive will stop applying a frequency ramp.
Current motor speed will be searched for automatically and, from that
Spin
point, motor will be accelerated until reaching the reference speed.

Allows starting the drive after resetting the fault produced in the equipment, as long as the start
command is activated.

OPT. FUNCTION
After resetting the fault, the drive will not start even if the start command is
G7.1.8 Run after reset No activated. To start, user should deactivate the start command and activate it
YES
= Yes Si No again. This operation mode guarantees that, even if the fault is reset, start will
be controlled by an operator. This option is commonly used in remote controls
to increase the safety at the starting.
The drive will start after resetting the fault, as long as the start command is
Yes
activated.

Operates with G7.1.8. Estimates the minimum time during which the start order must be disabled
G7.1.9 Delay after
reset = 0.001 s
0.001 to 9.999 s before starting after the reset. This is a very useful parameter for communications, since the start
command is received in the time that takes the frame to arrive.
YES EN
G7.1.10
Off = 0,
Magnetization time = Sets the period during which the motor is being magnetized before starting. YES
0.001 to 9.999
Off

Subgroup 7.2: Stop

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Selects the main stop mode of the drive. This value should be configured appropriately for each
application.
G7.2.1 Main stop Ramp
OPT. FUNCTION YES
mode = Ramp Spin
Ramp The drive will stop applying a frequency ramp to stop the motor
Spin The drive will cut motor power supply and the motor will stop by inertia.
Selects drive alternative stop mode. This value should be configured appropriately for each
G7.2.2 Alternative Ramp application. Options are the same as for the main stop mode.
YES
stop mode = Spin Spin Note: Stop mode 1 or 2 can be selected by digital inputs, by comparator output functions, or by
setting a switch speed for stop mode in [G7.2.3].
When this parameter is set to a value other than zero, if the drive is set to stop mode 1, when the
stop command is received it will stop according to the mode set in [G7.2.1] from steady status to
G7.2.3 Stop mode Off = 0 the speed value set in this parameter. From that moment, the drive will apply stop mode 2 to
YES
switch speed = Off 1 to 250% complete the stop.
Note: Stop mode 1 or 2 can be selected by digital inputs, by comparator output functions, or by
setting a switch speed for stop mode in [G7.2.3].
G7.2.4 Stop delay = Off = 0 Allows setting a delay time applied from the moment the drive receives the stop command until
YES
Off 1 to 6500s the drive stops providing an output frequency to the motor.
Allows user to stop the motor when the speed is below lower speed limit.

OPT. FUNCTION
In this case, the motor will continue to operate at minimum speed defined as
minimum speed limit (set in G10.1 or G10.1.3), even if the speed reference is below
No
these settings. For example, if [1 Ve MIN1=+30.00%], and the speed reference is
+20.00%, %, the equipment will operate at +30.00% and never below this value.
In this case, the drive will respond to the start command as long as the speed
G7.2.5 Stop at min No
reference is above the value set as minimum speed limit. While the speed YES
speed = No Si
reference is below this value, equipment will be in 'READY' status. Once the
Yes reference overcomes the minimum speed level, the drive will start until reaching
the introduced reference.
If the drive is decelerating and the reference is below the minimum speed value,
then the equipment will stop by spin.

Note: If you want to stop the motor when the reference is below a fixed speed setpoint, you should
set this parameter to YES. Additionally, you should set the correct values in [G10.1] or [G10.1.3].

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 55

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G7.2.6 Power off Off = 0, Sets the period during which the drive maintains the magnetic flux in the motor after reaching zero
YES
delay = Off 0.001 to 9.999 speed when stopping.

Subgroup 7.3: Spin start

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows setting the accuracy of the speed search function when the drive starts in SPIN mode.
G7.3.1 Tune = 10 % 0 to 100% YES
Usually, the optimum value is between 2 and 5%. As the value is lower, more accuracy is required.
G7.3.2 Minimum Allows adjusting the minimum speed that the drive should maintain during the speed search in
0.0 to 25.0 % YES
speed = 0.0 % spin start.
G7.3.3 Magnetization Allows defining how long to wait, in seconds, to stablish the flow of the motor once the speed
1.0 to 25.0 s YES
tim = 1.0 s search for spin start has finished.

Group 8: Outputs
Subgroup 8.1: Digital outputs
Note: Parameters G8.1.13 to G8.1.52 will only be available if the corresponding expansion boards have
been connected.

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
User can configure three faults per group (this is, nine faults in total). If a fault occurs and matches
G8.1.0.1 Group 1 any of the faults configured in these groups, the output relay will be enabled. YES

To enable the relay, the corresponding output source (G8.1.x) must have been enabled as “User
G8.1.0.2 Group 2 0 to 255 YES
fault group 1” (52), “User fault group 2” (53) or “User fault group 3” (54).

G8.1.0.3 Group 3 Each fault can be coded from 1 y 99. Refer to section “FAULT MESSAGES. DESCRIPTIONS YES
AND ACTIONS” to consult fault codes and their description.
Configures the operation of each output relay according to the options from the following table:

OPT FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

00 Always OFF Output is not active.
01 Always ON When the drive is powered, the output relay is activated.
Relay will remain active if there are no faults in the drive. If a fault
02 No faults
occurs, the relay will be deactivated.
03 General fault Drive fault or low input voltage will activate the relay.
04 Start Relay is active once the drive has received the start command.
05 Run Drive is running, and relay will be activated.
06 Ready Drive is ready to start (there are no faults or warnings).
07 Zero speed Drive is running at zero speed.
G8.1.1 Relay 1 source 08 Set speed Speed has reached the value set as reference.
select = Run 00 to 58
09 Speed direction The relay is activated when the speed direction is negative.
Speed ref The relay is activated when the speed reference direction is
11 NO
direction negative.
13 Speed limit Speed limit has been reached.
14 Current limit Motor current limit has been reached.
15 Voltage limit DC Bus voltage limit has been reached.
16 Torque limit Torque limit has been reached.
17 Comparator 1 When the comparator 1 output is active, relay will be activated.
18 Comparator 2 When the comparator 2 is output active, relay will be activated.
19 Comparator 3 When the comparator 3 output is active, relay will be activated.
20 Acc / Dec 2 Relay is activated if the alternative ramps are used.
21 Reference 2 Relay is activated if reference 2 has been selected.
22 Stop 2 Relay is activated if stop mode 2 is used.

Note: Continues in the next page.

56 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Note: Comes from the previous page.

OPT FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

Relay is activated if the alternative speed limits have been
23 Speed limit 2
selected.
24 DC brake Relay is activated if DC brake is active.
Digital output is controlled by a PowerPLC program. This option
28 PowerPLC
will be shown if [G1.5] is different than Standard.
29 Communications Relay is controlled from communications.
G8.1.1 Relay 1 source The relay will be activated as in option “05 RUN”, considering the
select = Run 00 to 58
ON delay time set in [G8.1.2], [G8.1.6] or [G8.1.10] (depending
32 Crane brake
on the which relay is used: 1, 2 or 3), and will be deactivated when
motor speed is below the speed set in G8.1.53.
34 Warnings The relay is energized when there is any Warning.
35 Copy DI 1
36 Copy DI 2
37 Copy DI 3
38 Copy DI 4
39 Copy DI 5
40 Copy DI 6 Copies the corresponding digital input and closes the relay when
44 Copy DI 7 the digital input is active.
45
46
Copy DI 8
Copy DI 9
Options 44 – 51, 55 and 56 will only be available if an I/O
expansion board has been connected.
EN
47 Copy DI 10
48 Copy DI 11
49 Copy DI 12
50 Copy DI 13
51 Copy DI 14
52 User faults G1
53 User faults G2 Allow selecting a group to configure user faults.
54 User faults G3
The relay will be enabled once the waiting time set by the user
56 Start/Stop delay before starting or stopping has elapsed (G7.1.3, G7.1.4, G7.1.5,
G7.1.10, G7.1.9, G7.2.4, G7.2.6).
57 Copy DI15 Copies the corresponding digital input and closes the relay when
58 Copy DI16 the digital input is active.

G8.1.2 Relay 1 ON Allows setting a delay time before activating relay 1.

0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this ON delay time the activation condition disappears, the relay will not be activated.

G8.1.3 Relay 1 OFF Allows setting a delay time before deactivating relay 1.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this OFF delay time the deactivation condition disappears, the relay will remain activated.

Allows inverting the logic of relay 1 functionality.

Relay 1 has one normally open contact (connection 1/2 of J5 connector) and one normally closed
contact (connection 2/3, J5).
G8.1.4 Relay 1 No
NO
inversion = No Si OPT. FUNCTION
No Relay logic remains unchanged.
Yes Inverts relay logic.
G8.1.5 Relay 2 source
00 to 58 Note: See [G8.1.1]. NO
select = Always OFF
G8.1.6 Relay 2 ON Allows setting a delay time before activating relay 2.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this ON delay time the activation condition disappears, the relay will not be activated.
G8.1.7 Relay 2 OFF Allows setting a delay time before deactivating relay 2.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this OFF delay time the deactivation condition disappears, the relay will remain activated.
Allows inverting the logic of relay 2 functionality.

Relay 2 has one normally open contact (connection 1/2 of J6 connector) and one normally closed
contact (connection 2/3, J6).
G8.1.8 Relay 2 No
NO
inversion = No Si
OPT. FUNCTION
No Relay logic remains unchanged.
Yes Inverts relay logic.
G8.1.9 Relay 3 source
00 to 58 Note: See [G8.1.1]. NO
select = Always OFF

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 57

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G8.1.10 Relay 3 ON Allows setting a delay time before activating relay 3.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this ON delay time the activation condition disappears, the relay will not be activated.
G8.1.11 Relay 3 OFF Allows setting a delay time before deactivating relay 3.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this OFF delay time the deactivation condition disappears, the relay will remain activated.
Allows inverting the logic of relay 3 functionality.
Relay 3 has one normally open contact (connection 1/2 of J7 connector) and one normally closed
contact (connection 2/3, J7).
G8.1.12 Relay 3 No
NO
inversion = No Si OPT. FUNCTION
No Relay logic remains unchanged.
Yes Inverts relay logic.
G8.1.13 Relay 4 src
00 to 58 Note: See [G8.1.1]. NO
select = Always OFF
G8.1.14 Relay 4 ON Allows setting a delay time before activating relay 4.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this ON delay time the activation condition disappears, the relay will not be activated.
G8.1.15 Relay 4 OFF Allows setting a delay time before deactivating relay 4.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this OFF delay time the deactivation condition disappears, the relay will remain activated.
Allows inverting the logic of relay 4 functionality.
Relay 4 is connected to J11 connector and its contact is, by default, normally open.

G8.1.16 Relay 4 No OPT. FUNCTION NO

inversion = No Si
No Relay logic remains unchanged.
Yes Inverts relay logic.

G8.1.17 Relay 5 src

00 to 58 Note: See [G8.1.1]. NO
select = Always OFF
G8.1.18 Relay 5 ON Allows setting a delay time before activating relay 5.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this ON delay time the activation condition disappears, the relay will not be activated.
G8.1.19 Relay 5 OFF Allows setting a delay time before deactivating relay 5.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this OFF delay time the deactivation condition disappears, the relay will remain activated.
Allows inverting the logic of relay 5 functionality.
Relay 5 is connected to J12 connector and its contact is, by default, normally open.

G8.1.20 Relay 5 No OPT. FUNCTION NO

inversion = No Si
No Relay logic remains unchanged.
Yes Inverts relay logic.

G8.1.21 Relay 6
source select = 00 to 58 Note: See [G8.1.1]. NO
Always OFF
G8.1.22 Relay 6 ON Allows setting a delay time before activating relay 6.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this ON delay time the activation condition disappears, the relay will not be activated.
G8.1.23 Relay 6 OFF Allows setting a delay time before deactivating relay 6.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this OFF delay time the deactivation condition disappears, the relay will remain activated.
Allows inverting the logic of relay 6 functionality.
Relay 6 is connected to J13 connector and its contact is, by default, normally open.
G8.1.24 Relay 6 No
OPT. FUNCTION NO
inversion = No Si
No Relay logic remains unchanged.
Yes Inverts relay logic.
G8.1.25 Relay 7
source select = 00 to 58 Note: See [G8.1.1]. NO
Always OFF
G8.1.26 Relay 7 ON Allows setting a delay time before activating relay 7.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this ON delay time the activation condition disappears, the relay will not be activated.
G8.1.27 Relay 7 OFF Allows setting a delay time before deactivating relay 7.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this OFF delay time the deactivation condition disappears, the relay will remain activated.
Allows inverting the logic of relay 7 functionality.
Relay 7 is connected to J13 connector and its contact is, by default, normally open.
G8.1.28 Relay 7 No
OPT. FUNCTION NO
inversion = No Si
No Relay logic remains unchanged.
Yes Inverts relay logic.
G8.1.29 Relay 8 src
00 to 58 Note: See [G8.1.1]. NO
select = Always OFF

58 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G8.1.30 Relay 8 ON Allows setting a delay time before activating relay 8.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this ON delay time the activation condition disappears, the relay will not be activated.
G8.1.31 Relay 8 OFF Allows setting a delay time before deactivating relay 8.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this OFF delay time the deactivation condition disappears, the relay will remain activated.
Allows inverting the logic of relay 8 functionality.
Relay 8 is connected to J12 connector and its contact is, by default, normally open.
G8.1.32 Relay 8 No
OPT. FUNCTION NO
inversion = No Si
No Relay logic remains unchanged.
Yes Inverts relay logic.
G8.1.33 Relay 9 src
00 to 58 Note: See [G8.1.1]. NO
select = Always OFF
G8.1.34 Relay 9 ON Allows setting a delay time before activating relay 9.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this ON delay time the activation condition disappears, the relay will not be activated.
G8.1.35 Relay 9 OFF Allows setting a delay time before deactivating relay 9.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this OFF delay time the deactivation condition disappears, the relay will remain activated.
Allows inverting the logic of relay 9 functionality.

Relay 9 is connected to J10 connector of the second expansion board and its contact is, by default,
G8.1.36 Relay 9
inversion = No
No
Si
normally open.
YES
EN
OPT. FUNCTION
No Relay logic remains unchanged.
Yes Inverts relay logic.
G8.1.37 Relay 10 src
00 to 58 Note: See [G8.1.1]. NO
select = Always OFF
G8.1.38 Relay 10 ON Allows setting a delay time before activating relay 10.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this ON delay time the activation condition disappears, the relay will not be activated.
G8.1.39 Relay 10 OFF Allows setting a delay time before deactivating relay 10.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this OFF delay time the deactivation condition disappears, the relay will remain activated.
Allows inverting the logic of relay 10 functionality.

Relay 10 is connected to J11 connector of the second expansion board and its contact is, by
default, normally open.
G8.1.40 Relay 10 No
NO
inversion = No Si OPT. FUNCTION
No Relay logic remains unchanged.
Yes Inverts relay logic.

G8.1.41 Relay 11 src

00 to 58 Note: See [G8.1.1]. NO
select = Always OFF
G8.1.42 Relay 11 ON Allows setting a delay time before activating relay 11.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this ON delay time the activation condition disappears, the relay will not be activated.
G8.1.43 Relay 11 OFF Allows setting a delay time before deactivating relay 11.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this OFF delay time the deactivation condition disappears, the relay will remain activated.
Allows inverting the logic of relay 11 functionality.

Relay 11 is connected to J12 connector of the second expansion board and its contact is, by
default, normally open.
G8.1.44 Relay 11 No
NO
inversion = No Si OPT. FUNCTION
No Relay logic remains unchanged.
Yes Inverts relay logic.

G8.1.45 Relay 12 src

00 to 58 Note: See [G8.1.1]. NO
select = Always OFF
G8.1.46 Relay 12 ON Allows setting a delay time before activating relay 12.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this ON delay time the activation condition disappears, the relay will not be activated.
G8.1.47 Relay 12 OFF Allows setting a delay time before deactivating relay 12.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this OFF delay time the deactivation condition disappears, the relay will remain activated.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 59

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows inverting the logic of relay 12 functionality.

Relay 12 is connected to J13 connector of the second expansion board and its contact is, by
default, normally open.
G8.1.48 Relay 12 No
NO
inversion = No Si OPT. FUNCTION
No Relay logic remains unchanged.
Yes Inverts relay logic.

G8.1.49 Relay 13 src

00 to 59 Note: See [G8.1.1]. NO
select = Always OFF
G8.1.50 Relay 13 ON Allows setting a delay time before activating relay 13.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this ON delay time the activation condition disappears, the relay will not be activated.
G8.1.51 Relay 13 OFF Allows setting a delay time before deactivating relay 13.
0.0 to 999.0 s YES
delay = 0.0 s If during this OFF delay time the deactivation condition disappears, the relay will remain activated.
Allows inverting the logic of relay 13 functionality.
Relay 13 is connected to J14 connector of the second expansion board and its contact is, by
default, normally open.
G8.1.52 Relay 13 No
NO
inversion = No Si OPT. FUNCTION
No Relay logic remains unchanged.
Yes Inverts relay logic.
G8.1.53 Speed for This parameter allows setting the speed below which any relay configured to option [32 Crane
0.00 to 100.00% YES
crane brake = 0.00 % Brake] will be deactivated.

60 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Subgroup 8.2: Analogue output 1

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN

Analogue output 1 is programmable according to the following table:

OPT. DESCR. FUNCTION UNITS

00 None Not used. -
01 Motor speed Signal proportional to the motor speed. % Motor speed
% Motor rated
02 Motor current Signal proportional to the motor current.
current
% Motor rated
03 Motor voltage Signal proportional to the motor voltage.
voltage
04 Motor power Signal proportional to the motor power. % Motor power
05 Motor torque Signal proportional to the motor torque. % Motor torque
Signal proportional to the motor power % Motor rated
06 Motor cos phi
factor. Cosine Phi
Signal proportional to the motor % Motor
07 Motor temperature
temperature. temperature
% Input
08 Motor frequency Signal proportional to the input frequency. frequency

09 Input voltage Signal proportional to the input voltage.

(50Hz=100%)
% Equipment
rated voltage
EN
% Motor voltage
10 Bus voltage Signal proportional to the DC Bus voltage.
x 1.414
Signal proportional to the drive % Drive
11 Drive temperature
temperature. temperature
12 Speed reference Signal proportional to the speed reference. % Motor speed
Signal proportional to the reference in PID
14 PID reference %
mode.
Signal proportional to the feedback in PID
15 PID feedback %
mode.
Signal proportional to the error (difference
G8.2.1 AO1 source 16 PID error between reference and feedback) in PID %
selection = Motor 00 to 32 mode. NO
speed Analogue input 1 signal is transferred to
17 Analog Input 1 %
analogue output.
Analogue input 2 signal is transferred to
18 Analog Input 2 %
analogue output.
Analogue input 3 signal is transferred to
19 Analog Input 3 %
analogue output.
100% bottom
21 Max scale It forces the output to maximum value.
scale
Signal proportional to the motor speed
22 Absolute speed % Motor speed
without sign (absolute value).
Signal proportional to the motor torque
23 Absolute torque % Motor torque
without sign (absolute value).
The average of the analogue inputs 1 and
24 Analog Input 1+2 %
2.
Signal proportional to the output in PID
25 PID output %
mode.
Signal proportional to the real speed of the % rpm (motor
26 Encoder speed
encoder nameplate)
The analogue output is controlled by a PowerPLC macro. This
28 PowerPLC option will be shown whenever the program selected in
[G1.5] is different than Standard.
Analogue input 4 signal is transferred to
29 Analog Input 4 %
analogue output.
Analogue input 5 signal is transferred to
30 Analog Input 5 %
analogue output.
Analogue input 6 signal is transferred to
31 Analog Input 6 %
analogue output.
Analogue input 7 signal is transferred to
32 Analog Input 7 %
analogue output.

Note: Options 29-32 will only be available if the corresponding inputs/outputs are enabled.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 61

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
0-10V
±10mA
G8.2.2 AO1 format = Analogue output 1 is programmable in one of the five available formats according to the system
0-20mA NO
4..20 mA requirements.
4-20mA
±20mA
Minimum level of analogue output 1.
G8.2.3 AO1 low level Minimum level setting can be higher than the maximum level setting. This allows the user to
-250% to +250% YES
=0% achieve inverse scaling; as the reference magnitude set in [G8.2.1] increases, the output
frequency will decrease and vice versa.
Maximum level of analogue output 1.
G8.2.4 AO1 high level Maximum level setting can be lower than the minimum level setting. This allows the user to achieve
-250% to +250% YES
= 100 % inverse scaling; as the reference magnitude set in [G8.2.1] increases, the output frequency will
decrease and vice versa.
Filter for analogue input 1 value.
G8.2.5 AO1 filter = If the analogue signal appears slightly unstable, improved stability and response can be achieved
Off= 0.0 to 20.0s YES
Off with the addition of a suitable filter value.
Note: Filter use can add a slight delay to the analogue output signal.

Subgroup 8.3: Analogue output 2 / Pulse

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G8.3.0 Enable Pulse No Configures the AO2 to work with a pulse sensor through J18 connector, position 2-1. J18 is located
NO
Mode = No Yes in the control board.
G8.3.1 AO2 source
Analogue output 2 is programmable in the same way as analogue output 1. See configuration
selection = Motor 00 to 32 NO
options in G8.2.1.
current
0-10V
±10V
G8.3.2 AO2 format = Analogue output 2 is programmable in one of the five available formats according to the system
0-20mA NO
4..20 mA requirements. Available if [G8.3.0 = NO].
4-20mA
10mA
Minimum level of analogue output 2.
G8.3.3 AO2 low level Minimum level setting can be higher than the maximum level setting. This allows the user to
-250 to 250% YES
=0% achieve inverse scaling; as the reference magnitude set in [G8.3.1] increases, the output
frequency will decrease and vice versa. Available if [G8.3.0 = NO].
Maximum level of analogue output 2.
G8.3.4 AO2 high level Maximum level setting can be lower than the minimum level setting. This allows the user to achieve
-250 to 250% YES
= 100 % inverse scaling; as the reference magnitude set in [G8.3.1] increases, the output frequency will
decrease and vice versa. Available if [G8.3.0 = NO].
Filter for analogue input 2 value.
G8.3.5 AO2 filter = Off=0 If the analogue signal appears slightly unstable, improved stability and response can be achieved
0,1 to 20,0 s YES
Off with the addition of a suitable filter value.
Note: Filter use can add a slight delay to the analogue output signal.
G8.3.6 Max pulse Adjusts the maximum number of pulses per second that can be generated by the output.
0 to 32000 YES
number = 100 Available if [G8.3.0 = YES].

G8.3.7 Pulse duty =

20% to 65% Time percentage when pulses are in active level. Work cycle. Available if [G8.3.0 = YES]. YES
50 %

62 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Subgroup 8.4: Analogue output 3

Note: This group will be shown if an I/O expansion board has been connected.

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G8.4.1 AO3 source
Analogue output 3 is programmable in the same way as analogue output 1. See configuration
selection = Motor 00 to 32 NO
options in G8.2.1.
speed
0-10V
±10V
G8.4.2 AO3 format = Analogue output 3 is programmable in one of the five available formats according to the system
0-20mA NO
4..20 mA requirements.
4-20mA
10mA
Minimum level of analogue output 3.
G8.4.3 AO3 low level Minimum level setting can be higher than the maximum level setting. This allows the user to
-250 to 250% YES
=0% achieve inverse scaling; as the reference magnitude set in [G8.4.1] increases, the output
frequency will decrease and vice versa.
Maximum level of analogue output 3.
G8.4.4 AO3 high level Maximum level setting can be lower than the minimum level setting. This allows the user to achieve
-250 to 250% YES
= 100 % inverse scaling; as the reference magnitude set in [G8.4.1] increases, the output frequency will
decrease and vice versa.

G8.4.5 AO3 filter =

Off
Off=0
0 to 20.0 s
Filter for analogue input 3 value.
If the analogue signal appears slightly unstable, improved stability and response can be achieved
with the addition of a suitable filter value.
YES
EN
Note: Filter use can add a slight delay to the analogue output signal.

Subgroup 8.5: Analogue output 4

Note: This group will be shown if an I/O expansion board has been connected.

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G8.5.1 AO4 source
Analogue output 4 is programmable in the same way as analogue output 1. See configuration
selection = Motor 00 to 32 NO
options in G8.2.1.
speed
0-10V
±10V
G8.5.2 AO4 format = Analogue output 4 is programmable in one of the five available formats according to the system
0-20mA NO
4..20 mA requirements.
4-20mA
10mA
Minimum level of analogue output 4.
G8.5.3 AO4 low level Minimum level setting can be higher than the maximum level setting. This allows the user to
-250 to 250% YES
=0% achieve inverse scaling; as the reference magnitude set in [G8.5.1] increases, the output
frequency will decrease and vice versa.
Maximum level of analogue output 4.
G8.5.4 AO4 high level Maximum level setting can be lower than the minimum level setting. This allows the user to achieve
-250 to 250% YES
= 100 % inverse scaling; as the reference magnitude set in [G8.5.1] increases, the output frequency will
decrease and vice versa.
Filter for analogue input 4 value.
G8.5.5 AO4 filter = Off=0 If the analogue signal appears slightly unstable, improved stability and response can be achieved
0,1 to 20,0 s YES
Off with the addition of a suitable filter value.
Note: Filter use can add a slight delay to the analogue output signal.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 63

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Subgroup 8.6: Analogue output 5

Note: This group will be shown if an I/O expansion board has been connected.

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G8.6.1 AO5 source
Analogue output 5 is programmable in the same way as analogue output 1. See configuration
selection = Motor 00 to 32 NO
options in G8.2.1.
speed
0-10V
±10V
G8.6.2 AO5 format = Analogue output 5 is programmable in one of the five available formats according to the system
0-20mA NO
4..20 mA requirements.
4-20mA
10mA
Minimum level of analogue output 5.
G8.6.3 AO5 low level Minimum level setting can be higher than the maximum level setting. This allows the user to
-250 to 250% YES
=0% achieve inverse scaling; as the reference magnitude set in [G8.6.1] increases, the output
frequency will decrease and vice versa.
Maximum level of analogue output 5.
G8.6.4 AO5 high level Maximum level setting can be lower than the minimum level setting. This allows the user to achieve
-250 to 250% YES
= 100 % inverse scaling; as the reference magnitude set in [G8.6.1] increases, the output frequency will
decrease and vice versa.
Filter for analogue input 5 value.
G8.6.5 AO5 filter = Off=0 If the analogue signal appears slightly unstable, improved stability and response can be achieved
YES
Off 0 to 20,0 s with the addition of a suitable filter value.
Note: Filter use can add a slight delay to the analogue output signal.

Subgroup 8.7: Analogue output 6

Note: This group will be shown if an I/O expansion board has been connected.

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G8.7.1 AO6 source
Analogue output 6 is programmable in the same way as analogue output 1. See configuration
selection = Motor 00 to 32 NO
options in G8.2.1.
speed
0-10V
±10V
G8.7.2 AO6 format = Analogue output 6 is programmable in one of the five available formats according to the system
0-20mA NO
4..20 mA requirements.
4-20mA
10mA
Minimum level of analogue output 6.
G8.7.3 AO6 low level Minimum level setting can be higher than the maximum level setting. This allows the user to
-250 to 250% YES
=0% achieve inverse scaling; as the reference magnitude set in [G8.7.1] increases, the output
frequency will decrease and vice versa.
Maximum level of analogue output 6.
G8.7.4 AO6 high level Maximum level setting can be lower than the minimum level setting. This allows the user to achieve
-250 to 250% YES
= 100 % inverse scaling; as the reference magnitude set in [G8.7.1] increases, the output frequency will
decrease and vice versa.
Filter for analogue input 6 value.
G8.7.5 AO6 filter = Off=0 If the analogue signal appears slightly unstable, improved stability and response can be achieved
YES
Off 0 to 20,0 s with the addition of a suitable filter value.
Note: Filter use can add a slight delay to the analogue output signal.

64 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Group 9: Comparators
Subgroup 9.1: Comparator 1
Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
The source for Comparator 1 can be set according to the following table:

OPT. FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

00 None There is no source for the comparator.
01 Motor speed Comparison signal is motor speed.
02 Motor current Motor current signal.
03 Motor voltage Motor voltage signal.
04 Motor power Motor power.
05 Motor torque Motor torque signal.
06 Motor cos phi Motor cosine phi
07 Motor temperature Motor temperature signal.
08 Motor frequency Drive input frequency.
09 Input voltage Drive input voltage.
10 Bus voltage DC Bus voltage.
11 Drive temperature Drive temperature.
12
14
Speed reference
PID reference
Speed reference.
Speed reference in PID mode.
EN
15 PID feedback System feedback signal.
PID error. Difference between reference and
G9.1.1 Comp 1 16 PID error
00 to 32 feedback signal of the sensor. NO
source sel = None 17 Analog Input 1 Signal connected to analogue input 1.
18 Analog Input 2 Signal connected to analogue input 2.
19 Analog Input 3 Signal connected to analogue input 3.
20 Analog Input 1+2 The average of the analogue inputs 1 and 2.
Comparison signal is motor speed without sign
22 Absolute speed
(absolute value).
Comparison signal is motor torque without sign
24 Absolute torque
(absolute value).
Comparison signal is the speed measured by the
25 Encoder speed
encoder. Hidden if [SG1.30 = NO].
27 PID output Output in PID mode.
We will get a maximum value, forcing the comparator
28 Max scale
to obtain the needed status.
29 Analog Input 4 Signal connected to analogue input 4.
30 Analog Input 5 Signal connected to analogue input 5.
31 Analog Input 6 Signal connected to analogue input 6.
32 Analog Input 7 Signal connected to analogue input 7.
Note: Options 29-32 will only be available if the corresponding inputs/outputs are enabled.

Allows selecting the operation mode of Comparator 1.

OPT. FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

G9.1.2 Comp 1 type = Normal Comparator will be activated when the ON condition is given and
0 Normal YES
Normal Window will be deactivated when the OFF condition is given.
Comparator will be activated when signal is within the limits 1 and
1 Window 2, and additionally when limit 2 is higher than limit 1. If limit 2 is lower
than limit 1, comparator output logical function will be inverted.

Selects the activation value of Comparator 1 output. The comparator output will be activated if
G9.1.3 Comp 1 ON
-250% to +250% comparator source signal, selected in G9.1.1, is higher than the value set here, and the delay time YES
level = 100 %
G9.1.5 has elapsed. Available if [G9.1.2 = NORMAL].

Selects the activation value of Comparator 1 in Window mode. The comparator output will be
G9.1.4 Comp 1 OFF
-250% to +250% activated if comparator source signal, selected in G9.1.1, is lower than the value of this parameter, YES
level = 0 %
and the delay time G9.1.5 has elapsed. Available if [G9.1.2 = NORMAL].
Defines one of the limits to activate Comparator 1 in Window mode. The comparator output will
G9.1.3 Comp 1
be activated when comparator source signal, selected in G9.1.1, is within the two limits G9.1.3
window limit 2 = -250% to +250% YES
and G9.1.4, and ON delay time G9.1.5 has elapsed.
100 %
Available if [G9.1.2 = WINDOW].

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 65

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Defines one of the limits to activate Comparator 1 in Window mode. The comparator output will
G9.1.4 Comp 1 be activated when comparator source signal, selected in G9.1.1, is within the two limits G9.1.3
-250% to +250% YES
window limit 1 = 0 % and G9.1.4, and ON delay time G9.1.5 has elapsed.
Available if [G9.1.2 = WINDOW].
Delay time for the Comparator 1 output activation. When the activation condition is satisfied,
G9.1.5 Comp 1 ON
0.0 to 999s whether Normal or Window mode is enabled, the timer delays the activation of this signal during NO
delay = 0.0 s
the time set in this parameter.
Delay time for the Comparator 1 output deactivation. When the activation condition is met, whether
G9.1.6 Comp 1 OFF
0.0 to 999s Normal or Window mode is enabled, the timer delays the activation of this signal during the time NO
delay = 0.0 s
set in this parameter.
Allows selecting the function to be activated with the output Comparator 1 according to the
following table:

OPT. FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

00 Not used Comparator output deactivated
When it is activated, it gives the start command. When it is
01 Start / Stop
deactivated, it gives the stop command.
02 Stop 1 Activates the stop mode 1.
03 Stop 2 Activates the stop mode 2.
04 Reset Resets the drive.
05 Start + Inch 1 Activates Start + Inch speed 1.
06 Start + Inch 2 Activates Start + Inch speed 2.
G9.1.7 Comp 1 output
00 to 12 07 Start + Inch 3 Activates Start + Inch speed 3. YES
function = Not used
08 Invert speed It inverts the speed direction.
09 Acc / Dec 2 Activates the alternative ramps.
10 Reference 2 Activates the alternative reference.
11 Speed limit 2 Activates the alternative speed limits.
Drive will trip by F73, F74 or F75 when comparator ON
12 Fault
condition is satisfied.

Note: If activation and deactivation levels are adjusted to very similar values and delay times are
set to OFF, any noise in the signals of the selected source may cause an oscillation in the
comparator activation and, therefore, incorrect operation. You should set these levels keeping a
reasonable margin between them, and if necessary, set a delay time to improve the operation.

Subgroup 9.2: Comparator 2

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G9.2.1 Comp 2
00 to 32 Sets the source for Comparator 2. See [G9.1.1] for configuration options. NO
source sel = None
Allows selecting the operation mode of Comparator 2.

OPT. FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

Comparator will be activated when the ON condition is given and
G9.2.2 Comp 2 type = Normal 0 Normal
will be deactivated when the OFF condition is given. YES
Normal Window
Comparator will be activated when signal is within the limits 1
and 2, and additionally when limit 2 is higher than limit 1. If limit
1 Window
2 is lower than limit 1, comparator output logical function will be
inverted.
Selects the activation value of Comparator 2 output. The comparator output will be activated if
G9.2.3 Comp 2 ON
-250% to +250% comparator source signal, selected in G9.2.1, is higher than the value set here, and the delay time YES
level = 100 %
G9.2.5 has elapsed. Available if [G9.2.2 = NORMAL].
Selects the activation value of Comparator 2 in Window mode. The comparator output will be
G9.2.4 Comp 2 OFF
-250% to +250% activated if comparator source signal, selected in G9.2.1, is lower than the value of this parameter, YES
level = 0 %
and the delay time G9.2.5 has elapsed. Available if [G9.2.2 = NORMAL].
Defines one of the limits to activate Comparator 2 in Window mode. The comparator output will
G9.2.3 Comp 2
be activated when comparator source signal, selected in G9.2.1, is within the two limits G9.2.3
window limit 2 = -250% to +250% YES
and G9.2.4, and ON delay time G9.2.5 has elapsed.
100 %
Available if [G9.2.2 = WINDOW].
Defines one of the limits to activate Comparator 2 in Window mode. The comparator output will
G9.2.4 Comp 2 be activated when comparator source signal, selected in G9.2.1, is within the two limits G9.2.3
-250% to +250% YES
window limit 1 = 0 % and G9.2.4, and ON delay time G9.2.5 has elapsed.
Available if [G9.2.2 = WINDOW].

66 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Delay time for the Comparator 2 output activation. When the activation condition is satisfied,
G9.2.5 Comp 2 ON
0.0 to 999s whether Normal or Window mode is enabled, the timer delays the activation of this signal during YES
delay = 0.0 s
the time set in this parameter.
Delay time for the Comparator 2 output deactivation. When the activation condition is met, whether
G9.2.6 Comp 2 OFF
0.0 to 999s Normal or Window mode is enabled, the timer delays the activation of this signal during the time YES
delay = 0.0 s
set in this parameter.
G9.2.7 Comp 2
Allows selecting the function to be activated with the output Comparator 2. See configuration
output function = Not 0 to 11 NO
options in [G9.1.7].
used

Subgroup 9.3: Comparator 3

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G9.3.1 Comp 3
00 to 32 Sets the source for Comparator 3. See [G9.1.1] for configuration options. NO
source sel = None
Allows selecting the operation mode of Comparator 3.

OPT. FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

G9.3.2 Comp 3 type =
Normal
Normal
Window
0 Normal
Comparator will be activated when the ON condition is given and
will be deactivated when the OFF condition is given.
Comparator will be activated when signal is within the limits 1
YES EN
and 2, and additionally when limit 2 is higher than limit 1. If limit
1 Window
2 is lower than limit 1, comparator output logical function will be
inverted.
Selects the activation value of Comparator 3 output. The comparator output will be activated if
G9.3.3 Comp 3 ON
-250% to +250% comparator source signal, selected in G9.3.1, is higher than the value set here, and the delay time YES
level = 100 %
G9.3.5 has elapsed. Available if [G9.3.2 = NORMAL].
Selects the activation value of Comparator 3 in Window mode. The comparator output will be
G9.3.4 Comp 3 OFF
-250% to +250% activated if comparator source signal, selected in G9.3.1, is lower than the value of this parameter, YES
level = 0 %
and the delay time G9.3.5 has elapsed. Available if [G9.3.2 = NORMAL].

Defines one of the limits to activate Comparator 3 in Window mode. The comparator output will
G9.3.3 Comp 3
be activated when comparator source signal, selected in G9.3.1, is within the two limits G9.3.3
window limit 2 = -250% to +250% YES
and G9.3.4, and ON delay time G9.3.5 has elapsed.
100 %
Available if [G9.3.2 = WINDOW].

Defines one of the limits to activate Comparator 3 in Window mode. The comparator output will
G9.3.4 Comp 3 be activated when comparator source signal, selected in G9.3.1, is within the two limits G9.3.3
-250% to +250% YES
window limit 1 = 0 % and G9.3.4, and ON delay time G9.3.5 has elapsed.
Available if [G9.3.2 = WINDOW].
Delay time for the Comparator 3 output activation. When the activation condition is satisfied,
G9.3.5 Comp 3 ON
0.0 to 999s whether Normal or Window mode is enabled, the timer delays the activation of this signal during YES
delay = 0.0 s
the time set in this parameter.
Delay time for the Comparator 3 output deactivation. When the activation condition is met, whether
G9.3.6 Comp 3 OFF
0.0 to 999s Normal or Window mode is enabled, the timer delays the activation of this signal during the time YES
delay = 0.0 s
set in this parameter.
G9.3.7 Comp 3
Allows selecting the function to be activated with the output Comparator 3. See configuration
output function = Not 0 to 11 NO
options in [G9.1.7].
used

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 67

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Group 10: Limits

Group 10.1: Speed
Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G10.1.1 Minimum -250.00% to Sets the minimum speed limit 1 that can be applied to the motor by the drive. It is set in percentage
YES
limit 1 = -100.00 % G10.1.2 of motor rated speed.
Sets the maximum speed limit 1 that can be applied to the motor by the drive. If the reference is
G10.1.2 Maximum G10.1.1 to higher than the value set in this parameter, the drive will ignore that reference and will operate the
YES
limit 1 = 100.00 % +250.00% motor at the value set in this screen.
It is set in percentage of motor rated speed.
Sets the minimum speed limit 2 that can be applied to the motor by the drive. It is set in percentage
G10.1.3 Minimum -250.00% to
of motor rated speed. YES
limit 2 = -100.00 % G10.1.4
Note: Selection of minimum speed limit 2 is done via a digital input or comparator output function.
Sets the maximum speed limit 2 that can be applied to the motor by the drive. If the reference is
G10.1.4 Maximum G10.1.3 to higher than the value set in this parameter, the drive will ignore that reference and will operate the
YES
limit 2 = 100.00 % +250.00% motor at the value set in this screen.
It is set in percentage of motor rated speed.
G10.1.5 Maximum lim 0.0 to 60.0 s; Allows setting a delay to trigger a fault 'F49 SPD LIMIT' once the drive reaches the configured
YES
timeout = Off Off speed limit.
G10.1.6 Minimum lim 0.0 to 60.0 s;
Establishes the period that the drive must maintain the minimum speed before triggering F23. YES
timeout = Off Off
Allows inverting motor speed. This function helps to prevent the motor from running in negative
direction.

G10.1.7 Invert speed No OPT. FUNCTION YES

= No Yes
No Motor running in negative rotation direction is not allowed.
Yes Motor running in both rotation directions is allowed.

Group 10.2: Current/Torque

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Output current limit. Motor current will be kept within this programmed limit. When this protection
is active the SD750 status of current limitation (ILT) is displayed.
G10.2.1 Current limit 0.2In to1.5In A;
Note: It is not advisable, in applications when the motor is at steady speed status, that current YES
= 1.2In A Off
limit works constantly. This may cause damage to the motor and torque variations can affect the
load. Current limit should only work when an overload occurs, or due to excessive acceleration
and deceleration values, or because motor data details are entered incorrectly.
G10.2.2 I limit 0 to 60 s;
Allows adjusting the time to trigger a fault once current limit has been reached. YES
timeout = Off Off
G10.2.3 Current limit 0.2In to1.5In A;
Similar to [G10.2.15], but for the alternative current limit. YES
2 = 1.2In A Off
G10.2.4 I limit 2 0 to 60 s;
Adjusts the time to trigger a fault if the alternative current limit (G10.2.4) is reached. YES
timeout = Off Off
G10.2.5 I lim 2 switch Off Allows setting the speed level to change from current limit 1 to current limit 2. Additionally, it is
YES
speed = Off 1 to 250 % possible to select the alternative current limit 2 using a digital input configured as option 23.
G10.2.6 Torque limit Maintains the maximum torque, impeding the drive applies more torque to the load. It is set as a
0.0 to 250.0 % YES
= 150.0 % percentage of motor rated torque.
G10.2.7 Torque limit 0 to 60 s;
Allows adjusting the time to trigger a fault once torque limit has been reached. YES
timeout = Off Off
G10.2.8 Torque limit
0.0 to 250.00 % Similar to G10.2.6, but for the alternative torque limit. YES
2 = 150.0 %
G10.2.9 Torque lim 2 0 to 60 s; Allows adjusting the time to trigger a fault once the alternative torque limit has been reached
YES
timeout = Off Off (G10.2.8).
G10.2.10 Torque l 2 Off Allows setting the torque level to change from torque limit 1 to torque limit 2. It is also possible to
YES
swt speed = Off % 1 to 250.00 % select the alternative torque limit 2 using a digital input configured as option 48.
Output current limit during regeneration. It keeps the motor load current within the adjusted limit
Off = 40%·In (motor), during regeneration. When this protection is active, the display shows that the SD750 is limiting
G10.2.11 I limit
40.1% to 150%·In A current (ILT). YES
Regen = Off (drive)
If this parameter is set to ‘OFF’, the algorithm will be disabled.

68 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G10.2.12 I limit 0 to 60s, Allows adjusting the time to trigger a fault once reached the limit of regenerative current. Hidden
YES
Regen Time = Off Off if [G10.2.11 = Off].
G10.2.13 Reg torque
0.0 to 250.0 % Allows limiting the regenerative torque of the motor. YES
limit = 150.0 %
G10.2.14 Reg torque 0 to 60 s
Allows defining the maximum time where regenerative torque of the motor can be limited. YES
lim time = Off Off
Allows disabling the torque/current limit algorithm.

OPT. FUNCTION
G10.2.15 Disable limit No Algorithm is enabled. By limiting the current or the torque, the equipment
No YES
I/T = No Yes reduces its speed.
Algorithm is disabled but the equipment still using current or torque limit
Yes (G10.2.1 and G10.2.6) and timeouts (G10.2.2 and G10.2.7) which could
cause a drive trip.

Group 11: Protections

Group 11.1: Input
EN
Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G11.1.1 Supply under
0.85Vn to 0.90Vn YES
voltage = 0.875Vn Input low voltage protection is a combination of parameters G11.4 and G11.5. Drive turns off its
G11.1.2 Under output generating a fault 'F14 LW V IN' when average voltage, measured in the drive input, is
0.0 to 60.9s
voltage timeout = 5.0 below the value set in G11.4 for the time set in G11.5. YES
Off = 60.1
s
G11.1.3 Supply over
1.05Vn to 1.10Vn Input high voltage protection is a combination of parameters G11.1.3 and G11.1.4. Drive turns off YES
voltage = 1.075Vn
its output generating a fault 'F13 HI V IN' when average voltage, measured in the drive input, is
G11.1.4 Over voltage 0.0 to 60.9s
above the value set in G11.1.3 for the time set in G11.1.4. YES
timeout = 5.0 s Off = 60.1

Modifies the drive response following an input power loss while motor is running according to the
following table:

OPT. FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

0 No faults No action will be taken by the drive.
No faults
1 Faults Drive will trigger fault 'F11 VIN LOSS'.
G11.1.5 Low voltage Faults
Drive will not trip because of fault and will try to control the YES
behavior = Faults Stop 2 Stop
motor to a stop while DC Bus voltage level allows it.
Dip voltage recover
After a momentary power loss has occurred, an algorithm of
controlled recovery is activated. Thus, motor speed is not
Dip voltage
3 affected significantly.
recover
In case of loads with high inertia, speed reduction will be
minimal.

G11.1.6 LVRT input Defines the voltage threshold to enable LVRT. Whenever voltage drops below this value, the drive
15 to 50 % YES
threshold = 25 % will enter in voltage dip.
G11.1.7 LVRT output Defines the voltage threshold to disable LVRT. Once voltage overcomes this value, the drive will
1 to 15 % YES
threshold = 5 % exit the voltage dip.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 69

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Group 11.2: Motor

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
It supplies a safety function to stop the drive automatically if the motor has not stopped after the
time set in this parameter has elapsed and if the drive has received a stop command. The drive
will fault on 'F45 STOP T/O'.
G11.2.1 Stop timeout Off This function is used to protect from uncontrolled stops where motor needs a longer time than the
YES
= Off 0.1 to 999s predict time to stop. As well as other protections integrated into the drive, this time can be set to
turn off the output voltage and stop the motor by free run if this time has elapsed and the motor
has not stopped completely. Controlled stop time is calculated in standard conditions during
system operation. Stop limit time should be set to a higher value than controlled stop time value.
G11.2.2 Ground Off, Allows drive to turn off its output to the motor generating a fault 'F20 GROUND FLT' automatically
YES
current limit = 20 % 0 to 30% In if the leakage current value is above the value set in this parameter.
G11.2.3 I out asym 0.0 to 10.0s, Allows the setting of a delay time before the trip when an output current unbalance is detected.
YES
trip delay = 5.0 s Off After this time, the drive will trip by ‘F19 IMB I OUT‘
G11.2.4 V asym out 0.0s to 10.0s, Allows setting a delay time before tripping once output voltage imbalance has been detected.
YES
trip delay = 5.0 s Off Once this time is elapsed, the drive trips due to ‘F18 IMB V OUT’.
G11.2.5 PT100 motor 69 = Off,
Configures the threshold temperature to trigger F79 PT100. YES
fault = Off ºC 70 to 180ºC
G11.2.6 PT100 fault Sets the time where temperature must be equal to the value set in G11.2.5 to trigger fault F79
0 to 3000s YES
timeout = 30 s PT100. Note: This parameter is hidden if [G11.2.5 = Off].
Allows activating operation without load. If “NO” is selected, the drive triggers due to F39 SIN
G11.2.7 Fault with no No
CARGA when 5% of the speed is reached and no load has been detected. In case of selectins YES
load = No Yes
“YES” the drive will be able to start without load.
G11.2.8 Pump
overload level = 20.0 0.0 to 3000A YES
A Overload protection is a combination of parameters G11.2.8, G11.2.9 and G11.2.10. Drive turns
off its output generating a fault 'F57 PUMP OVERLOAD' when the output current of the drive is
G11.2.9 Pump Off = 0,
higher than the current set in G11.2.8 for the time adjusted in parameter G11.2.10. YES
overload filter = Off 0.0 a 20.0s
By means of parameter G11.2.9, we can adjust the value of low-pass filter for the current
reading to avoid oscillations.
G11.2.10 Overload
0.0 a 480.0s YES
delay = 60 s

Allows the possibility of protecting the pump from underload status.

OPT. FUNCTION
No Underload protection disabled.
Yes Underload protection enabled.

G11.2.11 Pump To protect the pump from underload status is necessary to follow the next steps:
No
underload enable = Set this parameter to ‘YES’. YES
Yes
No Set an underload current value (in G11.2.12) below which the first detection condition will be met.
Set an underload speed value (in G11.2.13) above which the second detection condition will be
met.
Set a delay time to activate underload protection (in G11.2.14), once elapsed, last underload
condition will be activated.
If three previous conditions are given, the drive will stop the pump to protect it from underload
status.
G11.2.12 Pump Sets the underload current below which the first detection condition to activate the protection is
underload current = 0.2In to 1.5In A met. This parameter operates together with parameters G11.2.13 and G11.2.14. This value YES
1.0In A depends on the drive capacity.
G11.2.13 Pump
Sets the underload speed above which the second detection condition to activate the protection
underload speed = +0.0% to +250% YES
is met. This parameter operates together with parameters G11.2.12 and G11.2.14.
100.0 %
G11.2.14 Pump Sets delay time to activate the underload protection. The drive will wait for this time before
underload flt dly = 0 to 999.9 s activating the protection and then will stop. This parameter operates together with parameters YES
10.0 s G11.2.12 and G11.2.13.

70 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Group 12: Auto Reset

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
This function resets the drive automatically after a fault.

OPT. FUNCTION
No Auto Reset is disabled.
G12.1 Enable No Yes Auto Reset is enabled. YES
autoreset = No Yes
When this function is active, faults programmed in G12.5 to G12.8 will be reset.

Caution: Auto Reset function can cause unexpected automatic starts. Ensure the
installation is configured for Auto Reset to prevent damage to property or personnel.
Allows setting of the maximum number of Auto Reset attempts. Drive will try to reset as many
G12.2 Retries max
1 to 5 times as the number of attempts set in this screen after a fault occurs. This parameter and ‘G12.4 YES
number = 1
RS COUNT’ control the drive to carry out Auto Reset function in a controlled manner.
G12.3 Autoreset
5 to 120s Allows setting of the time elapsed from the fault occurring before attempting auto reset. YES
delay = 5 s
Allows setting of the time that once elapsed will reset the Auto Reset attempt counter to zero.
Two situations are possible:
G12.4 Counter reset
time = 15 min
1 to 60min
a) If the SD750 is successfully restarted and runs for a period exceeding the value set in this
screen then the attempt counter G12.2 will be reset to zero.
YES EN
b) If the total number of reset attempts is exceeded within this period the SD750 will fault on the
last fault condition. The SD700 will remain in a fault condition until the unit is manually reset.

G12.5 Autoreset fault

0 to 65535 YES
1 = Off
If Auto Reset selection is enabled, the SD750 will automatically resets the faults selected in these
parameters. Adjustment is individual according to the table from section “FAULT MESSAGES.
G12.6 Autoreset fault
0 to 65535 DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS ”. YES
2 = Off

Caution: When fault selection for auto reset is undertaken, user should pay special
G12.7 Autoreset fault
0 to 65535 attention to option 1 ‘All the faults’. In this case, the protections of the drive and motor will be YES
3 = Off
disabled. It is not recommended to select this option since the drive could try to reset internal
trips causing serious damage to the drive.
G12.8 Autoreset fault
0 to 65535 YES
4 = Off

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 71

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Group 13: Fault History

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G13.1 Fault Register
0 to 1024 YES
1 = No faults
G13.1b Date = 01/01/2000 00:00 to
YES
01/01/2000 00:00 31/12/2127 23:59
G13.2 Fault Register
0 to 1024 YES
2 = No faults
The first parameter from this group allows visualizing information about the last fault and, also,
G13.2b Date = 01/01/2000 00:00 to it will be used as the first register of fault history.
YES
01/01/2000 00:00 31/12/2127 23:59
G13.3 Fault Register The drive is rearmed by pressing the STOP-RESET key from the display, the RESET button on
0 to 1024 YES
3 = No faults the control cabinet door or by using an external display if it exists. Some faults can be
G13.3b Date = 01/01/2000 00:00 to automatically rearmed using Auto Reset (see group G12).
YES
01/01/2000 00:00 31/12/2127 23:59
G13.4 Fault Register A list of the last six faults in chronological order is shown. The most recent fault appears in first
0 to 1024 place (G13.1). Each time that a fault occurs, the drive shows the fault in parameter G13.1. After YES
4 = No faults
G13.4b Date = 01/01/2000 00:00 to the fault is solved and reset, this fault will be shifted to the next position of the register (G13.2).
YES
01/01/2000 00:00 31/12/2127 23:59 The previous faults will shift down one position. The oldest fault message (G13.6) will be
discarded.
G13.5 Fault Register
0 to 1024 YES
5 = No faults
G13.5b Date = 01/01/2000 00:00 to
YES
01/01/2000 00:00 31/12/2127 23:59
G13.6 Fault Register
0 to 1024 YES
6 = No faults
OPT. FUNCTION
G13.7 Erase fault No No Function disabled.
YES
history = No Yes It erases fault history (last six faults). The screen returns to default value ‘NO’,
Yes
after all the faults have been erased.

Group 14: Multi-references

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows setting multiple references. These references will be activated using digital inputs
G14.1 Multi reference configured as multiple speed references or PID references.
1 = 10.00 %
To use this function, select operating mode, ‘G4.1.4 DIGIT I MODE=2 or 3’ (2 or 3-wires multi-
G14.2 Multi reference reference). Then, it is necessary to select the multi-references as the speed reference in
2 = 20.00 % parameter ‘G3.1 REF 1 SPD=Multireferences’ or as a PID references in ‘G6.1 SEL
REF=Multireferences’.
G14.3 Multi reference
3 = 30.00 % Units are set in either percentage of motor rated speed or feedback analogue input range (if an
analogue unit is selected).
G14.4 Multi reference
The following table shows the relationship between DI4,DI5, DI6 inputs when activated in multi-
4 = 40.00 % -250% to reference mode (as a percentage of motor rated speed): YES
+250%
G14.5 Multi reference
5 = 50.00 % PARM REF ED4 ED5 ED6
G14.1 Multireferences 1 0 0 X
G14.6 Multi reference G14.2 Multireferences 2 0 X 0
6 = 60.00 % G14.3 Multireferences 3 0 X X
G14.4 Multireferences 4 X 0 0
G14.5 Multireferences 5 X 0 X
G14.7 Multi reference G14.6 Multireferences 6 X X 0
7 = 70.00 % G14.7 Multireferences 7 X X X

Note: 0: Not active and X: Active.

72 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Group 15: Inch Speeds

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows setting of the value of the three possible motor inch speeds. Inch speed selection is
G15.1 Inch speed 1 = possible through a comparator output (directly) or by a digital input combination. If digital inputs
0.00 % are used for this purpose they should be configured as ‘START + INCH1’ or ‘START + INCH2’.
See G4.1.5 to G4.1.10.

Inputs
G15.2 Inch speed 2 = -250% to Speed DIX DIY
YES
0.00 % +250% Inch speed 1 X 0
Inch speed 2 0 X
Inch speed 3 X X
G15.3 Inch speed 3 = Note: The activation of this function includes the start command. Therefore, this signal has priority
0.00 % over any other input configured as ‘Start’. When this option is active, inputs configured as Start /
Stop 5, Start / Reset / Stop 6, Start / Stop / Reset 18, will not operate as stop anymore.

Group 16: Skip Frequencies EN

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows user to select a first skip frequency to avoid resonance frequencies or any other
G16.1 Skip frequency frequencies that the motor will avoid using as reference. The drive will pass through these
-250.00 to 250.00 % YES
1 = 0.00 % frequencies during speed shifts (acceleration / deceleration) but will not remain operation at them.
This value defines de center of the skip bandwidth 1, which size must be configured in [G16.2].
Sets the skip frequency bandwidth 1. Skip frequencies are those where the drive will not operate,
even if during acceleration or deceleration the drive passes through such frequencies. Skip
bandwidth 1 will have the size set on this parameter and will be centered with respect to [G16.1].
For example, if a 10% is selected, skip bandwidth will be from [G16.1]: 5%, to [G16.1] + 5%. Let
us suppose that the range goes from 20% to 30%. In case the reference frequency is within that
range, say 27%, we have two scenarios:

G16.2 Skip Off = 0; a) If the new setpoint is greater than the current setpoint, the equipment has to
YES
bandwidth 1 = Off 0.1 to 20.00 % accelerate to the lower limit of the band and there is no action until the new setpoint
exceeds the frequency hopping band. When this condition is met, the equipment must
accelerate.
b) In the event that the new setpoint is less than the current setpoint, the team will
decelerate to the upper limit of the band and will not transfer it until the setpoint is
less than the lower limit of the frequency hop band. When this happens, then the
equipment decelerates until it reaches the setpoint.
If G16.2 is set to 0= Off, the skip frequency 1 will not be considered.
Allows user to select a second skip frequency to avoid resonance frequencies or any other
G16.3 Skip frequency frequencies that the motor will avoid using as reference. The drive will pass through these
-250.00 to 250.00 % YES
2 = 0.00 % frequencies during speed shifts (acceleration / deceleration) but will not remain operation at them.
This value defines de center of the skip bandwidth 1, which size must be configured in [G16.4].
G16.4 Skip Off = 0; Sets the skip frequency bandwidth 2. It will have the size set on this parameter and will be centered
YES
bandwidth 2 = Off 0 to 20.00 % with respect to [G16.3]. See [G16.2] for an example.
Allows user to select a third skip frequency to avoid resonance frequencies or any other
G16.5 Skip frequency frequencies that the motor will avoid using as reference. The drive will pass through these
-250.00 to 250.00 % YES
3 = 0.00 % frequencies during speed shifts (acceleration / deceleration) but will not remain operation at them.
This value defines de center of the skip bandwidth 1, which size must be configured in [G16.6].
G16.6 Skip Off = 0; Sets the skip frequency bandwidth 3. It will have the size set on this parameter and will be centered
YES
bandwidth 3 = Off 0 to 20.00 % with respect to [G16.5]. See [G16.2] for an example.
Allows user to select a fourth skip frequency to avoid resonance frequencies or any other
G16.7 Skip frequency frequencies that the motor will avoid using as reference. The drive will pass through these
-250.00 to 250.00 % YES
4 = 0.00 % frequencies during speed shifts (acceleration / deceleration) but will not remain operation at them.
This value defines de center of the skip bandwidth 1, which size must be configured in [G16.8]
G16.8 Skip Off = 0; Sets the skip frequency bandwidth 4. It will have the size set on this parameter and will be centered
YES
bandwidth 4 = Off 0 to 20.00 % with respect to [G16.3]. See [G16.2] for an example.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 73

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Group 17: Brake

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G17.1 DC brake time Off=0.0
Allows setting the time during which the DC brake will be activated. YES
= Off 0.1 to 99s
Allows setting the current level applied during braking. The proper current value must be set to
G17.2 DC brake
0 to 100% brake the load inertia correctly. If this value is too low, the load will not be stopped in time. If the YES
current level = 0 %
value is too high the power components of the drive will be stressed.
Allows setting the continuous DC voltage level applied during braking. The proper voltage value
G17.3 DC break on Off,
must be set to brake the load inertia correctly. If this value is too low, load will not be stopped in YES
delay = Off 0.0 to 99s,
time. Otherwise, if the value is too high the power components of the drive will be stressed.
Set a suitable value to avoid humidity condensation forming in the motor.
Note: Modify this parameter only if necessary.
G17.4 Heating Off=0.0
YES
current = Off 0.1 to 30%
CAUTION: Although the motor is not running there is dangerous voltage. Run Led will be
lit during this process. Be careful to avoid property damage and personal injuries.
User must configure the drive if an external dynamic brake is going to be used.

G17.5 Dynamic brake No OPT. FUNCTION

NO
= No Yes No External brake is not going to be used, the application does not
require it.
Yes An external brake is going to be installed.

74 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Group 19: Fine Tuning

Subgroup 19.1: IGBT Control
Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
This selection defines the drive control type.
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
V/Hz Scalar control mode. Drive carries out the control applying a
G19.1.1 Control type 0 V/Hz
Vector voltage / frequency ramp to the motor. NO
= V/Hz
PMSM 1 Vector Vector control mode.
Control mode for synchronous motors (PMSM: Permanent Magnet
2 PMSM
Synchronous Motor).
Allows selecting the type of vector control and the type of power control for the motor. Available
if G19.1.1 = Vector.

PMC: Power Motor Control

AVC: Advanced Vector Control.

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION

G19.1.1b Vector 1 PMC Open loop speed PMC control type speed in open loop.
control = PMC Open 1 to 8 2 PMC Close loop speed PMC control type speed in closed loop. YES
loop speed 3
4
PMC Close loop torque
PMC Open loop torque
PMC control type torque in closed loop.
PMC control type torque in open loop.
EN
5 AVC Close loop speed AVC control type speed in closed loop.
6 AVC Close loop torque AVC control type torque in closed loop.
7 AVC Open loop speed AVC control type speed in open loop.
8 AVC Open loop torque AVC control type torque in open loop.

Allows selecting the control type for synchronous motors. Available if G19.1.1 = PMSM.
G19.1.1c Perm
I/Hz OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Magnet Sync Mot = YES
F.Oriented Scalar control mode, in which control is applied by applying a
I/Hz 9 I/Hz
voltage / frequency ramp to the motor.
10 F.Oriented Vector control for synchronous motors.
G19.1.3 PID Vout = No Allows enabling or disabling regulation of output voltage to keep it at its rated value despite load
NO
No Yes conditions.
With this option, the drive calculates internally motor parameters to use them in the vector control.
No OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
G19.1.6 Auto Tuning
Static 0 No Auto Tuning disabled. NO
= No
Dynamic 1 Static Auto Tuning enable. No motor spinning is required.
2 Dynamic Auto Tuning enable. It requires the motor working without load.
G19.1.7 Off
With this option, it is possible to supply more motor voltage at 50Hz. YES
Overmodulation = Off 0.01 to 100.00 %
This control mode improves motor noise tone.

OPT. FUNCTION
G19.1.8 Pewave = No
No Pewave control deactivated. YES
Yes Yes
Pewave control activated.
Yes Commutation frequency (G19.1.9) is slightly modified on a random basis to
improve the noise tone generated by the motor.
G19.1.9 Switching
4000 to 8000 Hz Allows varying the drive switching frequency. This function can be used to reduce motor noise. YES
frequency = 4000 Hz

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 75

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Subgroup 19.2: Motor load

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows setting the minimum flux level used by the motor during low load conditions. With this
G19.2.1 Minimum flux dynamic system of flux optimization, noise and power losses are reduced. Adaptation of the flux
40 to 130% YES
level = 100 % level during low load conditions occurs automatically. The algorithm will be disabled when this
parameter is set to 100%.
Sets an initial voltage value applied to the motor during the starting. By using this function, it is
G19.2.2 Boost
0.0 to 10% possible to improve breakaway torque when starting heavy loads. YES
voltage = 0.0 %
Note: Set a low value first. Increase the value gradually until the load starts easily.
Sets an initial current value applied to the motor during the starting. By using this function, it is
G19.2.3 Boost possible to improve breakaway torque when starting heavy loads. This parameter will be ignored
0.0 to 100% YES
current = 0.0 % if [G19.2.2 has been previously adjusted].
Note: Set a low value first. Increase the value gradually until the load starts easily.
G19.2.4 Slip No If this function is active, it helps to compensate the slip on the motor. In case of heavy load able
YES
compensation = No Yes of provoking a high slip during the starting, set this parameter to YES.
Allows active frequency reduction, by varying speed, to maintain output current within controllable
margins (the display will show LTI). With this parameter it is possible to improve the stability of the
G19.2.5 Current limit
0.0 to 20.0% current limitation function considering motor slip. YES
factor = 0.0 %
Note: It is recommended to adjust this value in cases where current limitation is unstable. A los
value will improve stability, although the preventive actions will act before..
G19.2.6 Initial
0.0 to 100% Allows setting the initial frequency that will be applied to the drive at the moment of starting. YES
frequency = 0.0 %
Some motors can be destabilized and suffer shaking when working with soft loads or at certain
G19.2.7 Damping = speeds. The damping parameter is introduced to control stability.
0.00 to 10.00% YES
2% Note: No-load damping produces small variations (normally <0.1Hz). Therefore, if the application
requires an absolute fixed frequency output, this parameter must be set to 0.00%.
For VIN = 400V /
500V Bus: 625 to During deceleration with loads with inertia, the drive decelerates keeping the level of the bus
G19.2.8 Reg bus
800V voltage set by this parameter, when load and inertia conditions allow it. YES
voltage
For VIN = 690V If when decelerating, the fault ‘F2 V LIM FLT’ occurs, decrease the value of this parameter.
Bus: 950 to 1251V

76 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Subgroup 19.3: Motor model

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G19.3.1 R stator = 0.1
0.1 to 6553.5 mΩ Stator resistance (Rs): It is used to compensate the iron losses and copper losses of the motor. YES
mΩ
G19.3.2 R rotor = 0.1
0.1 to 6553.5 mΩ A key parameter that directly concerns the output torque. YES
mΩ
It is an interesting parameter if the equipment works with vector control and G19.1.2 = AVC. It is
G19.3.3 L
the main inductance of the motor that defines the magnetic field strength. It is a key parameter
magnetization = 0.1 0.1 to 6553.5 mH YES
that directly concerns the motor flux. Typical values can range from 75% (small motors) to 800%
mH
(large motors). Available if G19.1.1 = V/Hz or Vector.
G19.3.3 Back
electrom. force = 0.000 to 5.000 kV Back electromagnetic force. Available if G19.1.1 = PMSM. YES
0.000 kV
G19.3.4 L leakage
0.00 to 655.35 mH Allows adjusting the stator dispersion inductance. Available if G19.1.1 = V/Hz or Vector. YES
stator = 0.00 mH
G19.3.4 L Stator D
0.00 to 100.00 mH Allows adjusting the inductance in the D-axis of the stator. Available if G19.1.1 = PMSM. YES
axis = 0.00 mH
G19.3.5 L leakage
0.00 to 655.35 mH Allows adjusting the rotor dispersion inductance. Available if G19.1.1 = V/Hz or Vector. YES
rotor = 0.00 mH
G19.3.5 L Stator Q
0.00 to 100.00 mH Allows adjusting the inductance in the Q-axis of the stator. Available if G19.1.1 = PMSM. YES
axis = 0.00 mH

G19.3.6 Field 50.00 to

The weakening field occurs when the drive cannot give more voltage than it receives from the
power supply, and at the same time the frequency exceeds the rated frequency of the motor. In
EN
YES
weakening = 90.0 % 100.10%(Auto) this event, only the frequency will be regulated, and the voltage will remain constant, producing
the weakening of the motor field.
G19.3.7 Temperature
0.0 to 50.0% Allows adjusting the coefficient of the thermal model of the motor. YES
coef R = 20.0 %
Allows adjusting a higher start torque in PMC control type torque or speed in closed loop [G19.1.2].
G19.3.8 Flux tuning =
0.0 to 10.0% Note: If even set to the maximum value, moving the motor is still not possible, it may be because YES
2.0 %
the resistive torque is too high for the equipment, or because there is a mechanical problem.
Allows enabling or disabling parameters estimation while the motor is running.
G19.3.9 Params No
If enabled, the drive will correct dynamically the variation of G19.3.1 and G19.3.2 depending on YES
online estim = No Yes
the temperature of the motor.

Subgroup 19.4: Vector PID

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows setting the proportional gain value of the speed regulator. If a greater control response is
G19.4.1 Kp speed =
0.0 to 100.0% needed, this value must be increased. YES
10.0 %
Note: When increasing too much this value, the system can be destabilized.
Allows the adjustment of the integration time of the speed regulator. In the event of needing more
G19.4.2 Ki speed =
0.0 to 100.0% precision, this value must be increased. YES
10.0 %
Note: When increasing too much this value, the system can get slower.
Allows setting the value of the proportional gain of the overcurrent regulator. If a greater control
G19.4.3 Kp torque =
0.0 to 100.0% response is needed this value must be increased. YES
10.0 %
Note: When increasing too much this value, the system can become more unstable.
Allows the adjustment of the integration time of the overcurrent regulator. In the event of needing
G19.4.4 Ki torque =
0.0 to 100.0% more precision, this value must be increased. YES
10.0 %
Note: When increasing too much this value, the system can get slower.
G19.4.5 Kp I = 10.0 % 0.0 to 100.0% Allows the setting of the proportional gain value of the flow regulator. YES

G19.4.6 Ki I = 15.0 % 0.0 to 100.0% Allows the adjustment of the integration time of the flow regulator YES
Allows setting the proportional gain value of the speed regulator. If a greater control response is
G19.4.7 Kp
0.0 to 100.0% needed, this value must be increased. YES
Sensorless = 50.0 %
Note: When increasing too much this value, the system can be destabilized.
Allows setting the value of the integral gain of the regulator of the speed estimator. If a greater
G19.4.8 Ki
0.0 to 100.0% control response is needed, this value must be increased. YES
Sensorless = 50.0 %
Note: When increasing too much this value, the system can be destabilized.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 77

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Group 20: Serial Communication

Subgroup 20.1: Modbus RTU
Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows selecting the baud rate of the communication between the display and the control board.

OPT. SPEED bps

0 2400
1 4800
G20.1.1 Display 2 9600
baudrate = 921600 0 to 8 YES
3 19200
bps baud/s
4 57600
5 115200
6 230400
7 460800
8 921600
G20.1.2 Modbus Sets the identification address assigned to the drive for communication via the Modbus network.
1 to 255 YES
address = 10 If communication with several drives is required, a different address must be set for each unit.
Sets the data transmission speed for MODBUS serial communications. This rating should be the
same as the rating of the master of the communication bus on which the drive is integrated.

OPT. SPEED bps

0 2400
G20.1.3 Modbus 1 4800
baudrate = 9600 bps 0 to 8 2 9600 YES
baud/s 3 19200
4 57600
5 115200
6 230400
7 460800
8 921600
MODBUS parity setting. Used for data validation. If you do not want to validate data, set this
parameter to ‘NONE’. Parity selection should be the same as the parity of the master of the
communication bus on which the drive is integrated.
G20.1.4 Modbus
0 to 2 OPT. PARITY YES
parity = None
0 Odd
1 None
2 Even
If the time elapsed from the last valid data transmission has overcome the communications
G20.1.5 timeout, it is possible to trigger a fault whenever user requires it.
Off,
Communication Serial communication with the drive is possible through RS485 terminals or through optional serial YES
0 to 600 s
timeout = Off communication interfaces.
Note: Do not modify this parameter if it is not strictly necessary.

78 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Subgroup 20.2: Profibus Configuration

Subgroup 20.2.1: Master's input

Subgroup 20.2.1.1: Addresses

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Custom modbus
addr1: 0
Custom modbus See “Subgroup 20.6: Custom Modbus address”.
addr2: 0
0 to 65535 YES
Note: If these values are modified, the configuration of G20.6, G20.7, G21.3.2 and G21.4.2 will
… change.
Custom modbus
addr16: 0

Subgroup 20.2.1.2: Values

Screen Range Function

Set on
RUN EN
Custom modbus
val1: 0
Custom modbus See “Subgroup 20.7: Custom Modbus values”.
val2: 0
0 to 65535 YES
Note: If these values are modified, the configuration of G20.6, G20.7, G21.3.2 and G21.4.2 will
… change.
Custom modbus
val16: 0

Subgroup 20.2.2: Master's output

Subgroup 20.2.2.1: Addresses

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Custom modbus
addr17: 0
Custom modbus
addr18: 0 See “Subgroup 20.6: Custom Modbus address”.
0 to 65535 YES
… Note: If these values are modified, the configuration of G20.6, G20.7, G21.3.3 and G21.4.3 will
change.
Custom modbus
addr32: 0

Subgroup 20.2.2.2: Values

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Custom modbus
val17: 0
Custom modbus See “Subgroup 20.7: Custom Modbus values”.
val18: 0
0 to 65535 YES
Note: If these values are modified, the configuration of G20.6, G20.7, G21.3.3 and G21.4.3 will
… change.
Custom modbus
val32: 0

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 79

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Others

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G20.2.3 – Profibus
0 to 126 This parameter allows setting the slave ID address. YES
node address = 1
This parameter allows configuring the fault mode of the connector when communication with the
master is not allowed.
G20.2.4 – Connector OPT. FUNCTION
0 to 1 YES
Fault Mode = Fault The drive will trigger fault F-113: Lost PBUS c1 comms when communication
Fault
is not enabled.
Ignore The fault is ignored, and it is not triggered.
G20.2.5 – Connector
0 to 1 This parameter shows the state of the connector. YES
State = Off

Subgroup 20.6: Custom Modbus configuration

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
These parameters allow configuring 120 consecutive registers (4500 to 4619) variables from the
Modbus map as required. This is particularly useful when designing a SCADA, so that the client
G20.6.1 Custom can consult several registers in a single reading operation.
modbus addr 1 = 0
They are grouped as follows:

• Subgroup 20.6.1: Values 1 to 30

G20.6.2 Custom • Subgroup 20.6.2: Values 31 to 60
modbus addr 2 = 0 • Subgroup 20.6.3: Values 61 to 90
• Subgroup 20.6.4: Values 91 to 120
0 to 65535 YES
In parameters G20.6.x, user must enter the Modbus registers (Modbus address – 40001) that will
be pointed to. Once configured, parameters G20.7.x can be used to read or write the value of
… each register.

Example: Let us suppose we want to store the local speed reference (G3.3, Modbus 40053). We
must configure register 52 (40053 – 1) in G20.6.1, at Custom modbus addr1.
Then, in G20.7.1, Custom modbus val 1 we will read the current value of the local speed reference.
G20.6.120 Custom To modify it, we must enter the new value and save changes.
modbus addr 120 = 0
Note: When reading or writing a variable, keep in mind the type of variable and its Modbus range
to ensure values are interpreted correctly.

Subgroup 20.7: Custom Modbus values

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G20.7.1 Custom These parameters can be used to read and write the values of the registers that were previously
modbus val1 = 0 configured in G20.6. They are grouped as follows:

G20.7.2 Custom • Subgroup 20.7.1: Values 1 to 30

modbus val2 = 0 • Subgroup 20.7.2: Values 31 to 60
0 to 65535 YES
• Subgroup 20.7.3: Values 61 to 90
… • Subgroup 20.7.4: Values 91 to 120
G20.7.120 Custom Note: When reading or writing a variable, keep in mind the type of variable and its Modbus range
modbus val30 = 0 to ensure values are interpreted correctly.

80 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Group 21: Networks

Subgroup 21.1: Ethernet
Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows the possibility of assigning the parameters automatically.

OPT. FUNCTION
G21.1.1 Automatic IP No
Drive will take the IP, subnet mask and gateway addresses set by the user in YES
= No Yes No
[G21.1.2, G21.1.3 and G21.1.4].
The drive requests and receives the parameters of the IP, Subnet Mask and
Yes
Gateway addresses from the Network Server. DHCP protocol is used.
G21.1.1.1 Assigned Shows the drive IP address, regardless of whether it was assigned automatically or by the user in
0 to 255 YES
IP = 0.0.0.0 parameter [G21.1.2].
G21.1.1.2 Assigned Shows the drive subnet mask, regardless of whether it was assigned automatically or by the user
0 to 255 YES
subnet = 0.0.0.0 in parameter [G21.1.3].
Shows the drive gateway address, regardless of whether it was assigned automatically or by the
G21.1.1.3 Assigned
0 to 255 user in parameter [G21.1.4]. YES
gateway = 0.0.0.0
Format of Gateway Address is: A.B.C.D.

G21.1.2 IP address =
0 to 255
Sets the IP address of the equipment in the user local network. This address must be provided
by the local network administrator.
NO
EN
192.168.1.143 Format of the IP address is: A.B.C.D.
To configure the address, enter a value in each of the four parameters that compose it.
Sets the subnet mask address of the equipment in the user local network. This address must be
G21.1.3 Subnet Mask provided by the local network administrator.
0 to 255 NO
= 255.255.255.0 Format of the subnet mask is: A.B.C.D.
To configure the address, enter a value in each of the four parameters that compose it.
Sets the gateway address of the equipment in the user local network. This address must be
G21.1.4 Gateway = provided by the local network administrator.
0 to 255 NO
0.0.0.0 Format of the gateway address is: A.B.C.D.
To configure the address, enter a value in each of the four parameters that compose it.
Sets the MAC address. This address must be unique and exclusive and depends on the LAN
G21.1.5 MAC board. This address must be provided by Power Electronics.
0x00 to 0xFF NO
address= A.B.C.D.E.F Format of the MAC address is: A.B.C.D.E. F.
To configure the address, enter a value in each of the six parameters that compose it.

Subgroup 21.2: Client TCP

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G21.2.1 – Client TCP
0.05 to 5000 Maximum time allowed to enable communication YES
timeout = 1000s
G21.2.2 – Client TCP
0 to 4 Number of allowed retries to enable communication YES
retries = 1

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 81

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Subgroup 21.3: EtherNet / IP

Subgroup 21.3.1: EtherNet / IP

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows the possibility of assigning the parameters automatically.

OPT. FUNCTION
G21.3.1.1 Automatic No
Drive will take the IP, subnet mask and gateway addresses set by the user in YES
IP = No Yes No
[G21.3.1.2, G21.3.1.3 and G21.3.1.4].
The drive requests and receives the parameters of the IP, Subnet Mask and
Yes
Gateway addresses from the Network Server. DHCP protocol is used.
G21.3.1.2 Assigned
0 to 255 Shows the assigned IP address. Available if G23.1.3.1 = Yes. YES
IP = 0.0.0.0
G21.3.1.3 Assigned
0 to 255 Shows the assigned subnet mask. Available if G23.1.3.1 = Yes. YES
subnet = 0.0.0.0
G21.3.1.4 Assigned
0 to 255 Shows the assigned gateway address. Available if G23.1.3.1 = Yes. YES
gateway = 0.0.0.0
Available if G23.1.3.1 = No.
Sets the IP address of the equipment in the user local network. This address must be provided
G21.3.1.2 IP address
0 to 255 by the local network administrator. NO
= 192.168.1.143
Format of the IP address is: A.B.C.D.
To configure the address, enter a value in each of the four parameters that compose it.
Available if G23.1.3.1 = No.
Sets the subnet mask address of the equipment in the user local network. This address must be
G21.3.1.3 Subnet
0 to 255 provided by the local network administrator. NO
Mask = 255.255.255.0
Format of the subnet mask is: A.B.C.D.
To configure the address, enter a value in each of the four parameters that compose it.
Available if G23.1.3.1 = No.
Sets the gateway address of the equipment in the user local network. This address must be
G21.3.1.4 Gateway =
0 to 255 provided by the local network administrator. NO
0.0.0.0
Format of the gateway address is: A.B.C.D.
To configure the address, enter a value in each of the four parameters that compose it.
Sets the MAC address. This address must be unique and exclusive and depends on the LAN
G21.3.1.5 MAC board. This address must be provided by Power Electronics.
0x00 to 0xFF NO
address= A.B.C.D.E.F Format of the MAC address is: A.B.C.D.E. F.
To configure the address, enter a value in each of the six parameters that compose it.

Note: Please notice parameters G21.3.1.2, G21.3.1.3 and G21.3.1.4 vary depending on whether automatic IP is
enabled or not (parameter G21.3.1.1).

Subgroup 21.3.2: Master's input

Subgroup 21.3.2.1: Addresses

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Custom modbus
addr1: 0
Custom modbus See “Subgroup 20.6: Custom Modbus address”.
addr2: 0
0 to 65535 YES
Note: If these values are modified, the configuration of G20.6, G20.7, G21.3.3, G21.4.2 and
… G21.4.3 will change.

Custom modbus
addr16: 0

82 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Subgroup 21.3.2.2: Values

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Custom modbus
val1: 0
Custom modbus See “Subgroup 20.7: Custom Modbus values”.
val2: 0
0 to 65535 YES
Note: If these values are modified, the configuration of G20.6, G20.7, G21.3.3, G21.4.2 and
… G21.4.3 will change.
Custom modbus
val16: 0

Subgroup 21.3.3: Master's output

Subgroup 21.3.3.1: Addresses

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Custom modbus
addr31: 0 EN
Custom modbus See “Subgroup 20.6: Custom Modbus address”.
addr32: 0
0 to 65535 YES
Note: If these values are modified, the configuration of G20.6, G20.7, G21.3.2, G21.4.2 and
… G21.4.3 will change.

Custom modbus
addr46: 0

Subgroup 21.3.3.2: Values

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Custom modbus
val31: 0
Custom modbus See “Subgroup 20.7: Custom Modbus values”.
val32: 0
0 to 65535 YES
Note: If these values are modified, the configuration of G20.6, G20.7, G21.3.2, G21.4.2 and
… G21.4.3 will change.

Custom modbus
val46: 0

Others

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows defining who controls the equipment (sends start, stop, fault and reset commands).

OPT. FUNCTION
Local
G21.3.4 Control Local Control mode depends on G4.1.1 setting. The PLC will never be able decide
Network NO
mode = Local what to do, even if it is communicating with the drive.
Net decides
Network The network commands the drive.
Net The PLC decides when to control the drive (commands will be sent through
decides the network) and when control will depend on the setting of G4.1.1.
Allows defining who sets the direct reference (V or P) for the equipment.

Local OPT. FUNCTION

G21.3.5 Reference
Network Local Reference will be set through local control. NO
mode = Local
Net decides Network Reference will be given by the network.
Net Reference will be set through local control or the network, as the PLC
decides determines.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 83

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows defining who sets the direct reference (V or P) for the PID.

Local OPT. FUNCTION

G21.3.6 PID mode =
Network Local Reference will be set through local control. NO
Local
Net decides Network Reference will be given by the network.
Net Reference will be set through local control or the network, as the PLC
decides determines.
G21.3.7 Connector 1 Off
Read-only parameter, shows whether the Ethernet/IP connector 1 is off or on. NO
status = Off On
Enables the fault associated to the Ethernet/IP connector 1.
G21.3.8 Fault mode Fault
OPT. FUNCTION YES
c1 = Fault Ignore
Fault If the timeout is overcome, fault F60:Lost CIP c1 comms will be triggered.
Ignore Fault F60 will not be triggered.
G21.3.9 Connector 2 Off
Read-only parameter, shows whether the Ethernet/IP connector 2 is off or on. NO
status = Off On
Enables the fault associated to the Ethernet/IP connector 1.
G21.3.10 Fault mode Fault
OPT. FUNCTION YES
c2 = Fault Ignore
Fault If the timeout is overcome, fault F112:Lost CIP c2 comms will be triggered.
Ignore Fault F112 will not be triggered.

Subgroup 21.4: Profinet

Grupo 21.4.1: ProfiNET Net

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Sets the IP address of the equipment in the user local network. This address must be provided
G21.4.1.1 IP address by the local network administrator.
0 to 255 NO
= 192.168.1.143 Format of the IP address is: A.B.C.D.
To configure the address, enter a value in each of the four parameters that compose it.
Sets the subnet mask address of the equipment in the user local network. This address must be
G21.4.1.2 Subnet provided by the local network administrator.
0 to 255 NO
Mask = 255.255.255.0 Format of the subnet mask is: A.B.C.D.
To configure the address, enter a value in each of the four parameters that compose it.
Sets the gateway address of the equipment in the user local network. This address must be
G21.4.1.3 Gateway = provided by the local network administrator.
0 to 255 NO
0.0.0.0 Format of the gateway address is: A.B.C.D.
To configure the address, enter a value in each of the four parameters that compose it.
Sets the MAC address. This address must be unique and exclusive and depends on the LAN
G21.4.1.4 MAC board. This address must be provided by Power Electronics.
0x00 to 0xFF NO
address= A.B.C.D.E.F Format of the MAC address is: A.B.C.D.E. F.
To configure the address, enter a value in each of the six parameters that compose it.

Subgroup 21.4.2: Master's input

Subgroup 21.4.2.1: Addresses

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Custom modbus
addr1: 0
Custom modbus See “Subgroup 20.6: Custom Modbus address”.
addr2: 0
0 to 65535 YES
Note: If these values are modified, the configuration of G20.6, G20.7, G21.3.2, G21.3.3 and
… G21.4.3 will change.

Custom modbus
addr16: 0

84 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Subgroup 21.4.2.2: Values

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Custom modbus
val1: 0
Custom modbus See “Subgroup 20.7: Custom Modbus values”.
val2: 0
0 to 65535 YES
Note: If these values are modified, the configuration of G20.6, G20.7, G21.3.2, G21.3.3 and
… G21.4.3 will change.

Custom modbus
val16: 0

Subgroup 21.4.3: Master's output

Subgroup 21.4.3.1: Addresses

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Custom modbus
addr17: 0
EN
Custom modbus See “Subgroup 20.6: Custom Modbus address”.
addr18: 0
0 to 65535 YES
Note: If these values are modified, the configuration of G20.6, G20.7, G21.3.2, G21.3.3 and
… G21.4.2 will change.

Custom modbus
addr32: 0

Subgroup 21.4.3.2: Values

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Custom modbus
val17: 0
Custom modbus See “Subgroup 20.7: Custom Modbus values”.
val18: 0
0 to 65535 YES
Note: If these values are modified, the configuration of G20.6, G20.7, G21.3.2, G21.3.3 and
… G21.4.2 will change.

Custom modbus
val32: 0

Others

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
G21.4.4 Connector 1 Off Read-only parameter, shows whether connector 1 of the Profinet board is off or on.
NO
status = Off On
Enables the fault associated to the Profinet connector 1.
G21.4.5 Fault mode Fault
OPT. FUNCTION YES
c1 = Fault Ignore
Fault If the timeout is overcome, fault F110:Lost PNET c1 comms will be triggered.
Ignore Fault F110 will not be triggered.
G21.4.6 Connector 2 Off
Read-only parameter, shows whether connector 2 of the Profinet board is off or on. NO
status = Off On
Enables the fault associated to the Profinet connector 2.
G21.4.7 Fault mode Fault
OPT. FUNCTION YES
c2 = Fault Ignore
Fault If the timeout is overcome, fault F111:Lost PNET c2 comms will be triggered.
Ignore Fault F111 will not be triggered.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 85

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Group 23: Expansion

Subgroup 23.2: Input/Output
This group shows the status of the inputs and outputs expansion boards and allows setting the led in
test mode (fast blinking).

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Shows the status of the digital inputs and outputs expansion board A.

G23.2.1 IO digital A Off OPT. FUNCTION

NO
status = Off On Off The board is not connected.
On The board is connected

Enables led fast blinking. This is useful to help locate the board when several boards of the same
G23.2.2 IO digital A No
type are connected. NO
test = No Yes
Note: this parameter only appears if the I/O expansion board A has been connected.
Shows the status of the digital inputs and outputs expansion board B.

G23.2.3 IO digital B Off OPT. FUNCTION

NO
status = Off On Off The board is not connected.
On The board is connected

Enables led fast blinking. This is useful to help locate the board when several boards of the same
G23.2.4 IO digital B No
type are connected. NO
test = No Yes
Note: this parameter only appears if the I/O expansion board B has been connected.
G23.2.5 IO analog A Off
NO
status = Off On
G23.2.6 IO analog A No
NO
test = No Yes These four parameters are similar to G23.2.1, G23.2.2, G23.3.3 and G23.3.4 respectively, but
G23.2.7 IO analog B Off for the analogue inputs and outputs expansion boards.
NO
status = Off On
G23.2.8 IO analog B No
NO
test = No Yes

Subgroup 23.3: Communications

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Shows the status of the Profinet board.

G23.3.1 Profinet Off OPT. FUNCTION

NO
board status = Off On Off The board is not connected.
On The board is connected

Enables the LED fast blinking. This is useful to locate the board in case several boards of the
G23.3.2 Profinet No
same type are connected. NO
board test = No Yes
Note: This parameter will only appear if a Profinet board has been connected.
Allows defining the behavior of the drive in case communication with the Profinet board is lost.

Off OPT. FUNCTION

G23.3.3 Profinet Com
Warning Off Drive will remain operating normally. NO
Error = Fault
Fault Warning Warning “W48:Profinet expansion” will be triggered.
Fault Fault “F108:Expansion Profinet comm” will be triggered and the drive will
stop.
Shows the status of the Ethernet/IP board.
G23.3.4 EthernetIP Off
OPT. FUNCTION NO
board state = Off On
Off The board is not connected.
On The board is connected
Enables the LED fast blinking. This is useful to locate the board in case several boards of the
G23.3.5 EthernetIP No
same type are connected. NO
board test = No Yes
Note: This parameter will only appear if an Ethernet/IP board has been connected.

86 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Allows defining the behavior of the drive in case communication with the Ethernet/IP board is
lost.
Off
G23.3.6 EthernetIP
Warning OPT. FUNCTION NO
Com Error = Fault
Fault Off Drive will remain operating normally.
Warning Warning “W49:EthernetIP” expansion will be triggered.
Fault Fault “F109:Exp EthernetIP comm” will be triggered and the drive will stop.
Shows the status of the Profibus board.
G23.3.7 Profibus Off
OPT. FUNCTION NO
board status = Off On
Off The board is not connected.
On The board is connected
Enables the LED fast blinking. This is useful to locate the board in case several boards of the
G23.3.8 Profibus No
same type are connected. NO
board test = No Yes
Note: This parameter will only appear if a Profibus board has been connected.
Allows defining the behavior of the drive in case communication with the Profibus board is lost.

Off OPT. FUNCTION

G23.3.9 Profibus
Warning Off Drive will remain operating normally.
Com Error = Fault
Fault Warning Warning “W37:Profibus expansion” expansion will be triggered.
Fault Fault “F72:Expansion Profibus comm” will be triggered and the drive will
stop. EN

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 87

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Group 25: Master / Slave

This group will appear when parameter [G1.9] is enabled.

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN

FUNC. DESCRIPTION
Master
G25.1 Role = Master
Slave
Master Equipment will work as master. NO
Slave Equipment works as slave, taking commands from the master.

If the drive is configured in slave mode and fiber optics communication, equipment will be able to
start directly with command from the master or not, depending on the setting of this parameter.
No
G25.2 Start fiber = No YES
Yes FUNC. DESCRIPTION
No The slave needs an additional command to the master’s command.
Yes The slave will start with the master’s command.

When this option is enabled in the drive master and the system is operating in closed loop mode,
G25.3 Fault partner = No
the master will stop and show “F95 SLAVE” if one or more slaves are in fault. Otherwise, master YES
Yes Yes
will continue working.
G25.4 Stop partner Spin In this option, whenever for any reason the master goes into fault status, all slaves automatically
YES
fault = Spin Ramp stop during a stop in spin or ramp.
G25.5 Restart after No When one of the equipment in the system fails, if all others keep on operating, once the fault is
YES
reset = No Yes reset the equipment will start automatically or not depending on the setting of this parameter.
Selects open loop and closed loop modes. Besides, for closed loop mood, it allows stablishing the
maximum slave response time. If the master does not receive an answer before this time elapses,
it will trigger fault “F93 Timeout FO”.
OPT FUNCTION
G25.6 Time out fiber 0.1 to 10 s, OFF Closed loop off. YES
= 1.0 s Off 0.100s Closed loop enabled 0.1s
9.990s Slave response time exceeded.

Option “listener” slave is available in mode “open loop”. The slave will keep on receiving bus
communications but will not act.

Group 26: Fans

Set on
Screen Range Function
RUN
Selects fans mode operation.

OPT. FUNCTION
Off Off Fans are deactivated.
G26.1 Fans mode = Auto Temperature mode. Fans speed reference is defined by the slope
Auto YES
Run Fixed generated from parameters G26.2 to G26.3.
Run Fixed Fans will start at the moment they get power supply.
Fans are connected with the start command and disconnect three minutes
Run
after the equipment has stopped.

G26.2 Min 35ºC to G26.3 Defines the temperature to deactivate fans while they are operating. Available if [G26.1 =
YES
temperature = 47 ºC Max temperature Auto].
G26.2 Min
G26.3 Max
temperature to Defines the temperature to activate fans. Available if [G26.1 = Auto]. YES
temperature = 51 ºC
80ºC
G26.4 Power off In run mode, time to turn off fans from the moment when the run command disappears.
1 to 5 YES
delay = 1 min Available if [G26.1 = Run].

88 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

 POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

6. MODBUS COMMUNICATION
6
Supported Modbus Function Codes
Serial communications protocol implemented by SD750 drives adheres to Modbus Industrial standard
communications protocol of Modicon. From all the functions that exist in the Modbus protocol, the drive
uses the Reading and Writing functions:

Function Description Registers Number

3 Registers Reading 120
16 Registers Writing 120

The implementation of these function codes in the drive allows reading up to 120 registers from a
EN
Parameters Group in a single frame. In case of requiring accessing consecutive memory registers, but
which belong to different groups, user will need to use as many frames as groups are involved.

Modbus Function Code Nº 3: Registers Reading

This function code allows the Modbus controller (master) to read the content of the data registers
indicated in the drive (slave). This function code only admits unicast addressing. Broadcast or
groupcast addressing are not possible with this function code.

The implementation of this function code in the drive allows reading up to 120 registers of the drive
with consecutive addresses in a single frame.

Next, a frame is shown where the master attempts to read the content of 3 registers of a drive where
the current used by each phase is. The information that should be attached in the ask frame is the
following:

Data address of the drive.

Modbus function code (3 Registers reading).
Starting Data address.
Registers number for reading.
CRC-16 code.

The answer of the drive (slave) should contain the following fields:

Data address of the slave.

Modbus function code (3 Registers reading).
Bytes number for reading.
Bytes number / 2 registers.
CRC-16 code.

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 89
SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Each register consists of 2 bytes (2x8bits=16 bits). This is the default length of all the registers that
form the SD750.

Example: Modbus Function Code Nº 3 (Registers Reading)

Suppose we want to read the motor current (nameplate data) via communications. This data
corresponds to the parameter [G2.1 = 00.0A]. The frame that should be transmitted is:

Modbus Modbus Function Starting Data

Registers Number CRC-16
Address Code Address (40282)
0x0A 0x03 0x0119 0x0001 0x2493

Suppose that instantaneous current of the equipment is 8,2 A. (Modbus value 82 decimal = 0x52
Hexadecimal). The answer of the slave would be:

Modbus Modbus Function Starting Data

Registers Number CRC-16
Address Code Address (40282)
0x0A 0x03 0x02 0x0052 0x9C78

Modbus Function Code Nº 16: Registers Writing

This function code allows the Modbus controller (master) to write the content of the data registers
indicated in the drive (slave), whenever they are not Read Only registers. Registers writing by the
master does not impede the later modification of those registers by the slave.

The implementation of this function code in the drive allows writing up to 5 registers of the drive in a
single frame.

Next, a frame is shown where the master attempts to write the content of one register that stores the
acceleration time. The information that should be attached in the request frame is the following:

• Data address of the slave.

• Modbus function code (16 Registers writing).
• Starting Data Address.
• Registers number for writing.
• Bytes number for writing.
• Content of registers for writing.
• CRC-16 code.

The answer of the slaves includes:

• Data address of the slave.

• Modbus function code (16 Registers writing).
• Starting Data Address.
• Written registers number.
• CRC-16 code.

90 MODBUS COMMUNICATION
POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Addressing Modes
Broadcast Addressing Mode
Broadcast addressing mode allows the master to access at the same time all the slaves connected to
the Modbus network. The Modbus function code that admits this global addressing mode is:

Function Description
16 Registers Writing

To access all devices connected to a Modbus network, use the address 0. When this address is used,
all the slaves in the Modbus network will execute the required task but they do not prepare any answer.

Remote Control Functions

HOST START CONTROL
Screen
Range
-
0–1
EN
Modbus address 43586
Modbus range 0 to 1
Read / Write YES
Description Allows sending the start command to the equipment through communications network.

HOST STOP CONTROL

Screen -
Range 0–1
Modbus address 43587
Modbus range 0 to 1
Read / Write YES
Description Allows sending the stop command to the equipment through communications network.

HOST RESET CONTROL

Screen -
Range 0–1
Modbus address 43588
Modbus range 0 to 1
Read / Write YES
Allows sending the reset command to the equipment through communications
Description
network.

HOST TRIP CONTROL

Screen -
Range 0–1
Modbus address 43589
Modbus range 0 to 1
Read / Write YES
Description Allows the equipment to generate a fault through communications network.

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 91
SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

HOST COMMS CONTROL

Screen -
Range -25000 to +25000
Modbus address 43570
Modbus range -25000 to +25000
Read / Write YES
Description Allows the assignment of the speed reference through communications network.

Summary of Modbus Addresses

Modbus Register ‘COMMS STATUS’
This register supplies information about the communication status of the drive, as shown in the
following table:

Modbus
Bit Description Meaning on ‘0’ Meaning on ‘1’
Address

0 RUN Drive stopped Drive running

1 FAULT No Fault Fault

2 WARNING No Warning At least one warning present

The drive is not ready to start The drive is ready to start (no
3 READY
(a fault or warning is present) faults and no warnings)
The drive is powered through The drive is powered through
4 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY
internal power supply external power supply

5 DELAYING START Not delaying start Delaying start

Motor overload warning Motor overload warning

6 MOTOR OVERLOAD
(MOL) is not active (MOL) is active
Motor overload fault (F25) is Motor overload fault (F25) is
7 MOTOR OVERLOAD FAULT
not present present
43585
8 RESERVED Reserved Reserved

Motor speed is different to the Motor speed has reached the

9 DRIVE AT SET SPEED
reference speed value set as reference
Current limitation warning Current limitation warning
10 CURRENT LIMIT
(ILT) is not present (ILT) is present
Voltage limitation warning Voltage limitation warning
11 VOLTAGE LIMIT
(VLT) is not present (VLT) is present
Torque limitation warning Torque limitation warning
12 TORQUE LIMIT
(TLT) is not present (TLT) is present

13 COMPARATOR 1 Comparator 1 is ‘OFF’ Comparator 1 is ‘ON’

14 COMPARATOR 2 Comparator 2 is ‘OFF’ Comparator 2 is ‘ON’

15 COMPARATOR 3 Comparator 3 is ‘OFF’ Comparator 3 is ‘ON’

92 MODBUS COMMUNICATION
POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Programming Parameters
Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]
No
Partial lock
G1.1 Lock parameters = No 40011 0 to 3 RW
Total lock
Display lock
G1.1a Lock password = 0 40012 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 RW
G1.1b Unlock password recov. = 0 40013 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 RO
Spanish
G1.2 Language = Spanish 40014 0 to 1 RW
English
No init
User parameters
G1.3 Initialize = No init 40015 0 to 3 RW
Motor parameters
All parameters
No
G1.4 Short menu = No 40016 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Standard,
G1.5 Activate programs = Standard 40017 0 to 8 RW
1 to 8
G1.6 Service group password = 0 40018 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 RW

G1.7 Network synchronization= 0 40019

No
Yes
0 to 1 RW EN
Disable
G1.9 Master/slave config = Disable 40021 0 to 1 RW
Enable
G2.1 Motor plate current = 1.0In A 40031 0.2In to 1.5In 2000 to 15000 RW
G2.2 Motor plate voltage = 0 V 40032 0 to 700 V 0 to 700 RW
G2.3 Motor plate power =Pn 40033 0.0 to 6500.0 kW 0 to 65000 RW
G2.4 Motor plate rpm = 1485 rpm 40034 0 to 24000 rpm 0 to 24000 RW
G2.5 Motor plate phi cosine = 0.85 40035 0.01 to 0.99 1 to 99 RW
G2.6 Motor plate frequency = 50 Hz 40036 0 to 599 Hz 0 to 599 RW
50% to 100%,
G2.7 Motor cooling = 63 % 40037 5000 to 10100 RW
Off
None 0
Analog Input 1 1
Analog Input 2 2
Analog Input 1+2 3
G3.1 Speed ref 1 source = Local 40051 RW
Local 5
Multireferences 6
Motorized potentiometer 7
PID 8
Analog Input 3 9
Communications 10
Fiber 11
PowerPLC 12
G3.2 Speed ref 2 source = Local 40052 Analog Input 4 13 RW
Analog Input 5 14
Analog Input 6 15
Analog Input 7 16
EthernetIP 17
Speed local reference =
G3.3 40053 -250.0 to 250.0 -25000 to 25000 RW
100.0 %
None 0
Analog Input 1 1
Analog Input 2 2
Analog Input 1+2 3
G3.4 Torque ref 1 source = Local 40054 Local 5 RW
Multireferences 6
Motorized potentiometer 7
PID 8
Analog Input 3 9
Communications 10
Fiber 11
PowerPLC 12
G3.5 Torque ref 2 source = Local 40055 Analog Input 4 13 RW
Analog Input 5 14
Analog Input 6 15
Analog Input 7 16
EthernetIP 17

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 93
SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

Torque local reference = 100.0
G3.6 40056 -250.0 to 250.0 % -25000 to 25000 R/W
%
None 0
G4.1.1 Main control mode = Local 40071 Local 1 RW
Remote 2
Communications 3
Fiber 4
G4.1.2 Alternative ctrl mode = Remote 40072 PowerPLC 5 RW
EthernetIP 6
No
G4.1.3 Allow local reset = Yes 40073 0 to 1 RW
Yes
All programmable 1
Mref 2 wires 2
Digital input mode = All
G4.1.4 40074 Mref 3 wires 3 RW
programmable
Motorized potentiometer 4
Resettable potentiometer 5
Not used 00
Start (NO) 01
G4.1.5 Digital Input 1 = Start / Stop 40075 Stop 1 (NC) 02 RW
Stop 2 / Reset 03
Stop 1 / Reset 04
Start / Stop 05
Start / Reset / Stop 06
G4.1.6 Digital Input 2 = Reference 2 40076 Reset (NC) 07 RW
Start + Inch 1 08
Start + Inch 2 09
Invert speed 10
Invert inches 13
G4.1.7 Digital Input 3 = Control 2 40077 Acc / Dec 2 14 RW
Reference 2 15
Control 2 17
Start / Stop / Reset 18
Stop 2 (NC) 19
G4.1.8 Digital Input 4 = Reset (NC) 40078 Speed limit 2 20 RW
Start mode 2 22
Current limit 2 23
External emergency 24
Freemaq Fault 25
G4.1.9 Digital Input 5 = Not used 40079 Start/Stop + Inv 27 RW
LCL Regenerative fb 28
PTC 29
Speed / Torque 32
Output 1 Feedback 33
Output 2 Feedback 34
G4.1.10 Digital Input 6/PTC = Not used 40080 RW
Output 3 Feedback 35
Universal Stop 41
Torque limit 2 48
Not used 0
Start (NO) 1
G4.1.11 Digital Input 7 = Not used 40081 RW
Stop 1 (NC) 2
Stop 2 / Reset 3
Stop 1 / Reset 4
Start / Stop 5
G4.1.12 Digital Input 8 = Not used 40082 RW
Start / Reset / Stop 6
Reset (NC) 7
Start + Inch 1 8
Start + Inch 2 9
G4.1.13 Digital Input 9 = Not used 40083 RW
Invert speed 10
Invert inches 13
Acc / Dec 2 14
Reference 2 15
G4.1.14 Digital Input 10 = Not used 40084 RW
Control 2 17
Start / Stop / Reset 18
Stop 2 (NC) 19
Speed limit 2 20
G4.1.15 Digital Input 11 = Not used 40085 RW
Start mode 2 22
Current limit 2 23
External emergency 24
Freemaq Fault 25
G4.1.16 Digital Input 12 = Not used 40086 RW
Start/Stop + Inv 27
LCL Regenerative fb 28

94 MODBUS COMMUNICATION
POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

PTC 29
Speed / Torque 32
G4.1.17 Digital Input 13 = Not used 40087 RW
Output 1 Feedback 33
Output 2 Feedback 34
Output 3 Feedback 35
Output 4 Feedback 36
G4.1.18 Digital Input 14 = Not used 40088 RW
Output 5 Feedback 37
Output 6 Feedback 38
Output 7 Feedback 39
Output 8 Feedback 40
G4.1.19 Digital Input 15 = Not used 40089 RW
Universal Stop 41
Output 9 Feedback 43
Output 10 Feedback 44
Output 11 Feedback 45
G4.1.20 Digital Input 16 = Not used 40090 Output 12 Feedback 46 RW
Output 13 Feedback 47
Torque limit 2 48
G4.1.27 Feedback Error Timeout = 1.0s 40100 0.5 to 60.0s 5 to 600 RW
G4.1.28 Invert Input mode = 0 41272 0 to 4095 0 to 4095 RW
No
G4.2.1 Enable sensor = No 40101 0 to 1 RW
Yes
%
l/s
00
01
EN
m3/s 02
l/m 03
m3/m 04
l/h 05
m3/h 06
m/s 07
m/m 08
G4.2.2 Sensor unit = l/s 40102 m/h 09 RW
bar 10
kPa 11
psi 12
m 13
ºC 14
ºF 15
K 16
Hz 17
rpm 18
V
G4.2.3 AI1 Format = V 40103 0 to 1 RW
mA
AI1 low level = 0.0 Variable -10.0V to G4.2.6 -100 to G4.2.6
G4.2.4 40104 RW
(G4.2.3-EA1 Format) +0.0mA to G4.2.6 0 to G4.2.6
Sensor low level = 0.0 Variable
G4.2.5 40105 -3200.0 to G4.2.7 Eng. Units -32000 to G4.2.7 RW
(G4.2.2-Sensor unit)
AI1 high level = 10.0 Variable G4.2.4 to +10V G4.2.4 to +10V
G4.2.6 40106 RW
(G4.2.3-EA1 Format) G4.2.4 to +20mA G4.2.4 to +20mA
Sensor low level = 10.0
G4.2.7 40107 G4.2.5 to 3200.0 Eng. Units. G4.2.5 to 32000 RW
Variable (G4.2.2-Sensor unit)
G4.2.8 AI1 Ref speed min = 0.0 % 40108 -250.0 to G4.2.9 -25000 to G4.2.9 RW
G4.2.9 AI1 Ref speed max = 100.0 % 40109 G4.2.8 to 250.0% G4.2.8 to 25000 RW
Sensor min value = 0.0 -3200.0 to G4.2.12 Eng.
G4.2.10 40110 -32000 to G4.2.12 RW
Variable (G4.2.2-Sensor unit) Units.
G4.2.11 Open loop min speed
G4.2.11 40111 -250.0 to 250.0% -25000 to 25000 RW
= 0.0 %
Open loop min speed = 10.0
G4.2.12 40112 G4.2.10 to 3200.0 Eng. Units. G4.2.10 to 32000 RW
Variable (G4.2.2-Sensor unit)
Open loop max speed =
G4.2.13 40113 -250.0 to 250.0% -25000 to 25000 RW
100.0 %
No
G4.2.14 AI1 loss protection = No 40114 0 to 1 RW
Yes
G4.2.15 AI1 zero band filter = Off 40115 Off = 0.0; 0.1% to 2.0% 0 to 200 RW
G4.2.16 AI1 stabilizer filter = Off 40116 Off = 0.0; 0.1 to 20.0s 0 to 200 RW
No
G4.3.0 Enable Pulse Input Mode = No 40120 0 to 1 RW
Yes
No
G4.3.1 Enable sensor = No 40121 0 to 1 RW
Yes
G4.3.2 Sensor unit = Bar 40122 See G4.2.2 0 to 18 RW

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 95
SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

% 00
l/s 01
m3/s 02
l/m 03
m3/m 04
G4.3.2 Sensor unit Pulse Input = l/s 40841 RW
l/h 05
m3/h 06
m/s 07
m/m 08
m/h 09
G4.3.2b Pulses per unit = 100 40842 1 to G4.3.2c 1 to G4.3.2c RW
G4.3.2c Max pulses = 1000 40843 1 to 32000 1 to 32000 RW
V
G4.3.3 AI2 Format = mA 40123 0 to 1 RW
mA
AI2 low level = 4.0 Variable -10.0V to G4.3.6 -100 to G4.3.6
G4.3.4 40124 RW
(G4.3.3 AI2 Format) +0.0mA to G4.3. +0 to G4.3.6
Sensor low level = 0 Variable
G4.3.5 40125 -3200.0 to G4.3.7 -32000 to G4.3.7 RW
(G4.3.2 Sensor unit)
AI2 high level = 20.0Variable G4.3.4 to +10V G4.3.4 to +10V
G4.3.6 40126 RW
(G4.3.3 AI2 Format) G4.3.4 to +20mA G4.3.4 to +20mA
Sensor high level = 10.0
G4.3.7 40127 G4.3.5 to 3200.0 G4.3.5 to 32000 RW
Variable (G4.3.2 Sensor unit)
G4.3.8 AI2 Ref speed min = 0.0 % 40128 -250.0% to G4.3.9 -25000 to G4.3.9 RW
G4.3.9 AI2 Ref speed max = 100.0 % 40129 G4.3.8 to 250.0% G4.3.8 to 25000 RW
Sensor low level = 0.0 Variable
G4.3.10 40130 -3200.0 to G4.3.12 -32000 to G4.3.12 RW
(G4.3.2 Sensor unit)
G4.3.11 Open loop min speed = 0.0 % 40131 -250.0 to 250.0% -25000 to 25000 RW
Sensor high level = 10.0
G4.3.12 40132 G4.3.10 to 3200.0 G4.3.10 to 32000 RW
Variable (G4.3.2 Sensor unit)
Open loop max speed = 100.0
G4.3.13 40133 -250.0 to 250.0% -25000 to 25000 RW
%
No
G4.3.14 AI2 loss protection = No 40134 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Off = 0.0
G4.3.15 AI2 zero band filter = Off 40135 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 2.0%
Off = 0.0
G4.3.16 AI2 stabilizer filter = Off 40136 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 20.0 s
No
G4.4.0 PT100 Mode = No 40157 0 to 1 RW
Yes
No
G4.4.1 Enable sensor = No 40141 0 to 1 RW
Yes
G4.4.2 Sensor unit = l/s 40142 See G4.3.2 0 to 18 RW
V
G4.4.3 AI3 Format = V 40143 0 to 1 RW
mA
-10.0V to G4.4.6 -100 to G4.4.6
G4.4.4 AI3 low level = 0.0 V 40144 RW
+0mA to G4.4.6 +0 to G4.4.6
Sensor low level = 0.0 Variable
G4.4.5 40145 -3200.0 to G4.4.7 -32000 to G4.4.7 RW
(G4.4.2 Sensor Unit)
G4.4.4 to +20.0V G4.4.4 to +200
G4.4.6 AI3 high level = 10.0V 40146 RW
G4.4.4 to +20mA G4.4.4 to +20
Sensor high level = 10.0
G4.4.7 40147 G4.4.5 to 3200.0 G4.4.5 to 32000 RW
Variable (G4.4.2 Sensor unit)
G4.4.8 AI3 Ref speed min = 0.0 % 40148 -250.0 to G4.4.9 -25000 to G4.4.9 RW
G4.4.9 AI3 Ref speed max = 100.0 % 40149 G4.4.8 to 250.0 G4.4.8 to 25000 RW
Sensor min value = 0.0
G4.4.10 40150 -3200.0 to G4.4.12 -32000 to G4.4.12 RW
Variable (G4.4.2 Sensor unit)
G4.4.11 Open loop min speed = 0.0 % 40151 -250.0 to 250.0% -25000 to 25000 RW
G4.4.12 Sensor max value = 10.0V 40152 G4.4.10 to 3200.0 G4.4.10 to 32000 RW
Open loop max speed =
G4.4.13 40153 -250.0 to 250.0% -25000 to 25000 RW
100.0 %
No
G4.4.14 AI3 loss protection = No 40154 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Off = 0.0,
G4.4.15 AI3 zero band filter = Off 40155 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 2.00%
Off = 0.0,
G4.4.16 AI3 stabilizer filter = Off 40156 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 20.0s

96 MODBUS COMMUNICATION
POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

No
G4.5.1 Enable sensor = No 40831 0 to 1 RW
Yes
G4.5.2 Sensor unit = l/s 40832 See G4.3.2 0 to 18 RW
V
G4.5.3 AI4 format = V 40833 0 to 1 RW
mA
-10.0V to G4.5.6 -10000V to G4.5.6
G4.5.4 AI4 low level = 0.0 V 40834 RW
+0mA to G4.5.6 +0mA to G4.5.6
G4.5.5 Sensor low level = 0.0 l/s 40835 -3200.0 to G4.5.7 -32000 to G4.5.7 RW
G4.5.6 AI4 high level = 10.0 V 40836 G4.5.4 to 20.0V G4.5.4 to 20000 RW
G4.5.7 Sensor high level = 10.0 l/s 40837 G4.5.5 to 3200.0 l/s G4.5.5 to 32000 RW
G4.5.8 AI4 Ref speed min = 0.0 % 40838 -250.0 % to G4.5.9 -25000 to G4.5.9 RW
G4.5.9 AI4 Ref speed max = 100.0 % 40839 G4.5.8 to 250.0 % G4.5.8 to 25000 RW
G4.5.10 Sensor min value = 0.0 l/s 40840 -3200.0 l/s to G4.5.12 -32000 to G4.5.12 RW
G4.5.11 Open loop min speed = 0.0 % 40844 -250.0 % to 250.0 % -25000 to 25000 RW
G4.5.12 Sensor max value = 10.0 l/s 40845 G4.5.10 to 3200.0 l/s G4.5.10 to 32000 RW
Open loop max speed =
G4.5.13 40846 -250.0 % to 250.0 % -25000 to 25000 RW
100.0 %
G4.5.14 AI4 loss protection = No 40847
No
Yes
0 to 1 RW EN
Off = 0.0
G4.5.15 AI4 zero band filter = Off 40848 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 2.00 %
Off = 0.0
G4.5.16 AI4 stabilizer filter = Off 40849 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 20.0 s
No
G4.6.1 Enable sensor = No 40864 0 to 1 RW
Yes
G4.6.2 Sensor unit = l/s 40865 See G4.3.2 0 to 18 RW
V=0
G4.6.3 AI5 Format = V 40866 0 to 1 RW
mA = 1
G4.6.4 AI5 low level = 0.0 V 40867 -10.0 V to G4.6.6 -10000 to G4.6.6 RW
G4.6.5 Sensor low level = 0.0 l/s 40868 -3200.0 l/s to G4.6.7 -32000 to G4.6.7 RW
G4.6.6 AI5 high level = 10.0 V 40869 G4.6.4 to 20.0 V G4.6.4 to 20000 RW
G4.6.7 Sensor high level = 10.0 l/s 40870 G4.6.5 to 3200.0 l/s G4.6.5 to 32000 RW
G4.6.8 AI5 Ref speed min = 0.0 % 40871 -250.0 % to G4.6.9 -25000 to G4.6.9 RW
G4.6.9 AI5 Ref speed max = 100.0 % 40872 G4.6.8 to 250.0 % G4.6.8 to 25000 RW
G4.6.10 Sensor min value = 0.0 l/s 40873 -3200.0 l/s to G4.6.12 -32000 to G4.6.12 RW
G4.6.11 Open loop min speed = 0.0 % 40874 -250.0 % to 250.0 % -25000 to 25000 RW
G4.6.12 Sensor max value = 10.0 l/s 40875 G4.6.10 to 3200.0 l/s G4.6.10 to 32000 RW
Open loop max speed =
G4.6.13 40876 -250.0 % to 250.0 % -25000 to 25000 RW
100.0 %
No
G4.6.14 AI5 loss protection = No 40877 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Off = 0.0
G4.6.15 AI5 zero band filter = Off 40878 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 2.00 %
Off = 0.0
G4.6.16 AI5 stabilizer filter = Off 40879 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 20.0 s
No
G4.7.1 Enable sensor = No 40524 0 to 1 RW
Yes
G4.7.2 Sensor unit = l/s 40525 See G4.3.2 0 to 18 RW
V=0
G4.7.3 AI6 Format = V 40526 0 to 1 RW
mA = 1
G4.7.4 AI6 low level = 0.0 V 40527 -10.0 V to G4.7.6 -10000 to G4.7.6 RW
G4.7.5 Sensor low level = 0.0 l/s 40528 -3200.0 l/s to G4.7.7 -32000 to G4.7.7 RW
G4.7.6 AI6 high level = 10.0 V 40529 G4.7.4 to 20.0 V G4.7.4 to 20000 RW
G4.7.7 Sensor high level = 10.0 l/s 40530 G4.7.5 to 3200.0 l/s G4.7.5 to 32000 RW
G4.7.8 AI6 Ref speed min = 0.0 % 40531 -250.0 % to G4.7.9 -25000 to G4.7.9 RW
G4.7.9 AI6 Ref speed max = 100.0 % 40532 G4.7.8 to 250.0 % G4.7.8 to 25000 RW
G4.7.10 Sensor min value = 0.0 l/s 40533 -3200.0 l/s to G4.7.12 -32000 to G4.7.12 RW

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 97
SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

G4.7.11 Open loop min speed = 0.0 % 40534 -250.0 % to 250.0 % -25000 to 25000 RW
G4.7.12 Sensor max value = 10.0 l/s 40535 G4.7.10 to 3200.0 l/s G4.7.10 to 32000 RW
Open loop max speed =
G4.7.13 40536 -250.0 % to 250.0 % -25000 to 25000 RW
100.0 %
No
G4.7.14 AI6 loss protection = No 40537 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Off = 0.0
G4.7.15 AI6 zero band filter = Off 40538 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 2.00 %
Off = 0.0
G4.7.16 AI6 stabilizer filter = Off 40539 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 20.0 s
No
G4.8.1 Enable sensor = No 41405 0 to 1 RW
Yes
G4.8.2 Sensor unit = l/s 41406 See G4.3.2 0 to 18 RW
V=0
G4.8.3 AI7 Format = V 41407 0 to 1 RW
mA = 1
G4.8.4 AI7 low level = 0.0 V 41408 -10.0 V to G4.8.6 -10000 to G4.8.6 RW

G4.8.5 Sensor low level = 0.0 l/s 41409 -3200.0 l/s to G4.8.7 -32000 to G4.8.7 RW

G4.8.6 AI7 high level = 10.0 V 41410 G4.8.4-a 20.0 V G4.8.4 to 20000 RW

G4.8.7 Sensor high level = 10.0 l/s 41411 G4.8.5 to 3200.0 l/s G4.8.5 to 32000 RW
G4.8.8 AI7 Ref speed min = 0.0 % 41412 -250.0 % to G4.8.9 -25000 to G4.8.9 RW
G4.8.9 AI7 Ref speed max = 100.0 % 41413 G4.8.8 to 250.0 % G4.8.8 to 25000 RW

G4.8.10 Sensor min value = 0.0 l/s 41414 -3200.0 l/s to G4.8.12 -32000 to G4.8.12 RW
G4.8.11 Open loop min speed = 0.0 % 41415 -250.0 % to 250.0 % -25000 to 25000 RW
G4.8.12 Sensor max value = 10.0 l/s 41416 G4.8.10 to 3200.0 l/s G4.8.10 to 32000 RW
Open loop max speed =
G4.8.13 41417 -250.0 % to 250.0 % -25000 to 25000 RW
100.0 %
No
G4.8.14 AI7 loss protection = No 41418 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Off = 0.0
G4.8.15 AI7 zero band filter = Off 41419 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 2.00 %
Off = 0.0
G4.8.16 AI7 stabilizer filter = Off 41420 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 20.0 s
G5.1.1 Acceleration rate 1 = 1.50 %/s 40181 0.01 to 650.00 % / s 1 to 65000 RW

G5.1.2 Acceleration rate 2 = 2.00 %/s 40183 0.01 to 650.00 % / s 1 to 65000 RW

Off =0
G5.1.3 Accel break speed = Off 40185 0 to 25000 RW
1 to 250%
G5.1.4 Ramp after V.Deep = 1.50 %/s 40193 0.05 to 650.00 % / s 5 to 65000 RW

G5.2.1 Deceleration rate 1 = 1.50 %/s 40182 0.01 to 650.00 % / s 1 to 65000 RW

G5.2.2 Deceleration rate 2 = 2.00 %/s 40184 0.01 to 650.00 % / s 1 to 65000 RW

Off = 0
G5.2.3 Decel break speed = Off 40186 0 to 25000 RW
1 to 250%
G5.3.1 Mot pot accel rate 1 = 1.00 %/s 40188 0.01 to 650.00 % / s 1 to 65000 RW

G5.3.2 Mot pot decel rate 1 = 3.00 %/s 40189 0.01 to 650.00 % / s 1 to 65000 RW
G5.3.3 Mot pot accel rate 2 = 1.00 %/s 40190 0.01 to 650.00 % / s 1 to 65000 RW
G5.3.4 Mot pot decel rate 2 = 3.00 %/s 40191 0.01 to 650.00 % / s 1 to 65000 RW
G5.3.5 Mot pot rate brk speed = 0 % 40192 0 to 250% 0 to 25000 RW

G5.4 Speed filter = Off 40187 0.0 to 80.0% 0 to 8000 RW

98 MODBUS COMMUNICATION
POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

None 0
Analog Input 1 1
Analog Input 2 2
Analog Input 1+2 3
Multireferences 4
Local 5
Setpoint source = Local PID 6
G6.1 40201 RW
Multireferences Analog Input 3 7
Communications 8
Analog Input 4 9
Analog Input 5 10
Analog Input 6 11
Analog Input 7 12
Ethernet IP 13
Local process setpoint =
G6.2 40202 0.0 to 300.0% 0 to 30000 RW
100.0 %
None 0
Analog Input 1 1
Analog Input 2 2
Analog Input 1+2 3
Analog Input 3 4
Communications 5

G6.3
Feedback source = Analog
Input 2
40203
Motor torque
Absolute torque
Motor current
6
7
8
RW
EN
Motor power 9
Bus voltage 10
Motor cos phi 11
Analog Input 4 12
Analog Input 5 13
Analog Input 6 14
Analog Input 7 15
G6.4 Process Kc = 8.0 40204 0.1 to 20.0 1 to 200 RW
G6.5 Process Ti = 0.1 s 40205 0.0 to 1000s; Infinite 1 to 10001 RW
G6.6 Process Td = 0.0 s 40206 0.0 to 250.0s 0 to 2500 RW
No
G6.7 Invert PID = No 40207 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Off = 0.0
G6.8 Feedback low pass filter = Off 40209 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 20.0 s
G6.9 Process error = 0.0 % 40208 -300.0 to 300.0% -30000 to 30000 RO
Ramp
G7.1.1 Main start mode = Ramp 40224 Spin 0 to 2 RW
Spin2
Ramp
G7.1.2 Alternative start mode = Ramp 40225 Spin 0 to 2 RW
Spin2
Off = 0,
G7.1.3 Start delay = Off 40226 0 to 6500 RW
0.1 to 6500s
Off = 0.000,
G7.1.4 Fine restart delay = Off 40229 0 to 10000 RW
0.001 to 10.000 s
Off = 0,
G7.1.5 Alt restart delay = Off 40232 0 to 65000 RW
0.1 to 6500.0 s
No
G7.1.6 Run on supply loss = Yes 40230 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Ramp
G7.1.7 Start after V.Deep = Spin 40240 0 to 1 RW
Spin
No
G7.1.8 Run after reset = Yes 40233 0 to 1 RW
Yes
G7.1.9 Delay after Reset = 0.001 s 40236 0.001 to 9.999 s 1 to 9999 RW
Off = 0,
G7.1.10 Magnetization time = Off 40235 0 to 9999 RW
0.001 to 9.999 s
Ramp
G7.2.1 Main stop mode = Ramp 40221 0 to 1 RW
Spin
Ramp
G7.2.2 Alternative stop mode = Spin 40222 0 to 1 RW
Spin
Off = 0
G7.2.3 Stop mode switch speed = Off 40223 0 to 25000 RW
1 to 250%
Off = 0,
G7.2.4 Stop delay = Off 40227 0 to 6500 RW
0.1 to 6500s

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 99
SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

No
G7.2.5 Stop at min speed = No 40228 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Off = 0,
G7.2.6 Power off delay = Off 40234 0 to 9999 RW
0.001 to 9.999 s
G7.3.1 Tune = 10 % 40231 0 to 100% 0 to 10000 RW
G7.3.2 Minimum speed = 0.0 % 40982 0.0 to 25.0 % 0 to 250 RW
G7.3.3 Magnetization tim = 1.0 s 40981 1.0 to 25.0 s 10 to 250 RW

G8.1.0.1.1 User fault 1 G1 = Off 40283 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW

G8.1.0.1.2 User fault 2 G1 = Off 40284 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW

G8.1.0.1.3 User fault 3 G1 = Off 40285 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW

G8.1.0.2.1 User fault 1 G2 = Off 40286 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW

G8.1.0.2.2 User fault 2 G2 = Off 40287 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW

G8.1.0.2.3 User fault 3 G2 = Off 40288 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW

G8.1.0.3.1 User fault 1 G3 = Off 40289 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW

G8.1.0.3.2 User fault 2 G3 = Off 40290 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW

G8.1.0.3.3 User fault 3 G3 = Off 40291 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW

Always Off 00
Always ON 01
No faults 02
General fault 03
Start 04
Run 05
Ready 06
Zero speed 07
Set speed 08
Speed direction 09
Speed ref direction 11
Speed limit 13
Current limit 14
Voltage limit 15
Torque limit 16
Comparator 1 17
Comparator 2 18
Comparator 3 19
Acc / Dec 2 20
Reference 2 21
Stop 2 22
Speed limit 2 23
DC brake 24
G8.1.1 Relay 1 source select = Run 40251 Power PLC 28 RW
Communications 29
Crane brake 32
Warnings 34
Copy digital input 1 35
Copy digital input 2 36
Copy digital input 3 37
Copy digital input 4 38
Copy digital input 5 39
Copy digital input 6 40
Copy digital input 7 44
Copy digital input 8 45
Copy digital input 9 46
Copy digital input 10 47
Copy digital input 11 48
Copy digital input 12 49
Copy digital input 13 50
Copy digital input 14 51
User's fault group 1 52
User's fault group 2 53
User's fault group 3 54
Start/Stop delay 56
Copy DI15 57
Copy DI16 58

100 MODBUS COMMUNICATION

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

G8.1.2 Relay 1 ON delay = 0.0 s 40252 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
G8.1.3 Relay 1 OFF delay = 0.0 s 40253 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
No
G8.1.4 Relay 1 inversion = No 40254 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Relay 2 source select = Always
G8.1.5 40255 See 8.1.1 See 8.1.1 RW
OFF
G8.1.6 Relay 2 ON delay = 0.0 s 40256 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
G8.1.7 Relay 2 OFF delay = 0.0 s 40257 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
No
G8.1.8 Relay 2 inversion = No 40258 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Relay 3 source select = Always
G8.1.9 40259 See 8.1.1 See 8.1.1 RW
OFF
G8.1.10 Relay 3 ON delay = 0.0 s 40260 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
G8.1.11 Relay 3 OFF delay = 0.0 s 40261 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
No
G8.1.12 Relay 3 inversion = No 40262 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Relay 4 src select = Always
G8.1.13 40263 See 8.1.1 See 8.1.1 RW
OFF
G8.1.14
G8.1.15
Relay 4 ON delay = 0.0 s
Relay 4 OFF delay = 0.0 s
40264
40265
0.0 to 999.0 s
0.0 to 999.0 s
0 to 9990
0 to 9990
RW
RW
EN
No
G8.1.16 Relay 4 inversion = No 40266 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Relay 5 src select = Always
G8.1.17 40267 See 8.1.1 See 8.1.1 RW
OFF
G8.1.18 Relay 5 ON delay = 0.0 s 40268 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
G8.1.19 Relay 5 OFF delay = 0.0 s 40269 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
No
G8.1.20 Relay 5 inversion = No 40270 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Relay 6 src select = Always
G8.1.21 40271 See 8.1.1 See 8.1.1 RW
OFF
G8.1.22 Relay 6 ON delay = 0.0 s 40272 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
G8.1.23 Relay 6 OFF delay = 0.0 s 40273 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
No
G8.1.24 Relay 6 inversion = No 40274 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Relay 7 src select = Always
G8.1.25 40275 See 8.1.1 See 8.1.1 RW
OFF
G8.1.26 Relay 7 ON delay = 0.0 s 40276 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
G8.1.27 Relay 7 OFF delay = 0.0 s 40277 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
No
G8.1.28 Relay 7 inversion = No 40278 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Relay 8 src select = Always
G8.1.29 40279 See 8.1.1 See 8.1.1 RW
OFF
G8.1.30 Relay 8 ON delay = 0.0 s 40280 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
G8.1.31 Relay 8 OFF delay = 0.0 s 40281 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
No
G8.1.32 Relay 8 inversion = No 40282 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Relay 9 src select = Always
G8.1.33 42581 See 8.1.1 See 8.1.1 RW
OFF
G8.1.34 Relay 9 ON delay = 0.0 s 42582 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
G8.1.35 Relay 9 OFF delay = 0.0 s 42583 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
No
G8.1.36 Relay 9 inversion = No 42584 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Relay 10 src select = Always
G8.1.37 42585 See 8.1.1 See 8.1.1 RW
OFF
G8.1.38 Relay 10 ON delay = 0.0 s 42586 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
G8.1.39 Relay 10 OFF delay = 0.0 s 42587 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
No
G8.1.40 Relay 10 inversion = No 42588 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Relay 11 src select = Always
G8.1.41 42589 See 8.1.1 See 8.1.1 RW
OFF
G8.1.42 Relay 11 ON delay = 0.0 s 42590 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 101

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

G8.1.43 Relay 11 OFF delay = 0.0 s 42591 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
No
G8.1.44 Relay 11 inversion = No 42592 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Relay 12 src select = Always
G8.1.45 42593 See 8.1.1 See 8.1.1 RW
OFF
G8.1.46 Relay 12 ON delay = 0.0 s 42594 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
G8.1.47 Relay 12 OFF delay = 0.0 s 42595 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
NO
G8.1.48 Relay 12 inversion = No 42596 0 to 1 RW
SI
Relay 13 src select = Always
G8.1.49 42597 See 8.1.1 See 8.1.1 RW
OFF
G8.1.50 Relay 13 ON delay = 0.0 s 42598 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
G8.1.51 Relay 13 OFF delay = 0.0 s 42599 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
No
G8.1.52 Relay 13 inversion = No 42600 0 to 1 RW
Yes
G8.1.53 Speed for crane brake = 0.00 % 40300 0.00 to 100.00% 0 to 10000 RW
None 00
Motor speed 01
Motor current 02
Motor voltage 03
Motor power 04
Motor torque 05
Motor cos phi 06
Motor temperature 07
Motor frequency 08
Input voltage 09
Bus voltage 10
Drive temperature 11
Speed reference 12
PID reference 14
AO1 source selection = Motor PID feedback 15
G8.2.1 40301 RW
speed PID error 16
Analog Input 1 17
Analog Input 2 18
Analog Input 3 19
Max scale 21
Absolute speed 22
Absolute torque 23
Analog Input 1+2 24
PID output 25
Encoder speed 26
PowerPLC 28
Analog Input 4 29
Analog Input 5 30
Analog Input 6 31
Analog Input 7 32
0-10V
±10V
G8.2.2 AO1 format = 4..20 mA 40302 0-20mA 0 to 4 RW
4-20mA
±20mA
G8.2.3 AO1 low level = 0 % 40304 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
G8.2.4 AO1 high level = 100 % 40305 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
G8.2.5 AO1 filter = Off 40306 Off= 0.0 to 20.0s 0 to 200 RW
No
G8.3.0 Enable Pulse Mode = No 40327 0 to 1 RW
Yes
AO2 source selection = Motor
G8.3.1 40311 See G8.2.1 See G8.2.1 RW
current
0-10V
±10V
G8.3.2 AO2 format = 4..20 mA 40312 0-20mA 0 to 4 RW
4-20mA
±20mA
G8.3.3 AO2 low level = 0 % 40314 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
G8.3.4 AO2 high level = 100 % 40315 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
Off=0
G8.3.5 AO2 filter = Off 40316 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 20.0 s

102 MODBUS COMMUNICATION

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

G8.3.6 Max pulse number = 100 40318 0 to 32000 0 to 32000 RW
G8.3.7 Pulse duty = 50 % 40319 20 to 65 20 to 65 RW
AO3 source selection = Motor
G8.4.1 40321 See G8.2.1 See G8.2.1 RW
speed
0-10V
±10V
G8.4.2 AO3 format = 4..20 mA 40322 0-20mA 0 to 4 RW
4-20mA
±20mA
G8.4.3 G8.4.3 AO3 low level = 0 % 40324 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
G8.4.4 G8.4.4 AO3 high level = 100 % 40325 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
Off=0
G8.4.5 AO3 filter = Off 40326 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 20.0 s
AO4 source selection = Motor
G8.5.1 41231 See G8.2.1 See G8.2.1 RW
speed
G8.5.2 AO4 format = 4..20 mA 41232 See G8.4.2 0 to 4 RW
G8.5.3 Low level SA4 = 0 % 41234 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
G8.5.4 High level SA4 = 100 % 41235 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW

G8.5.5 AO4 filter = Off 41236

Off=0
0.1 to 20.0 s
0 to 200 RW EN
AO5 source selection = Motor
G8.6.1 40895 See G8.2.1 See G8.2.1 RW
speed
G8.6.2 AO5 format = 4..20 mA 40896 See G8.4.2 0 to 4 RW
G8.6.3 AO5 low level = 0 % 40898 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
G8.6.4 AO5 high level = 100 % 40899 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
Off=0
G8.6.5 AO5 filter = Off 40900 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 20.0 s
AO6 source selection = Motor
G8.7.1 40935 See G8.2.1 See G8.2.1 RW
speed
G8.7.2 AO6 format = 4..20 mA 40936 See G8.4.2 0 to 4 RW
G8.7.3 AO6 low level = 0 % 40938 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
G8.7.4 AO6 high level = 100 % 40939 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
Off=0
G8.7.5 AO6 filter = Off 40940 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 20.0 s
None 00
Motor speed 01
Motor current 02
Motor voltage 03
Motor power 04
Motor torque 05
Motor cos phi 06
Motor temperature 07
Motor frequency 08
Input voltage 09
Bus voltage 10
Drive temperature 11
Speed reference 12
PID reference 14
G9.1.1 Comp 1 source sel = None 40341 PID feedback 15 RW
PID error 16
Analog Input 1 17
Analog Input 2 18
Analog Input 3 19
Analog Input 1+2 20
Absolute speed 22
Absolute torque 24
Encoder speed 25
PID output 27
Max scale 28
Analog Input 4 29
Analog Input 5 30
Analog Input 6 31
Analog Input 7 32
Normal
G9.1.2 Comp 1 type = Normal 40342 0 to 1 RW
Ventana

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 103

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

G9.1.3 Comp 1 ON level = 100 % 40343 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
G9.1.4 Comp 1 OFF level = 0 % 40344 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
G9.1.3 Comp 1 window limit 2 = 100 % 40345 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
G9.1.4 Comp 1 window limit 1 = 0 % 40346 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
G9.1.5 Comp 1 ON delay = 0.0 s 40347 0.0 to 999.0s 0 to 9990 RW
G9.1.6 Comp 1 OFF delay = 0.0 s 40348 0.0 to 999.0s 0 to 9990 RW
Not used 00
Start / Stop 01
Stop 1 02
Stop 2 03
Reset 04
Start + Inch 1 05
Comp 1 output function = Not
G9.1.7 40349 Start + Inch 2 06 RW
used
Start + Inch 3 07
Invert speed 08
Acc / Dec 2 09
Reference 2 10
Speed limit 2 11
Fault 12
G9.2.1 Comp 2 source sel = None 40361 See G9.1.1 See G9.1.1 RW
Normal
G9.2.2 Comp 2 type = Normal 40362 0 to 1 RW
Window
Comp 2 ON activation level =
G9.2.3 40363 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
100 %
G9.2.4 Comp 2 OFF level = 0 % 40364 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
G9.2.3 Comp 2 window limit 2 = 100 % 40365 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
G9.2.4 Comp 2 window limit 1 = 0 % 40366 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
G9.2.5 Comp 2 ON delay = 0.0 s 40367 0.0 to 999.0s 0 to 9990 RW
G9.2.6 Comp 2 OFF delay = 0.0 s 40368 0.0 to 999.0s 0 to 9990 RW
Comp 2 output function = Not
G9.2.7 40369 See G9.1.7 See G9.1.7 RW
used
G9.3.1 Comp 3 source sel = None 40381 See G9.1.1 See G9.1.1 RW
Normal
G9.3.2 Comp 3 type = Normal 40382 0 to 1 RW
Window
Comp 3 ON activation level =
G9.3.3 40383 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
100 %
G9.3.4 Comp 3 OFF level = 0 % 40384 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
G9.3.3 Comp 3 window limit 2 = 100 % 40385 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
G9.3.4 Comp 3 window limit 1 = 0 % 40386 -250 to 250% -25000 to 25000 RW
G9.3.5 Comp 3 ON delay = 0.0 s 40387 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
G9.3.6 Comp 3 OFF delay = 0.0 s 40388 0.0 to 999.0 s 0 to 9990 RW
Comp 3 output function = Not
G9.3.7 40389 See G9.1.7 See G9.1.7 RW
used
G10.1.1 Minimum limit 1 = -100.00 % 40401 -250.00 to G10.1.2 -25000 to G10.1.2 RW
G10.1.2 Maximum limit 1 = 100.00 % 40402 G10.1.1 to 250.00 G10.1.1 to 25000 RW
G10.1.3 Minimum limit 2 = -100.00 % 40403 -250.00 to G10.1.4 -25000 to G10.1.4 RW
G10.1.4 Maximum limit 2 = 100.00 % 40404 G10.1.3 to 250.00 G10.1.3 to 25000 RW
0.0 to 60.0s
G10.1.5 Maximum lim timeout = Off 40431 0 to 601 RW
Off = 601
0.0 to 60.0s
G10.1.6 Minimum lim timeout = Off 40450 0 to 601 RW
Off = 601
No
G10.1.7 Invert speed = No 40411 0 to 1 RW
Yes
0.2 to 1.50In,
G10.2.1 Current limit = 1.2In A 40405 2500 to 15010 RW
Off
0 to 60 s;
G10.2.2 I limit timeout = Off 40406 0 to 610 RW
Off = 610
0.2 to 1.50In,
G10.2.3 Current limit 2 = 1.2In A 40407 2500 to 15010 RW
Off

104 MODBUS COMMUNICATION

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

0 to 60 s;
G10.2.4 I limit 2 timeout = Off 40420 0 to 610 RW
Off = 610
Off = 0,
G10.2.5 I limit 2 switch speed = Off 40408 0 to 25000 RW
+1 to +250%
G10.2.6 Torque limit = 150.0 % 40409 0.0 to 250.0 % 0a 25000 RW
0 to 60 s;
G10.2.7 Torque limit timeout = Off 40410 0 to 610 RW
Off = 610
G10.2.8 Torque limit 2 = 150.0 % 40421 0.0 to 250.00 % 0 to 25000 RW
0 to 60 s;
G10.2.9 Torque lim 2 timeout = Off 40422 0 to 610 RW
Off = 610
Off = 0;
G10.2.10 Torque l 2 swt speed = Off 40423 0 to 25000 RW
1 to 250.00 %
Off = 40%·In (motor),
G10.2.11 Regeneration I limit = Off 40417 40.1% to 150%·In to 3999 to 15000 RW
(equipment)
0 To 60s,
G10.2.12 I limit Regen Time = Off 40418 0 to 610 RW
Off
G10.2.13 Reg torque limit = 150.0 % 40413 0.0 to 250.0 % 0 to 25000 RW
0 to 60
G10.2.14 Reg torque limit time = Off 40419 0 to 610 RW
Off = 61
G10.2.15 Disable limit I/T = No 40412
No
Yes
0 to 1 RW EN
G11.1.1 Supply under voltage = SuV 40434 0.85Vn to 0.90Vn - RW
0.0 to 60.9s
G11.1.2 Under voltage timeout = 5.0 s 40435 0 to 601 RW
Off = 60.1
G11.1.3 Supply over voltage = SuV 40436 1.05Vn to 1.10Vn - RW
0.0 to 60.9s
G11.1.4 Over voltage timeout = 5.0 s 40437 0 to 601 RW
Off = 60.1
No faults 0
Faults 1
G11.1.5 Low voltage behavior = Faults 40439 RW
Stop 2
Dip voltage recover 3
G11.1.6 LVRT input threshold = 25 % 43789 15 to 50 % 15 to 50 RW
G11.1.7 LVRT output threshold = 5 % 43790 1 to 15 % 1 to 15 RW
Off
G11.2.1 Stop timeout = Off 40432 0 to 9990 RW
0.1 to 999s
Off,
G11.2.2 Ground current limit = 20 % 40433 0 to 3000 RW
0 to 30% In
0.0 to 10.0s,
G11.2.3 I out asym trip delay = 5.0 s 40451 0 to 101 RW
Off
0.0 to 10.0s,
G11.2.4 V asym out trip delay = 5.0 s 40438 0 to 101 RW
Off
69 = Off,
G11.2.5 PT100 motor fault = Off ºC 40440 69 to 180 RW
70 to 180ºC
G11.2.6 PT100 fault timeout = 30 s 40459 0 to 3000s 0 to 3000 RW
No
G11.2.7 Fault with no load = No 40454 0 to 1 RW
Yes
G11.2.8 Pump overload level = 20.0 A 40441 0.0 to 3000 A 0 to 30000 RW
Off = 0,
G11.2.9 Pump overload filter = Off 40442 0 to 200 RW
0.1 to 20.0s
Off = 0,
G11.2.10 Overload delay = 60 40443 0 to 4800 RW
1 to 480.0s
No
G11.2.11 Pump underload enable = No 40444 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Pump underload current =
G11.2.12 40445 0.2In to 1.5In 2000 to 15000 RW
1.0In A
Pump underload speed =
G11.2.13 40446 0.0 to 250.0% 0 to 25000 RW
100.0 %
G11.2.14 Pump underload flt dly = 10.0 s 40447 0.0 to 999.9 s 0 to 9999 RW
No
G12.1 Enable autoreset = No 40461 0 to 1 RW
Yes
G12.2 Retries max number = 1 40462 1 to 5 1 to 5 RW
G12.3 Autoreset delay = 5 s 40463 5 to 120s 5 to 120 RW
G12.4 Counter reset time = 15 min 40464 1 to 60min 1 to 60 RW

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 105

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

G12.5 Autoreset fault 1 = Off 40465 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 RW
G12.6 Autoreset fault 2 = Off 40466 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 RW
G12.7 Autoreset fault 3 = Off 40467 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 RW
G12.8 Autoreset fault 4 = Off 40468 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 RW
G13.1 Fault Register 1 = 0 40481 0 to 1024 0 to 1024 RO
01/01/2000 00:00 to
G13.1b Date = 01/01/2000 00:00 41531 0 to 65535 RO
31/12/2127 23:59
G13.2 Fault Register 2 = 0 40482 0 to 1024 0 to 1024 RO
01/01/2000 00:00 to
G13.2b Date = 01/01/2000 00:00 41533 0 to 65535 RO
31/12/2127 23:59
G13.3 Fault Register 3 = 0 40483 0 to 1024 0 to 1024 RO
01/01/2000 00:00 to
G13.3b Date = 01/01/2000 00:00 41535 0 to 65535 RO
31/12/2127 23:59
G13.4 Fault Register 4 = 0 40484 0 to 1024 0 to 1024 RO
01/01/2000 00:00 to
G13.4b Date = 01/01/2000 00:00 41537 0 to 65535 RO
31/12/2127 23:59
G13.5 Fault Register 5 = 0 40485 0 to 1024 0 to 1024 RO
01/01/2000 00:00 to
G13.5b Date = 01/01/2000 00:00 41539 0 to 65535 RO
31/12/2127 23:59
G13.6 Fault Register 6 = 0 40486 0 to 1024 0 to 1024 RO
01/01/2000 00:00 to
G13.6b Date = 01/01/2000 00:00 41541 0 to 65535 RO
31/12/2127 23:59
No
G13.7 Erase fault history = No 40487 0 to 1 RW
Yes
G14.1 Multi-reference 1 = 10.00 % 40501 -250.00 to 250.00% -25000 to 25000 RW
G14.2 Multi-reference 2 = 20.00 % 40502 -250.00 to 250.00% -25000 to 25000 RW
G14.3 Multi-reference 3 = 30.00 % 40503 -250.00 to 250.00% -25000 to 25000 RW
G14.4 Multi-reference 4 = 40.00 % 40504 -250.00 to 250.00% -25000 to 25000 RW
G14.5 Multi-reference 5 = 50.00 % 40505 -250.00 to 250.00% -25000 to 25000 RW
G14.6 Multi-reference 6 = 60.00 % 40506 -250.00 to 250.00% -25000 to 25000 RW
G14.7 Multi-reference 7 = 70.00 % 40507 -250.00 to 250.00% -25000 to 25000 RW
G15.1 Inch speed 1 = 0.00 % 40521 -250.00 to 250.00% -25000 to 25000 RW
G15.2 Inch speed 2 = 0.00 % 40522 -250.00 to 250.00% -25000 to 25000 RW
G15.3 Inch speed 3 = 0.00 % 40523 -250.00 to 250.00% -25000 to 25000 RW
G16.1 Skip frequency 1 = 0.00 % 40541 -250.00 % to 250.00 % -25000 to 25000 RW
Off = 0;
G16.2 Skip bandwidth 1 = Off 40542 0 to 2000 RW
0.1 to 20.00 %
G16.3 Skip frequency 2 = 0.00 % 40543 -250.00 % to 250.00 % -25000 to 25000 RW
Off = 0;
G16.4 Skip bandwidth 2 = Off 40544 0 to 2000 RW
0.1 to 20.00 %
G16.5 Skip frequency 3 = 0.00 % 40545 -250.00 % to 250.00 % -25000 to 25000 RW
Off = 0;
G16.6 Skip bandwidth 3 = Off 40546 0 to 2000 RW
0.1 to 20.00 %
G16.7 Skip frequency 4 = 0.00 % 40547 -250.00 % to 250.00 % -25000 to 25000 RW
Off = 0;
G16.8 Skip bandwidth 4 = Off 40548 0 to 2000 RW
0.1 to 20.00 %
Off = 0.0
G17.1 DC brake time = Off 40561 0 to 990 RW
0.1 to 99s
G17.2 DC brake current level = 0 % 40562 0 to 100% 0 to 10000 RW
Off,
G17.3 DC break on delay = Off 40563 0 to 990 RW
0.0 to 99.0s,
Off = 0,
G17.4 Heating current = Off 40564 0 to 3000 RW
0.1 to 30%
No
G17.5 Dynamic brake = No 40565 0 to 1 RW
Yes
No
G18.1 Enable encoder = No 40581 0 to 1 No
Yes
G18.2 Encoder PPR = 1024 PPR 40582 0 to 8191 PPR 0 to 8191 Si

106 MODBUS COMMUNICATION

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

V/Hz 0
G19.1.1 Control type = V/Hz 40601 Vector 1 RW
PMSM 2
PMC Open loop speed 1
PMC Close loop speed 2
PMC Close loop torque 3
Vector control = PMC Open PMC Open loop torque 4
G19.1.1b 40602 RW
loop speed AVC Close loop speed 5
AVC Close loop torque 6
AVC Open loop speed 7
AVC Open loop torque 8
I/Hz 9
G19.1.1c Perm Magnet Sync Mot = I/Hz 40608 RW
F.Oriented 10
No
G19.1.3 PID Vout = No 40604 0 to 1 RW
Yes
No
G19.1.6 Auto Tuning = No 43575 Static 0 to 2 RW
Dynamic
Off = 0.00
G19.1.7 Overmodulation = Off 40607 0 to 10000 RW
0.01 to 100.00 %
No
G19.1.8 Pewave = Yes 40609 0 to 1 RW
Yes
G19.1.9 Switching frequency = 4000 Hz 40618 4000 to 8000 Hz 4000 to 8000 RW EN
G19.2.1 Minimum flux level = 100 % 40611 40 to 130% 4000 to 13000 RW
G19.2.2 Boost voltage = 0.0 % 40612 0.0 to 10.0% 0 to 1000 RW
G19.2.3 Boost current = 0.0 % 40610 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 10000 RW
No
G19.2.4 Slip compensation = No 40613 0 to 1 RW
Yes
G19.2.5 Current limit factor = 0.0 % 40614 0.0 to 20.0% 0 to 2000 RW
G19.2.6 Initial frequency = 0.0 % 40615 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 10000 RW
G19.2.7 Damping = 2 % 40616 0.00 to 10.00% 0 to 1000 RW
Para VIN = 400V / 500V
Bus: 625 to 800V
G19.2.8 Reg bus voltage = 40617 - RW
Para VIN=690V
Bus: 950 to 1251V
G19.3.1 R stator = 0.1 mΩ 40621 0.1 to 6553.5 mΩ 1 to 65535 RW
G19.3.2 R rotor = 0.1 mΩ 40622 0.1 to 6553.5 mΩ 1 to 65535 RW
G19.3.3 L magnetization = 0.1 mH 40623 0.1 to 6553.5 mH 1 to 65535 RW
Back electrom. force = 0.000
G19.3.3 40637 0.000 kV to 5.000 kV 0 to 5000 RW
kV
G19.3.4 L leakage stator = 0.00 mH 40624 0.00 to 100.00 mH 0 to 10000 RW
G19.3.4 L Stator D axis = 0.00 mH 40638 0.00 mH to 100.00 mH 0 to 10000 RW
G19.3.5 L leakage rotor = 0.00 mH 40625 0.00 to 100.00 mH 0 to 10000 RW
G19.3.5 L Stator Q axis = 0.00 mH 40639 0.00 mH to 100.00 mH 0 to 10000 RW
G19.3.6 Field weakening = 90.0 % 40626 50.00 to 100.10% 5000 to 10010 RW
G19.3.7 Temperature coef R = 20.0 % 40627 0.0 to 50.0% 0 to 5000 RW
G19.3.8 Flux tuning = 2.0 % 40628 0.0 to 10.0% 0 to 100 RW
No
G19.3.9 Params online estim = No 40657 0 to 1 RW
Yes
G19.4.1 Kp speed = 10.0 % 40631 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 10000 RW
G19.4.2 Ki speed = 10.0 % 40632 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 10000 RW
G19.4.3 Kp torque = 10.0 % 40633 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 10000 RW
G19.4.4 Ki torque = 10.0 % 40634 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 10000 RW
G19.4.5 Kp I = 10.0 % 40635 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 10000 RW
G19.4.6 Ki I = 15.0 % 40636 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 10000 RW
G19.4.7 Kp Sensorless = 50.0 % 40642 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 10000 RW
G19.4.8 Ki Sensorless = 50.0 % 40643 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 10000 RW

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 107

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

2400 bps 0
4800 bps 1
9600 bps 2
19200 bps 3
Display baudrate = 921600bps
G20.1.1 40651 57600 bps 4 RW
baud/s
115200 bps 5
230400 bps 6
460800 bps 7
921600 bps 8
G20.1.2 Modbus address = 10 40652 1 to 255 1 to 255 RW
2400 bps 0
4800 bps 1
9600 bps 2
19200 bps 3
Modbus baudrate = 9600 bps
G20.1.3 40653 57600 bps 4 RW
baud/s
115200 bps 5
230400 bps 6
460800 bps 7
921600 bps 8
Odd
G20.1.4 Modbus parity = None 40654 None 0 to 2 RW
Even
Off,
G20.1.5 Communication timeout = Off 40655 0 to 600 RW
0 to 600 s
G20.2.1.1.1 44601
Custom Modbus addresses 1
to to 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 RW
to 16
G20.2.1.1.16 44616
G20.2.1.2.1 44801
Values of custom Modbus
to to 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 RW
registers 1 to 16
G20.2.1.2.16 44816
G20.2.2.1.1 44617
Custom Modbus addresses 1
to to 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 RW
to 120
G20.2.2.1.16 44632
G20.2.2.2.1 44817
Values of custom Modbus
to to 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 RW
registers 1 to 120
G20.2.2.2.16 44832
G20.2.3 Profibus node address 40661 0 to 126 0 to 126 RW
Fault
G20.2.4 Connector Fault Mode 40665 0 to 1 RW
Ignore
Off
G20.2.5 Connector State 40666 0 to 1 RO
On
G20.6.1 44601
Custom Modbus addresses 1
to to 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 RW
to 120
G20.6.120 44720
G20.7.1 44801
Values of custom Modbus
to to 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 RW
registers 1 to 120
G20.7.120 44920
No
G21.1.1 Automatic IP = No 40701 0 to 1 RW
Yes
40702 – A
Assigned IP = 0.0.0.0 40703 – B
G21.1.1.1 0 to 255 0 to 255 RO
(A.B.C.D) 40704 – C
40705 – D
40706 – A
Assigned subnet = 0.0.0.0 40707 – B
G21.1.1.2 0 to 255 0 to 255 RO
(A.B.C.D) 40708 – C
40709 – D
40710 -A
Assigned gateway = 0.0.0.0 40711 – B
G21.1.1.3 0 to 255 0 to 255 RO
(A.B.C.D) 40712 – C
40713 – D
40714 – A
IP address = 192.168.1.143 40715 – B
G21.1.2 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW
(A.B.C.D) 40716 – C
40717 - D
40718 – A
Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0 40719 – B
G21.1.3 1 to 255 1 to 255 RW
(A.B.C.D) 40720 – C
40721 – D

108 MODBUS COMMUNICATION

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

40722 – A
Gateway = 0.0.0.1 40723 – B
G21.1.4 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW
(A.B.C.D) 40724 – C
40725 - D
40726 – A
40727 – B
MAC address =
40728 – C
G21.1.5 0.27.119.129.238.66 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW
40729 – D
(A.B.C.D.E.F)
40730 – E
40731 – F
G21.2.1 Client TCP timeout 40741 0.05 a 5000 50 a 5000 RW

G21.2.2 Client TCP retries 40742 0a4 0a4 RW

No
G21.3.1.1 Automatic IP = No 42701 0 to 1 RW
Yes
42702 – A
Assigned IP = 0.0.0.0 42703 – B
G21.3.1.2 0 to 255 0 to 255 RO
(A.B.C.D) 42704 – C
42705 – D
42706 – A
Assigned subnet = 0.0.0.0 42707 – B
G21.3.1.3
(A.B.C.D) 42708 – C
42709 – D
0 to 255 0 to 255 RO
EN
42710 – A
Assigned gateway = 0.0.0.0 42711 – B
G21.3.1.4 0 to 255 0 to 255 RO
(A.B.C.D) 42712 – C
42713 – D
42714 – A
IP address = 192.168.1.143 42715 – B
G21.3.1.2 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW
(A.B.C.D) 42716 – C
42717 - D
42718 – A
Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0 42719 – B
G21.3.1.3 1 to 255 1 to 255 RW
(A.B.C.D) 42720 – C
42721 – D
42722 – A
Gateway = 0.0.0.0 42723 – B
G21.3.1.4 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW
(A.B.C.D) 42724 – C
42725 - D
42726 – A
42727 – B
MAC address = 00-1B-77-81-
42728 – C
G21.3.1.5 EE-42 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW
42729 – D
(A.B.C.D.E.F)
42730 – E
42731 – F
Local
G21.3.4 Control mode = Local 42741 Network 0 to 2 RW
Net decides
Local
G21.3.5 Reference mode = Local 42742 Network 0 to 2 RW
Net decides
Local
G21.3.6 PID mode = Local 42743 Network 0 to 2 RW
Net decides
Off
G21.3.7 Connector 1 status = Off 42805 0 to 1 RO
On
Fault
G21.3.8 Fault mode c1 = Fault 42744 0 to 1 RW
Ignore
Off
G21.3.9 Connector 2 status = Off 42806 0 to 1 RO
On
Fault
G21.3.10 Fault mode c2 = Fault 42804 0 to 1 RW
Ignore
42784 – A
IP address = 192.168.1.143 42785 – B
G21.4.1.1 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW
(A.B.C.D) 42786 – C
42787 - D
42788 – A
Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0 42789 – B
G21.4.1.2 1 to 255 1 to 255 RW
(A.B.C.D) 42790 – C
42791 – D

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 109

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

42792 – A
Gateway = 0.0.0.0 42793 – B
G21.4.1.3 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW
(A.B.C.D) 42794 – C
42795 - D
42796 – A
42797 – B
MAC address = 00-1B-77-81-
42798 – C
G21.4.1.4 EE-42 0 to 255 0 to 255 RW
42799 – D
(A.B.C.D.E.F)
42800 – E
42801 – F
Off
G21.4.4 Connector 1 status = Off 42807 0 to 1 RO
On
Fault
G21.4.5 Fault mode c1 = Fault 42802 0 to 1 RW
Ignore
Off
G21.4.6 Connector 2 status = Off 42808 0 to 1 RO
On
Fault
G21.4.7 Fault mode c2 = Fault 42803 0 to 1 RW
Ignore
Off
G23.2.1 IO digital A status = Off 41135 0 to 1 RO
On
No
G23.2.2 IO digital A test = No 41136 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Off
G23.2.3 IO digital B status = Off 41137 0 to 1 RO
On
No
G23.2.4 IO digital B test = No 41138 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Off
G23.2.5 IO analog A status = Off 41125 0 to 1 RO
On
No
G23.2.6 IO analog A test = No 41126 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Off
G23.2.7 IO analog B status = Off 41127 0 to 1 RO
On
No
G23.2.8 IO analog B test = No 41128 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Off
G23.3.1 Profinet board status = Off 41021 0 to 1 RO
On
No
G23.3.2 Profinet board test = No 41022 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Off 0
G23.3.3 Profinet Com Error = Fault 41023 Warning 1 RW
Fault 2
Off
G23.3.4 EthernetIP board state = Off 41024 0 to 1 RO
On
No
G23.3.5 EthernetIP board test = No 41025 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Off
G23.3.6 EthernetIP Com Error = Fault 41026 Warning 0 to 2 RW
Fault
Off
G23.3.7 Profibus board status = Off 41027 0 to 1 RO
On
No
G23.3.8 Profibus board test = No 41028 0 to 1 RW
Yes
Off
G23.3.9 Profibus Com Error = Fault 41029 Warning 0 to 2 RW
Fault
Master
G25.1 Role = Master 41186 0 to 1 RW
Slave
No
G25.2 Start fiber = No 41187 0 to 1 RW
Yes
No
G25.3 Fault partner = Yes 41188 0 to 1 RW
Yes

110 MODBUS COMMUNICATION

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Parameter Screen Address Range Modbus Range Access [1]

Spin
G25.4 Stop partner fault = Spin 41189 0 to 1 RW
Ramp
No
G25.5 Restart after reset = No 41190 0 to 1 RW
Yes
0.1 to 10,
G25.6 Time out fiber = 1.0 s 41192 1 to 101 RW
Off = 101
Off
Auto
G26.1 Fans mode = Run 41211 0 to 3 RW
Fixed
Run

G26.2 Min temperature = 47 ºC 41214 35ºC to G26.3 35 to G26.3 RW

G26.3 Max temperature = 51 ºC 41213 G26.2 to 80ºC G26.2 to 80 RW

G26.4 Power off delay = 1 min 41214 1 to 5 min 1 to 5 RW

[1] Access: RW: Read and write. RO: Read only.

EN

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 111

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Visualization Parameters
Parameter Screen Description Address Modbus Range
Current drive status. 43564 0 to 255

Modbus Modbus
Status Status
Value Value
0 OFF 10 SPN
1 ON 11 AUT
2 ACL 12 BRK
3 RUN 14 IHEAT
4 DEC 16 DLY
5 STP 41 IS1
6 FLT 42 IS2
9 RFLT 43 IS3

Consult state messages description in section “STATUS & WARNING MESSAGES”.

Warning messages 43565 1 to 45

Modbus Modbus Modbus

Warning Warning Warning
Value Value Value
0 NO WRN 10 AVI 36 DE_A
1 MOL 11 OVV 37 EPB
3 MOC 12 UNV 44 DE_B
4 DOC 13 SLMAX 45 EVCOMM
5 ILT 14 CWR 46 AE_A
6 TLT 15 SLMIN 47 AE_B
7 VLT 16 RTL 48 PNE
8 ACO 17 MVR 49 EIPE
9 AVO

Consult warning messages description in section “STATUS & WARNING MESSAGES”

STATUS LINE Fault messages 42101 1 to 218
OFF 0.0A +0.0%
Modbus Fault Modbus Fault Modbus Fault Modbus Fault
Value message Value message Value message Value message
0 F0 26 F26 55 F55 89 F89
1 F01 27 F27 56 F56 93 F93
2 F02 28 F28 57 F57 94 F94
3 F03 31 F31 58 F58 95 F95
4 F04 32 F32 59 F59 96 F96
5 F05 33 F33 60 F60 99 F99
6 F06 34 F34 61 F61 100 F100
7 F07 35 F35 62 F62 101 F101
8 F08 36 F36 63 F63 102 F102
10 F10 37 F37 64 F64 103 F103
11 F11 38 F38 68 F68 104 F104
12 F12 39 F39 69 F69 105 F105
13 F13 40 F40 70 F70 106 F106
14 F14 41 F41 71 F71 107 F107
15 F15 42 F42 72 F72 108 F108
16 F16 43 F43 73 F73 109 F109
17 F17 44 F44 74 F74 110 F110
18 F18 45 F45 75 F75 111 F111
19 F19 46 F46 76 F76 112 F112
20 F20 47 F47 77 F77
21 F21 48 F48 78 F78
22 F22 49 F49 79 F79
23 F23 50 F50 84 F84
24 F24 53 F53 85 F85
25 F25 54 F54 87 F87

Consult fault messages description in section “FAULT MESSAGES. DESCRIPTIONS AND ACTIONS
STATUS
OFF 0.0A +0.0% Motor output current. (Corresponds with SV1.6) 42007 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)
LINE
STATUS Motor output speed (in %). (Corresponds with
OFF 0.0A +0.0% 42003 8192 = 100% of motor rated speed
LINE SV1.3)

112 MODBUS COMMUNICATION

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Parameter Screen Description Address Modbus Range

Shows the present reference value of
SV1.1 Speed reference = 0.0 % 42001 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
speed which is applied to the motor.
Shows the present reference value of
SV1.2 Torque reference = 0.0 % 42002 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
torque which is applied to the motor.
SV1.3 Motor speed (%) = 0.0 % Shows the motor speed in %. 42003 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV1.4 Motor speed (rpm) = 0 rpm Shows the motor speed in rpm. 42004 Real Value = Modbus Value
Shows the frequency being applied to the
SV1.5 Motor frequency = 0.0 Hz 42005 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)
motor.
Shows the present voltage applied to the
SV1.6 Motor voltage = 0 V 42006 Real Value = Modbus Value
motor.
Shows the present current flowing to the
SV1.7 Motor current = 0.0 A 42007 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)
motor.
Shows the present torque applied to the
SV1.8 Motor torque = 0.0 % 42008 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
motor.
SV1.9 Motor phi cosine = 0.85 Shows the motor's cos phi. 42009 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
Shows the instantaneous power
SV1.10 Motor power = 0.0 kW 42010 Real Value = Modbus Value
consumption of the motor.
SV1.11.1 U motor current = 0.0 A 42011 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10) EN
Shows the instantaneous current of each
SV1.11.2 V motor current = 0.0 A 42012 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)
phase of the motor (U, V and W).
SV1.11.3 W motor current = 0.0 A 42013 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)

SV1.12.1 U-V motor voltage = 0 V 42014 Real Value = Modbus Value

Shows the instantaneous voltage applied
SV1.12.2 V-W motor voltage = 0 V 42015 Real Value = Modbus Value
(UV, VW, UW).
SV1.12.3 W-U motor voltage = 0 V 42016 Real Value = Modbus Value
Shows whether the motor PTC is
SV1.13 PTC Status = No 42017 Real Value = Modbus Value
connected or disconnected.
SV1.14 Estimat. Motor temp(%) = 0.0 % Shows the estimated motor temperature. 42018 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV1.15 Motor temperature = 0 ºC Shows the motor temperature 42019 Real Value = Modbus Value
Shows the pulses per revolution of the
SV1.16 Encoder pulses = 0 42020 Real Value = Modbus Value
encoder.
SV1.17 Encoder speed = 0 rpm Real speed measured by the encoder. 42021 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV2.1.1 L1-L2 supply voltage = 0 V 42031 Real Value = Modbus Value

Shows the input instantaneous voltage
SV2.1.2 L2-L3 supply voltage = 0 V 42032 Real Value = Modbus Value
applied to the drive (RS, ST and RT).
SV2.1.3 L3-L1 supply voltage = 0 V 42033 Real Value = Modbus Value
Shows the average input voltage to the
SV2.2 Input voltage average = 0 V 42034 Real Value = Modbus Value
drive.
SV2.3 DC bus voltage = 0 V Shows DC Link voltage of the drive. 42035 Real Value = Modbus Value
Shows the frequency of the drive input
SV2.4 Input frequency = 0.0 Hz 42036 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)
voltage
Shows the temperature measured inside
SV2.5.1 Drive temperature = 0 ºC 42039 Real Value = Modbus Value
the electronics chamber of the drive.
Shows the maximum temperature
SV2.5.2 IGBT temperature = 0 ºC 42040 Real Value = Modbus Value
measured at the power stage
Shows the internal relative humidity of the
SV2.10 Relative Humidity = 0 % 42050 Real Value = Modbus Value
converter.
SV3.1 AI1 value = 0.00 V Shows the value of Analogue Input 1. 42061 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)
Shows the value or the PID reference
SV3.2 AI1 percentage = 100.0 % 42062 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
proportional to Analogue Input 1
SV3.3 AI1 sensor value = 0.0 l/s Value of sensor 1 associated to AI1. 42063 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)

SV3.4 AI2 value = 0.00 mA Shows the value of the Analogue Input 2. 42064 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 113

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Parameter Screen Description Address Modbus Range

Value or the PID reference proportional to
SV3.5 AI2 percentage = 100.0 % 42065 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
the AI 2 signal.
SV3.6 AI2 sensor value = 0.0 Bar Value of sensor 2 associated to the AI2. 42066 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)

SV3.7 AI3 value = 0.00 V Value of sensor 3 associated to the AI3. 42067 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)
Value or the PID reference proportional to
SV3.8 AI3 percentage = 100.0 % 42068 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
the AI3 signal.
SV3.9 AI3 sensor value = 0.0 l/s Value of sensor 3 associated to the AI3. 42069 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)

SV3.10 AI4 value = 0.00 V Value of the AI4 (AI4). 41261 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)
Shows the value or the PID reference
SV3.11 AI4 percentage = 100.0 % 41262 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
proportional to the AI 4 signal.
Shows the value of sensor 4 associated to
SV3.12 AI4 sensor value = 0.0 l/s 41263 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)
the Analogue Input 4.
SV3.13 AI5 value = 0.00 V Shows the value of the Analogue Input 5. 40469 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)
Shows the value or the PID reference
SV3.14 AI5 percentage = 100.0 % 40470 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
proportional to the AI5 signal.
SV3.15 AI5 sensor value = 0.0 l/s Value of sensor 5 associated to the AI5. 40471 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)

SV3.16 AI6 value = 0.00 V Value of the AI6. 40578 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)
Value or the PID reference proportional to
SV3.17 AI6 percentage = 100.0 % 40579 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
the AI 6 signal.
SV3.18 AI6 sensor value = 0.0 l/s Value of sensor 6 associated to the AI6.. 40580 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)

SV3.19 AI7 value = 0.00 V Value of the AI7. 40591 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)
Value or the PID reference proportional to
SV3.20 AI7 percentage = 100.0 % 40589 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
the AI 7 signal.
SV3.21 AI7 sensor value = 0.0 l/s Value of sensor 7 associated to the AI7. 40590 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)

SV3.22 AO1 value = 0.00 V Value of the Analogue output 1. 42070 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)

SV3.23 AO1 percentage = 0.0 % Magnitude value associated to the AO1. 42071 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV3.24 AO2 value = 0.00 V Value of the Analogue output 1. 42072 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)

SV3.25 AO2 percentage = 0.0 % Magnitude value associated to the AO2. 42073 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV3.26 AO3 value = 0.00 V Value of the Analogue output 3. 42074 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)

SV3.27 AO3 percentage = 0.0 % Magnitude value associated to the AO3. 42075 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV3.28 AO4 value = 0.00 V Value of the Analogue output 4. 41264 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)

SV3.29 AO4 percentage = 0.0 % Magnitude value associated to the AO4. 41265 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV3.30 AO5 value = 0.00 V Value of the Analogue output 5. 40619 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)

SV3.31 AO5 percentage = 0.0 % Magnitude value associated to the AO5. 40620 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV3.32 AO6 value = 0.00 V Value of the Analogue output 6. 40629 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)

SV3.33 AO6 percentage = 0.0 % Magnitude value associated to the AO6. 40630 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV3.34 DI status = 000000 Value of the digital inputs (6 bits) 42081 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV3.35 Output relays status = 000 Value of the output relays (3, bits) 42082 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV3.37 Fans = Off Shows the status of the fans (on / off) 41215 Real Value = Modbus Value
Shows the measurement of the pulse
SV3.38 Pulse Input = 0.0 l/s 42092 Real Value = Modbus Value
input.
SV4.1 Present fault = 0 Shows the present fault code. 42101 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV4.2 Nominal V = 500 V Shows the drive rated voltage. 42102 Real Value = Modbus Value

114 MODBUS COMMUNICATION

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Parameter Screen Description Address Modbus Range

SV4.3 Nominal I = 46.0 A Shows the drive rated current. 42103 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)
Shows the reference value in PID mode of
SV4.4 PID setpoint = 100.0 % 42106 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
the equipment standard program.
Shows the feedback value in PID mode of
SV4.5 PID feedback value = 100.0 % 42107 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
the equipment standard program.
SV4.8.1 Comp status 1 = O 42108 Real Value = Modbus Value
Shows the status of the three
SV4.8.2 Comp status 2 = O 42109 Real Value = Modbus Value
comparators.
SV4.8.3 Comp status 3 = O 42110 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV4.9 Prior to fault status = OFF Status of the drive before the fault. 42111 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV5.1 Speed local reference = 100.0 % Shows the speed reference in local mode. 42231 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV5.2 PID local setpoint = 100.0 % Shows the PID setting in local mode. 42232 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV5.3 Multireference 1 = 10.00 % Speed value assigned to Multi-reference 1 42233 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV5.4

SV5.5
Multireference 2 = 20.00 %

Multireference 3 = 30.00 %
Speed value assigned to Multi-reference 2

Speed value assigned to Multi-reference 3

42234

42235
Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

EN
SV5.6 Multireference 4 = 40.00 % Speed value assigned to Multi-reference 4 42236 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV5.7 Multireference 5 = 50.00 % Speed value assigned to Multi-reference 5 42237 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV5.8 Multireference 6 = 60.00 % Speed value assigned to Multi-reference 6 42238 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV5.9 Multireference 7 = 70.00 % Speed value assigned to Multi-reference 7 42239 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV5.10 Inch speed 1 = 0.00 % Shows the fixed speed 1. 42240 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV5.11 Inch speed 2 = 0.00 % Shows the fixed speed 2. 42241 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV5.12 Inch speed 3 = 0.00 % Shows the fixed speed 3. 42242 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
Shows the total time during which the
SV6.1.1 Total days counter = 0 days 42251 Real Value = Modbus Value
drive is running (RUN).
Shows the total time during which the
SV6.1.2 Total hours counter = 0 h 42252 Real Value = Modbus Value
drive is running (RUN).
Shows the total time during which the
SV6.2.1 Partial days counter = 0 days 42253 Real Value = Modbus Value
drive is running (RUN).
Shows the partial time during which the
SV6.2.2 Partial hours counter = 0 h 42254 Real Value = Modbus Value
drive is running (RUN).
Allows resetting the counter of partial time
SV6.3 Clear partial counter = No 42255 Real Value = Modbus Value
for running status (RUN).
SV6.4.1 Total energy GWh = 0 GWh Drive total energy consumption. 42256 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV6.4.2 Total energy MWh = 0 MWh Drive total energy consumption. 42257 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV6.4.3 Total energy KWh = 0 kWh Drive total energy consumption. 42258 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV6.5.1 Partial energy GWh = 0 GWh Drive partial energy consumption. 42259 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV6.5.2 Partial energy MWh = 0 MWh Drive partial energy consumption. 42260 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV6.5.3 Partial energy KWh = 0 kWh Drive partial energy consumption. 42261 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV6.6 Partial energy reset = No Reset partial energy counter. 42262 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV8.1 Seconds = 0 Shows the seconds of the current time. 42431 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV8.2 Minutes = 0 Shows the minutes of the current time. 42432 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV8.3 Hours = 0 Shows the hours of the current time. 42433 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV8.4 Day = 1 Shows the day of the current date. 42434 Real Value = Modbus Value

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 115

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Parameter Screen Description Address Modbus Range

SV8.5 Month = 1 Shows the month of the current date. 42435 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV8.6 Year = 2015 Shows the year of the current date. 42436 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV9.1.1 Speed reference = 0.0 % Current speed reference value. 42451 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV9.1.2 Torque reference = 0.0 % Current torque reference value. 42452 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV9.1.3 Motor speed (%) = 0.0 % Shows the motor speed in%. 42453 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV9.1.4 Motor speed (rpm) = 0 rpm Shows the motor speed in rpm. 42454 Real Value = Modbus Value
Shows the frequency which the motor is
SV9.1.5 Motor frequency = 0.0 Hz 42455 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)
running.
Shows the current voltage applied to the
SV9.1.6 Motor voltage = 0 V 42456 Real Value = Modbus Value
motor.
SV9.1.7 Motor current = 0.0 A Shows the present current to the motor. 42457 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)
Shows the current torque applied to the
SV9.1.8 Motor torque = 0.0 % 42458 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
motor.
SV9.1.9 Motor phi cosine = 0.85 Shows the motor power factor. 42459 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
Shows the instantaneous power
SV9.1.10 Motor power = 0 kW 42460 Real Value = Modbus Value
consumption of the motor.
SV9.1.11.1 U motor current = 0.0 A 42461 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)
Shows the instantaneous current per
SV9.1.11.2 V motor current = 0.0 A 42462 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)
phase of the motor (U, V and W)
SV9.1.11.3 W motor current = 0.0 A 42463 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)

SV9.1.12.1 U-V motor voltage = 0 V 42464 Real Value = Modbus Value

Shows the instantaneous line voltage (UV,
SV9.1.12.2 V-W motor voltage = 0 V 42465 Real Value = Modbus Value
VW, UW)
SV9.1.12.3 W-U motor voltage = 0 V 42466 Real Value = Modbus Value
Shows whether the motor PTC is
SV9.1.13 PTC Status = No 42467 Real Value = Modbus Value
connected or not.
Shows the theoretical heating level of the
SV9.1.14 Motor temperature(%) = 0.0 % 42468 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
motor.
SV9.1.15 Motor temperature = 0 ºC Shows the temperature of the motor. 42469 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV9.1.16 Encoder pulses = 0 Shows the pulse count of the Encoder. 42470 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV9.1.17 Encoder speed = 0 rpm Shows the speed seen by the Encoder. 42471 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV9.2.1.1 L1-L2 supply volt = 0 V 42481 Real Value = Modbus Value

Shows the instantaneous input voltage
SV9.2.1.2 L2-L3 supply volt = 0 V 42482 Real Value = Modbus Value
(L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1)
SV9.2.1.3 L3-L1 supply volt = 0 V 42483 Real Value = Modbus Value
Shows the average value of input voltages
SV9.2.2 Input voltage average = 0 V 42511 Real Value = Modbus Value
between phases.
SV9.2.3 DC bus voltage = 0 V Shows the DC bus voltage. 42500 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV9.2.4 Input frequency = 0.0 Hz Shows the frequency of the input voltage 42484 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)

SV9.2.5 Drive temperature = 0 ºC Shows the temperature of the drive. 42487 Real Value = Modbus Value
Shows the temperature measured at the
SV9.2.9 IGBT temperature = 0 ºC 42512 Real Value = Modbus Value
power stage of the drive output.
Shows the internal relative humidity of the
SV9.2.10 Relative Humidity = 0 % 42513 Real Value = Modbus Value
drive.
SV9.3.1 AI1 value = 0.00 V Shows the average value of the AI1. 42501 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)
Shows the speed reference or the PID
SV9.3.2 AI1 percentage = 100.0 % 42502 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
proportional setting for the AI1.
SV9.3.3 AI1 sensor value = 0.0 l/s Value of sensor 1 associated to AI1. 42503 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)

116 MODBUS COMMUNICATION

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Parameter Screen Description Address Modbus Range

SV9.3.4 AI2 value = 0.00 mA Average value of the analogue input 2. 42504 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)
Shows the speed reference or the PID
SV9.3.5 AI2 percentage = 100.0 % 42505 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
proportional setting for the AI2.
SV9.3.6 AI2 sensor value = 0.0 Bar Value of sensor 1 associated to AI2. 42506 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)

SV9.3.7 AI3 value = 0.00 V Average value of the analogue input 3. 42507 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)
Shows the speed reference or the PID
SV9.3.8 AI3 percentage = 100.0 % 42508 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
proportional setting for the AI3.
SV9.3.9 AI3 sensor value = 0.0 l/s Value of sensor 1 associated to AI3. 42509 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)

SV9.3.10 AI4 value = 0.00 V Average value of the analogue input 4. 41268 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)
Shows the speed reference or the PID
SV9.3.11 AI4 percentage = 100.0 % 41269 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
proportional setting for the AI4.
SV9.3.12 AI4 sensor value = 0.0 l/s Value of sensor 1 associated to AI4. 41270 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)

SV9.3.13 AI5 value = 0.00 V Average value of the analogue input 5. 41228 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)
Shows the speed reference or the PID
SV9.3.14 AI5 percentage = 100.0 %
proportional setting for the AI5.
41229 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
EN
SV9.3.15 AI5 sensor value = 0.0 l/s Value of sensor 1 associated to AI5. 41230 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)

SV9.3.16 AI6 value = 0.00 V Average value of the analogue input 6. 40754 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)
Shows the speed reference or the PID
SV9.3.17 AI6 percentage = 100.0 % 40755 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
proportional setting for the AI6.
SV9.3.18 AI6 sensor value = 0.0 l/s Value of sensor 1 associated to AI6. 40756 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)

SV9.3.19 AI7 value = 0.00 V Average value of the analogue input 7. 40858 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)
Shows the speed reference or the PID
SV9.3.20 AI7 percentage = 100.0 % 40859 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
proportional setting for the AI7.
SV9.3.21 AI7 sensor value = 0.0 l/s Value of sensor 1 associated to AI7. 40860 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)

SV9.3.22 AO1 value = 0.00 V Shows the value of analogue output 1. 42493 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)

SV9.3.23 AO1 percentage = 0.0 % Valueof sensor 1 associated to AO1. 42494 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV9.3.24 AO2 value = 0.00 V Valueof analogue output 2. 42495 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)

SV9.3.25 AO2 percentage = 0.0 % Valueof sensor 1 associated to AO2. 42496 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV9.3.26 AO3 value = 0.00 V Valueof analogue output 3. 42497 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)

SV9.3.27 AO3 percentage = 0.0 % Valueof sensor 1 associated to AO3. 42498 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV9.3.28 AO4 value = 0.00 V Valueof analogue output 4. 41271 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)

SV9.3.29 AO4 percentage = 0.0 % Valueof sensor 1 associated to AO4. 41272 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV9.3.30 AO5 value = 0.00 V Valueof analogue output 5. 40965 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)

SV9.3.31 AO5 percentage = 0.0 % Valueof sensor 1 associated to AO5. 40966 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)

SV9.3.32 AO6 value = 0.00 V Valueof analogue output 6. 40967 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 1000)

SV9.3.33 DI status = 000000 Valueof sensor 1 associated to AO6. 40968 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
Shows the status of each of the digital Real Value = Modbus Value
SV9.3.34 DI status = 00000000000 42499
inputs of the central control. (LSB: Entrada 1)
Shows the status of digital inputs: Real Value = Modbus Value
SV9.3.35 DI status = 0000000000000000 41273
00000000000 (entry 1: first from the left). (LSB: Entrada 1)
Shows the status of each of the digital Real Value = Modbus Value
SV9.3.36 DO status = 000 42510
outputs of the central control. (LSB: Salida 1)
Shows the status of the digital outputs: Real Value = Modbus Value
SV9.3.37 DO status = 00000000 42510
00000000000 (entry 1: first from the left). (LSB: Salida 1)
SV9.4.1 Last fault = 0 Shows the present fault code. 42531 Real Value = Modbus Value

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 117

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Parameter Screen Description Address Modbus Range

SV9.4.2 Drive nominal current = 46.0 A Shows the rated current of the drive. 42532 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 10)

SV9.4.3 Drive nominal voltage = 500 V Shows the rated voltage of the drive. 42533 Real Value = Modbus Value
Shows the setpoint value of the PID of the
SV9.4.6 PID setpoint = 100.0 % 42536 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
standard equipment program.
Shows the PID feedback value of the
SV9.4.7 PID feedback value = 100.0 % 42537 Real Value = (Modbus Value / 100)
standard equipment program.
SV9.4.8.1 Comp status 1 = O 42538 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV9.4.8.2 Comp status 2 = O Shows the status of the three comparators 42539 Real Value = Modbus Value

SV9.4.8.3 Comp status 3 = O 42540 Real Value = Modbus Value

118 MODBUS COMMUNICATION

 POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

7. COMMON CONFIGURATIONS
7
Start / Stop Commands and Speed Reference by Keypad
Parameter Configuration
Parameter Description Value
G1: Options
G1.2 Language Language selection English
G1.5 Activate programs Program activation Standard
G2: Motor Nameplate
G2.1 Motor plate current Motor rated current
Motor rated voltage
__A (Set according to motor nameplate).
__V (Set according to motor nameplate).
EN
G2.2 Motor plate voltage
G2.3 Motor plate power Motor rated power __kW (Set according to motor nameplate).
G2.4 Motor plate rpm : Motor rpm __rpm (Set according to motor nameplate).
G2.5 Motor plate phi
Cosine Phi __ (Set according to motor nameplate).
cosine
G2.6 Motor plate frequency Motor frequency __Hz (Set according to motor nameplate).
Use the following values as reference:
Submersible pumps and non-deflagrating motors ➔ 5%
G2.7 Motor cooling Motor cooling at zero speed
Self-cool motor ➔ 63%
Force-cooled motor ➔ 100%
G3: References
Local ➔ Reference will be determined by keypad and is set
G3.1 Speed ref 1 source Speed reference source 1
in G3.3 'Local Speed Reference'.
G3.3 Speed local reference Local Speed Reference +100%
G4: Inputs – G4.1: Digital Inputs
G4.1.1 Main control mode Main Control Mode 1 ➔ LOCAL (Drive control is done by keypad).
G4.1.3 Allow local reset Reset by keypad Y ➔ YES (Enables reset by keypad).

COMMON CONFIGURATIONS 119

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Start / Stop Commands by Terminals and Speed Reference by

Analogue Input
Parameter Configuration

Parameter Description Value

G1: Options
G1.2 Language Language selection ENGLISH
G1.5 Activate programs Program activation STANDARD
G2: Motor Nameplate
G2.1 Motor plate current Motor rated current __A (Set according to motor nameplate).
G2.2 Motor plate voltage Motor rated voltage __V (Set according to motor nameplate).
G2.3 Motor plate power Motor rated power __kW (Set according to motor nameplate).
G2.4 Motor plate rpm : Motor rpm __rpm (Set according to motor nameplate).
G2.5 Motor plate phi
Cosine Phi __ (Set according to motor nameplate).
cosine
G2.6 Motor plate frequency Motor frequency __Hz (Set according to motor nameplate).
Use the following values as reference:
Submersible pumps and non-deflagrating motors ➔ 5%
G2.7 Motor cooling Motor cooling at zero speed
Self-cool motor ➔ 63%
Force-cooled motor ➔ 100%
G3: References
Local ➔ Reference will be determined by keypad and is set
G3.1 Speed ref 1 source Speed reference source 1
in G3.3 'Local Speed Reference'.
G3.2 Speed ref 2 source Speed reference source 2 AI1 ➔ Reference will be introduced by Analogue Input 1.
G3.3 Speed local reference Local Speed Reference +100%
G4: Inputs – G4.1: Digital Inputs
2 ➔ REMOTE (Drive control is done through control
G4.1.1 Main control mode Main Control Mode
terminals).
Digital Inputs configuration 1 ➔ ALL PROGRAMMABLE (all digital inputs can be
G4.1.4 Digital input mode
selection individually configured by the user).
Multi-function Digital Input 1 05 ➔ Start/Stop (Allows the start/stop command to be
G4.1.5 Digital Input 1
configuration given by a switch).
Multi-function Digital Input 2 15 ➔ Reference 2 (Allows selecting the alternative speed
G4.1.6 Digital Input2
configuration reference programmed in G3.2.)

See Connection Drawing in the next page.

120 COMMON CONFIGURATIONS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Connection Drawing
Terminals 7 and 8: start / stop command (NO status).

Terminals 7 and 9: alternative reference command (NO status).

EN

Start / Stop Commands by Terminals and Speed Reference by Analogue Input

Note: Use screened cables for the controls and connect screen to ground.

COMMON CONFIGURATIONS 121

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Start / Stop Commands by Terminals and Speed Reference by

Motorized Potentiometer
Parameter Configuration
Parameter Description Value
G1: Options
G1.2 Language Language selection ENGLISH
G1.5 Activate programs Program activation STANDARD
G2: Motor Nameplate
G2.1 Motor plate current Motor rated current __A (Set according to motor nameplate).
G2.2 Motor plate voltage Motor rated voltage __V (Set according to motor nameplate).
G2.3 Motor plate power Motor rated power __kW (Set according to motor nameplate).
G2.4 Motor plate rpm : Motor rpm __rpm (Set according to motor nameplate).
G2.5 Motor plate phi
Cosine Phi __ (Set according to motor nameplate).
cosine
G2.6 Motor plate frequency Motor frequency __Hz (Set according to motor nameplate).
Use the following values as reference:
Submersible pumps and non-deflagrating motors ➔ 5%
G2.7 Motor cooling Motor cooling at zero speed
Self-cool motor ➔ 63%
Force-cooled motor ➔ 100%
G3: References
LOCAL ➔ Reference will be determined by keypad and is
G3.1 Speed ref 1 source Speed reference source 1
set in G3.3 'Local Speed Reference'.
G3.2 Speed ref 2 source Speed reference source 2 AI1 ➔ Reference will be introduced by Analogue Input 1.
G3.3 Speed local reference Local Speed Reference +100%
G4: Inputs – G4.1: Digital Inputs
2 ➔ REMOTE (Drive control is done through control
G4.1.1 Main control mode Main Control Mode
terminals).
Digital Inputs configuration 1 ➔ ALL PROGRAMMABLE (all digital inputs can be
G4.1.4 Digital input mode
selection individually configured by the user).
Multi-function Digital Input 1 05 ➔ Start/Stop (Allows the start/stop command to be
G4.1.5 Digital Input 1
configuration given by a switch).
G5: Acceleration / deceleration rates
1.0% / s (Modify these ramps to tune operation). If the ramp
Ramp 1 of reference increase for is increased the speed reference response will be faster. If
G5.3.1 Mot pot accel rate 1
motorized potentiometer the ramp is decreased the speed reference response will be
slower.
3.0% / s (Modify these ramps to tune operation). If the ramp
Ramp 1 of reference decrease for is increased the speed reference response will be faster. If
G5.3.2 Mot pot decel rate 1
motorized potentiometer the ramp is decreased the speed reference response will be
slower.

See Connection Drawing in the next page.

122 COMMON CONFIGURATIONS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Connection Drawing
Terminals 7 and 8: start / stop command (NO status).

Terminals 7 and 12: up speed command (NO status).

Terminals 7 and 13: down speed command (NC status).

EN

Start / Stop Commands by Terminals and Speed Reference by Motorized Potentiometer

Note: Use screened cables for the controls and connect screen to ground.

COMMON CONFIGURATIONS 123

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

Start / Stop Commands by Terminals and Seven Speed References

Selectable by Digital Inputs
Parameter Configuration

Parameter Description Value

G1: Options
G1.2 Language Language selection ENGLISH
G1.5 Activate programs Program activation STANDARD
G2: Motor Nameplate.
G2.1 Motor plate current Motor rated current __A (Set according to motor nameplate).
G2.2 Motor plate voltage Motor rated voltage __V (Set according to motor nameplate).
G2.3 Motor plate power Motor rated power __kW (Set according to motor nameplate).
G2.4 Motor plate rpm : Motor rpm __rpm (Set according to motor nameplate).
G2.5 Motor plate phi
Cosine Phi __ (Set according to motor nameplate).
cosine
G2.6 Motor plate frequency Motor frequency __Hz (Set according to motor nameplate).
Use the following values as reference:
Submersible pumps and non-deflagrating motors ➔ 5%
G2.7 Motor cooling Motor cooling at zero speed
Self-cool motor ➔ 63%
Force-cooled motor ➔ 100%
G3: References.
Multireferences ➔ Multiple speed references activated by
G3.1 Speed ref 1 source Speed reference source 1
digital inputs.
G4: Inputs – G4.1: Digital Inputs
2 ➔ REMOTE (Drive control is done through control
G4.1.1 Main control mode Main Control Mode
terminals).
3 ➔ Multireferences 3 WIRES (Automatically programs
Digital Inputs configuration digital inputs 4, 5 and 6 as multiple speed references for up
G4.1.4 Digital input mode
selection to 7 different values. The others digital inputs remain user
configurable).
Multi-function Digital Input 1 05 ➔ Start/Stop (Allows the start/stop command to be
G4.1.5 Digital Input 1
configuration given by a switch).
G14: Multi-references
+10.0% (Allows setting the setpoint 1 value for the drive. It
G14.1 Multi reference 1 Multi-reference 1
should be set according to the application requirements).
+20.0% (Allows setting the setpoint 2 value for the drive. It
G14.2 Multi reference 2 Multi-reference 2
should be set according to the application requirements).
+30.0% (Allows setting the setpoint 3 value for the drive. It
G14.3 Multi reference 3 Multi-reference 3
should be set according to the application requirements).
+40.0% (Allows setting the setpoint 4 value for the drive. It
G14.4 Multi reference 4 Multi-reference 4
should be set according to the application requirements).
+50.0% (Allows setting the setpoint 5 value for the drive. It
G14.5 Multi reference 5 Multi-reference 5
should be set according to the application requirements).
+60.0% (Allows setting the setpoint 6 value for the drive. It
G14.6 Multi reference 6 Multi-reference 6
should be set according to the application requirements).
+70.0% (Allows setting the setpoint 7 value for the drive. It
G14.7 Multi reference 7 Multi-reference 7
should be set according to the application requirements).

See Connection Drawing in the next page.

124 COMMON CONFIGURATIONS

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

Connection Drawing
Terminals 7 and 8: start / stop command (NO status).

Terminals 7 and 11: multi-reference A (NO status).

Terminals 7 and 12: multi-reference M (NO status).

Terminals 7 and 13: multi-reference B (NO status).

Digital Input 4 Digital Input 5 Digital Input 6

SPEED REF
Multi-reference-A Multi-reference-M Multi-reference-B
G14.1 = +10.0% Multireferences1 0 0 X
G14.2 = +20.0% Multireferences2 0 X 0
G14.3 = +30.0% Multireferences3 0 X X
G14.4 = +40.0% Multireferences4 X 0 0
G14.5 = +50.0% Multireferences5 X 0 X
G14.6 = +60.0% Multireferences6 X X 0 EN
G14.7 = +70.0% Multireferences7 X X X
Note: 0: Not active and X: Active.

Start / Stop Commands by Terminals and Seven Speed References Selectable by Digital Inputs.

Note: Use screened cables for the controls and connect screen to ground.

COMMON CONFIGURATIONS 125

 SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

8. CONFIGURATION REGISTER
8
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE: SD750.
SERIAL Nº: MODEL:
APPLICATION:
DATE:
CUSTOMER:
NoteS:

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G1: Options

G1.1-Lock parameters No ___________________ ___________________

G1.1a-Lock password 0 ___________________ ___________________

G1.1b-Unlock password recov. 0 ___________________ ___________________

G1.2-Language Spanish ___________________ ___________________

G1.3-Initialise No init ___________________ ___________________

G1.4-Short menu No ___________________ ___________________

G1.5-Activate programs Standard ___________________ ___________________

G1.6-Service group password Group reserved for Technical Service staff of Power Electronics’ authorized personnel.

G1.9-Master/slave config Disable ___________________ ___________________

G2: Motor Nameplate Data

G2.1-Motor plate current 1.0In A ___________________ ___________________

G2.2-Motor plate voltage 0V ___________________ ___________________

G2.3-Motor plate power Pn kW ___________________ ___________________

126 CONFIGURATION REGISTER

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G2.4-Motor plate rpm 1485 rpm ___________________ ___________________

G2.5-Motor plate phi cosine 0.85 ___________________ ___________________

G2.6-Motor plate frequency 50 Hz ___________________ ___________________

G2.7-Motor cooling 63 % ___________________ ___________________

G3: References

G3.1-Speed ref 1 source Local ___________________ ___________________

G3.2-Speed ref 2 source Local ___________________ ___________________

G3.3-Speed local reference 100.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G3.4-Torque ref 1 source Local ___________________ ___________________

G3.5-Torque ref 2 source Local ___________________ ___________________

G3.6-Torque local reference 100.0 % ___________________ ___________________ EN

G4: Inputs – G4.1: Digital Inputs

G4.1.1-Main control mode Local ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.2-Alternative ctrl mode Remote ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.3-Allow local reset Yes ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.4-Digital input mode All programmable ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.5-Digital Input 1 Start / Stop ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.6-Digital Input 2 Reference 2 ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.7-Digital Input 3 Control 2 ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.8-Digital Input 4 Reset (NC) ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.9-Digital Input 5 Not used ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.10-Digital Input 6/PTC Not used ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.11-Digital Input 7 Not used ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.12-Digital Input 8 Not used ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.13-Digital Input 9 Not used ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.14-Digital Input 10 Not used ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.15-Digital Input 11 Not used ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.16-Digital Input 12 Not used ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.17-Digital Input 13 Not used ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.18-Digital Input 14 Not used ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.19-Digital Input 15 Not used ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.20-Digital Input 16 Not used ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.27 Feedback Error Timeout 1.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G4.1.28-Invert Input mode 6 bits ___________________ ___________________

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 127

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G4: Inputs – G4.2: Analogue Input 1

G4.2.1-Enable sensor No ___________________ ___________________

G4.2.2-Sensor unit l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.2.3-AI1 Format V ___________________ ___________________

G4.2.4-AI1 low level 0.0 V ___________________ ___________________

G4.2.5-Sensor low level 0.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.2.6-AI1 high level 10.0 V ___________________ ___________________

G4.2.7-Sensor high level 10.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.2.8-AI1 Ref speed min 0.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.2.9-AI1 Ref speed max 100.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.2.10-Sensor min value 0.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.2.11-Open loop min speed 0.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.2.12-Sensor max value 10.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.2.13-Open loop max speed 100.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.2.14-AI1 loss protection No ___________________ ___________________

G4.2.15-AI1 zero band filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G4.2.16-AI1 stabilizer filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G4: Inputs – G4.3: Analogue Input 2 / Pulse

G4.3.0-Enable Pulse Input Mode No ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.1-Enable sensor No ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.2-Sensor unit Bar ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.2-Sensor unit Pulse Input l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.2b-Pulses per unit 100 ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.2c-Max pulses 1000 ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.3-AI2 Format mA ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.4-AI2 low level 4.0 mA ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.5-Sensor low level 0.0 Bar ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.6-AI2 high level 10.0 mA ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.7-Sensor high level 10.0 Bar ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.8-AI2 Ref speed min 0.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.9-AI2 Ref speed max 100.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.10-Sensor min value 0.0 Bar ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.11-Open loop min speed 0.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.12-Sensor max value 10.0 Bar ___________________ ___________________

128 CONFIGURATION REGISTER

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G4.3.13-Open loop max speed 100.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.14-AI2 loss protection No ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.15-AI2 zero band filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G4.3.16-AI2 stabilizer filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G4: Inputs – G4.4: Analogue Input 3 / PT100

G4.4.0-PT100 Mode No ___________________ ___________________

G4.4.1-Enable sensor No ___________________ ___________________

G4.4.2-Sensor unit l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.4.3-AI3 Format V ___________________ ___________________

G4.4.4-AI3 low level 0.0 V ___________________ ___________________

G4.4.5-Sensor low level 0.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________ EN

G4.4.6-AI3 high level 10.0 V ___________________ ___________________

G4.4.7-Sensor high level 10.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.4.8-AI3 Ref speed min 0.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.4.9-AI3 Ref speed max 100.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.4.10-Sensor min value 0.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.4.11-Open loop min speed 0.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.4.12-Sensor max value 10.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.4.13-Open loop max speed 100.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.4.14-AI3 loss protection No ___________________ ___________________

G4.4.15-AI3 zero band filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G4.4.16-AI3 stabilizer filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G4: Inputs – G4.5: Analogue Input 4

G4.5.1-Enable sensor No ___________________ ___________________

G4.5.2-Sensor unit l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.5.3-AI4 Format V ___________________ ___________________

G4.5.4-AI4 low level 0.0 V ___________________ ___________________

G4.5.5-Sensor low level 0.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.5.6-AI4 high level 10.0 V ___________________ ___________________

G4.5.7-Sensor high level 10.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.5.8-AI4 Ref speed min 0.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.5.9-AI4 Ref speed max 100.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.5.10-Sensor min value 0.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.5.11-Open loop min speed 0.0 % ___________________ ___________________

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 129

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G4.5.12-Sensor max value 10.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.5.13-Open loop max speed 100.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.5.14-AI4 loss protection No ___________________ ___________________

G4.5.15-AI4 zero band filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G4.5.16-AI4 stabilizer filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G4: Inputs – G4.6: Analogue Input 5

G4.6.1-Enable sensor No ___________________ ___________________

G4.6.2-Sensor unit l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.6.3-AI5 Format V ___________________ ___________________

G4.6.4-AI5 low level 0.0 V ___________________ ___________________

G4.6.5-Sensor low level 0.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.6.6-AI5 high level 10.0 V ___________________ ___________________

G4.6.7-Sensor high level 10.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.6.8-AI5 Ref speed min 0.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.6.9-AI5 Ref speed max 100.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.6.10-Sensor min value 0.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.6.11-Open loop min speed 0.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.6.12-Sensor max value 10.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.6.13-Open loop max speed 100.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.6.14-AI5 loss protection No ___________________ ___________________

G4.6.15-AI5 zero band filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G4.6.16-AI5 stabilizer filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G4: Inputs – G4.7: Analogue Input 6

G4.7.1 Enable sensor No ___________________ ___________________

G4.7.2 Sensor unit l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.7.3 AI6 Format V ___________________ ___________________

G4.7.4 AI6 low level = 0.0 0.0 V ___________________ ___________________

G4.7.5 Sensor low level = 0.0 0.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.7.6 AI6 high level = 10.0 10.0 V ___________________ ___________________

G4.7.7 Sensor high level = 10.0 10.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.7.8 AI6 Ref speed min = 0.0 0.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.7.9 AI6 Ref speed max = 100.0 100.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.7.10 Sensor min value = 0.0 0.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.7.11 Open loop min speed 0.0 % ___________________ ___________________

130 CONFIGURATION REGISTER

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G4.7.12 Sensor max value 10.0 l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.7.13 Open loop max speed 100.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G4.7.14 AI6 loss protection No ___________________ ___________________

G4.7.15 AI6 zero band filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G4.7.16 AI6 stabilizer filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G4: Inputs – G4.8: Analogue Input 7

G4.8.1 Enable sensor = No NO ___________________ ___________________

G4.8.2 Sensor unit = l/s l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.8.3 AI7 Format = V V ___________________ ___________________

G4.8.4 AI7 low level = 0.0 V 0.0V ___________________ ___________________

G4.8.5 Sensor low level = 0.0 l/s 0.0l/s ___________________ ___________________ EN

G4.8.6 AI7 high level = 10.0 V 10.0V ___________________ ___________________

G4.8.7 Sensor high level = 10.0 l/s 10.0l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.8.8 AI7 Ref speed min = 0.0 % 0.0% ___________________ ___________________

G4.8.9 AI7 Ref speed max = 100.0 % 100.0% ___________________ ___________________

G4.8.10 Sensor min value = 0.0 l/s 0.0l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.8.11 Open loop min speed = 0.0 % 0.0% ___________________ ___________________

G4.8.12 Sensor max value = 10.0 l/s 10.0l/s ___________________ ___________________

G4.8.13 Open loop max speed = 100.0 % 100.0% ___________________ ___________________

G4.8.14 AI7 loss protection = No NO ___________________ ___________________

G4.8.15 AI7 zero band filter = Off Off ___________________ ___________________

G4.8.16 AI7 stabilizer filter = Off Off ___________________ ___________________

G5: Acceleration / Deceleration Ramps

G5.1.1 Acceleration rate 1 1.50 %/s ___________________ ___________________

G5.1.2 Acceleration rate 2 2.00 %/s ___________________ ___________________

G5.1.3-Accel break speed Off ___________________ ___________________

G5.1.4 Ramp after V.Deep 1.50 %/s ___________________ ___________________

G5.2.1 Deceleration rate 1 1.50 %/s ___________________ ___________________

G5.2.2 Deceleration rate 2 2.00 %/s ___________________ ___________________

G5.2.3 Decel break speed Off ___________________ ___________________

G5.3.1 Mot pot accel rate 1 1.00 %/s ___________________ ___________________

G5.3.2 Mot pot decel rate 1 3.00 %/s ___________________ ___________________

G5.3.3 Mot pot accel rate 2 1.00 %/s ___________________ ___________________

G5.3.4 Mot pot decel rate 2 3.00 %/s ___________________ ___________________

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 131

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G5.3.5 Mot pot rate brk speed 0% ___________________ ___________________

G5.4 Speed filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G6: PID Control

G6.1 Setpoint source Multireferences ___________________ ___________________

G6.2 Local process setpoint 100.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G6.3 Feedback source Analog Input 2 ___________________ ___________________

G6.4 Process Kc 8.0 ___________________ ___________________

G6.5 Process Ti 0.1 s ___________________ ___________________

G6.6 Process Td 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G6.7 Invert PID No ___________________ ___________________

G6.8 Feedback low pass filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G6.9 Process error 0.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G7: Start / Stop Control – G7.1 Start

G7.1.1 Main start mode Ramp ___________________ ___________________

G7.1.2 Alternative start mode Ramp ___________________ ___________________

G7.1.3 Start delay Off ___________________ ___________________

G7.1.4 Fine restart delay Off ___________________ ___________________

G7.1.5 Alt restart delay Off ___________________ ___________________

G7.1.6 Run on supply loss Yes ___________________ ___________________

G7.1.7 Start after V.Deep Spin ___________________ ___________________

G7.1.8 Run after reset Yes ___________________ ___________________

G7.1.9 Start Delay after Reset 0.001 s ___________________ ___________________

G7.1.10 Magnetization time Off ___________________ ___________________

G7: Start / Stop Control – G7.2 Stop

G7.2.1 Main stop mode Ramp ___________________ ___________________

G7.2.2 Alternative stop mode Spin ___________________ ___________________

G7.2.3 Stop mode switch speed Off ___________________ ___________________

G7.2.4 Stop delay Off ___________________ ___________________

G7.2.5 Stop at min speed No ___________________ ___________________

G7.2.6 Power off delay Off ___________________ ___________________

G7: Start / Stop Control – G7.3 Spin start

G7.3.1 Spin start tune 10 % ___________________ ___________________

G7.3.2 Minimum speed 0.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G7.3.3 Magnetization tim 1.0 s ___________________ ___________________

132 CONFIGURATION REGISTER

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G8: Outputs – G8.1: Output Relays

G8.1.0.1 Group 1 Off ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.0.2 Group 2 Off ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.0.3 Group 3 Off ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.1 Relay 1 source select Run ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.2 Relay 1 ON delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.3 Relay 1 OFF delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.4 Relay 1 inversion No ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.5 Relay 2 source select Always OFF ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.6 Relay 2 ON delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.7 Relay 2 OFF delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________ EN

G8.1.8 Relay 2 inversion No ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.9 Relay 3 source select Always OFF ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.10 Relay 3 ON delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.11 Relay 3 OFF delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.12 Relay 3 inversion No ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.13 Relay 4 src select Always OFF ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.14 Relay 4 ON delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.15 Relay 4 OFF delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.16 Relay 4 inversion No ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.17 Relay 5 src select Always OFF ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.18 Relay 5 ON delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.19 Relay 5 OFF delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.20 Relay 5 inversion No ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.21 Relay 6 source select Always OFF ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.22 Relay 6 ON delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.23 Relay 6 OFF delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.24 Relay 6 inversion No ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.25 Relay 7 source select Always OFF ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.26 Relay 7 ON delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.27 Relay 7 OFF delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.28 Relay 7 inversion No ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.29 Relay 8 src select Always OFF ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.30 Relay 8 ON delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 133

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G8.1.31 Relay 8 OFF delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.32 Relay 8 inversion No ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.33 Relay 9 src select Always OFF ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.34 Relay 9 ON delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.35 Relay 9 OFF delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.36 Relay 9 inversion No ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.37 Relay 10 src select Always OFF ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.38 Relay 10 ON delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.39 Relay 10 OFF delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.40 Relay 10 inversion No ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.41 Relay 11 src select Always OFF ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.42 Relay 11 ON delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.43 Relay 11 OFF delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.44 Relay 11 inversion No ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.45 Relay 12 src select Always OFF ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.46 Relay 12 ON delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.47 Relay 12 OFF delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.48 Relay 12 inversion No ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.49 Relay 13 src select Always OFF ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.50 Relay 13 ON delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.51 Relay 13 OFF delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G8.1.52 Relay 13 inversion No

G8.1.53 Speed for crane brake 0.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G8: Outputs – G8.2: Analogue Output 1

G8.2.1 AO1 source selection = Motor speed Motor Speed ___________________ ___________________

G8.2.2 O1 format = 4..20 mA 4-20mA ___________________ ___________________

G8.2.3 AO1 low level 0% ___________________ ___________________

G8.2.4 AO1 high level 100 % ___________________ ___________________

G8.2.5 AO1 filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G8: Outputs – G8.3: Analogue Output 2 / Pulse

G8.3.0 Enable Pulse Mode No ___________________ ___________________

G8.3.1 AO2 source selection Motor current ___________________ ___________________

G8.3.2 AO2 format 4..20 mA ___________________ ___________________

G8.3.3 AO2 low level 0% ___________________ ___________________

134 CONFIGURATION REGISTER

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G8.3.4 AO2 high level 100 % ___________________ ___________________

G8.3.5 AO2 filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G8.3.6 Max pulse number 100 ___________________ ___________________

G8.3.7 Pulse duty 50 % ___________________ ___________________

G8: Outputs – G8.4: Analogue Output 3

G8.4.1 AO3 source selection Motor speed ___________________ ___________________

G8.4.2 AO3 format 4..20 mA ___________________ ___________________

G8.4.3 AO3 low level 0% ___________________ ___________________

G8.4.4 AO3 high level 100 % ___________________ ___________________

G8.4.5 AO3 filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G8: Outputs – G8.5: Analogue Output 4 EN

G8.5.1 AO4 source selection Motor speed ___________________ ___________________

G8.5.2 AO4 format 4..20 mA ___________________ ___________________

G8.5.3 AO4 low level 0% ___________________ ___________________

G8.5.4 AO4 high level 100 % ___________________ ___________________

G8.5.5 AO4 filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G8: Outputs – G8.6: Analogue Output 5

G8.6.1 AO5 source selection Motor speed ___________________ ___________________

G8.6.2 AO5 format 4..20 mA ___________________ ___________________

G8.6.3 AO5 low level 0% ___________________ ___________________

G8.6.4 AO5 high level 100 % ___________________ ___________________

G8.6.5 AO5 filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G8: Outputs – G8.7: Analogue Output 6

G8.7.1 AO6 source selection Motor speed ___________________ ___________________

G8.7.2 AO6 format 4-20mA ___________________ ___________________

G8.7.3 AO6 low level 0% ___________________ ___________________

G8.7.4 AO6 high level 100% ___________________ ___________________

G8.7.5 AO6 filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G9: Comparators – G9.1: Comparator 1

G9.1.1 Comp 1 source sel None ___________________ ___________________

G9.1.2 Comp 1 type Normal ___________________ ___________________

G9.1.3 Comp 1 ON level 100 % ___________________ ___________________

G9.1.4 Comp 1 OFF level 0% ___________________ ___________________

G9.1.3 Comp 1 window limit 2 100 % ___________________ ___________________

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 135

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G9.1.4 Comp 1 window limit 1 0% ___________________ ___________________

G9.1.5 Comp 1 ON delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G9.1.6 Comp 1 OFF delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G9.1.7 Comp 1 output function Not used ___________________ ___________________

G9: Comparators – G9.2: Comparator 2

G9.2.1 Comp 2 source sel None ___________________ ___________________

G9.2.2 Comp 2 type Normal ___________________ ___________________

G9.2.3 Comp 2 ON level 100 % ___________________ ___________________

G9.2.4 Comp 2 OFF level 0% ___________________ ___________________

G9.2.3 Comp 2 window limit 2 100 % ___________________ ___________________

G9.2.4 Comp 2 window limit 1 0% ___________________ ___________________

G9.2.5 Comp 2 ON delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G9.2.6 Comp 2 OFF delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G9.2.7 Comp 2 output function Not used ___________________ ___________________

G9: Comparators – G9.3: Comparator 3

G9.3.1 Comp 3 source sel None ___________________ ___________________

G9.3.2 Comp 3 type Normal ___________________ ___________________

G9.3.3 Comp 3 ON level 100 % ___________________ ___________________

G9.3.4 Comp 3 OFF level 0% ___________________ ___________________

G9.3.3 Comp 3 window limit 2 100 % ___________________ ___________________

G9.3.4 Comp 3 window limit 1 0% ___________________ ___________________

G9.3.5 Comp 3 ON delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G9.3.6 Comp 3 OFF delay 0.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G9.3.7 Comp 3 output function Not used ___________________ ___________________

G10: Limits – G10.1 Speed

G10.1.1 Minimum limit 1 -100.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G10.1.2 Maximum limit 1 100.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G10.1.3 Minimum limit 2 -100.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G10.1.4 Maximum limit 2 100.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G10.1.5 Maximum lim timeout Off ___________________ ___________________

G10.1.6 Minimum lim timeout Off ___________________ ___________________

G10.1.7 Invert speed No ___________________ ___________________

G10: Limits – G10.2 Current / Torque

G10.2.1 Current limit 1.0In A ___________________ ___________________

136 CONFIGURATION REGISTER

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G10.2.2 I limit timeout Off ___________________ ___________________

G10.2.3 Current limit 2 1.0In A ___________________ ___________________

G10.2.4 I limit 2 timeout Off ___________________ ___________________

G10.2.5 I limit 2 switch speed Off ___________________ ___________________

G10.2.6 Torque limit 150.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G10.2.7 Torque limit timeout Off ___________________ ___________________

G10.2.8 Torque limit 2 150.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G10.2.9 Torque lim 2 timeout Off ___________________ ___________________

G10.2.10 Torque l 2 swt speed Off ___________________ ___________________

G10.2.11 Regeneration I limit Off ___________________ ___________________

G10.2.12 I limit Regen Time Off ___________________ ___________________ EN

G10.2.13 Reg torque limit 150.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G10.2.14 Reg torque limit time Off ___________________ ___________________

G10.2.15 Disable limit I/T No ___________________ ___________________

G11: Protections – G11.1 Input

G11.1.1 Supply under voltage (Internal)0 V ___________________ ___________________

G11.1.2 Under voltage timeout 5.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G11.1.3 Supply over voltage (Internal)7095 V ___________________ ___________________

G11.1.4 Over voltage timeout 5.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G11.1.5 Low voltage behavior Faults ___________________ ___________________

G11.1.6 LVRT input threshold 25 % ___________________ ___________________

G11.1.7 LVRT output threshold 5% ___________________ ___________________

G11: Protections – G11.2 Motor

G11.2.1 Stop timeout Off ___________________ ___________________

G11.2.2 Ground current limit 20 % ___________________ ___________________

G11.2.3 I out asym trip delay 5.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G11.2.4 V asym out trip delay 5.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G11.2.5 PT100 motor fault Off ___________________ ___________________

G11.2.6 PT100 fault timeout 30 s ___________________ ___________________

G11.2.7 Fault with no load No ___________________ ___________________

G11.2.8 Pump overload level 20.0 A ___________________ ___________________

G11.2.9 Pump overload filter Off ___________________ ___________________

G11.2.10 Pump overload delay Off ___________________ ___________________

G11.2.11 Pump underload enable No ___________________ ___________________

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 137

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G11.2.12 Pump underload current 1.0In A ___________________ ___________________

G11.2.13 Pump underload speed 100.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G11.2.14 Pump underload flt dly 10.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G12: Auto Reset

G12.1 Enable autoreset No ___________________ ___________________

G12.2 Retries max number 1 ___________________ ___________________

G12.3 Autoreset delay 5s ___________________ ___________________

G12.4 Counter reset time 15 min ___________________ ___________________

G12.5 Autoreset fault 1 Off ___________________ ___________________

G12.6 Autoreset fault 2 Off ___________________ ___________________

G12.7 Autoreset fault 3 Off ___________________ ___________________

G12.8 Autoreset fault 4 Off ___________________ ___________________

G13: Fault History

G13.1 Fault Register 1 No faults ___________________ ___________________

G13.2 Fault Register 2 No faults ___________________ ___________________

G13.3 Fault Register 3 No faults ___________________ ___________________

G13.4 Fault Register 4 No faults ___________________ ___________________

G13.5 Fault Register 5 No faults ___________________ ___________________

G13.6 Fault Register 6 No faults ___________________ ___________________

G13.7 Erase fault history No ___________________ ___________________

G14: Multi-references

G14.1 Multi-reference 1 10.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G14.2 Multi-reference 2 20.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G14.3 Multi-reference 3 30.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G14.4 Multi-reference 4 40.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G14.5 Multi-reference 5 50.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G14.6 Multi-reference 6 60.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G14.7 Multi-reference 7 70.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G15: Inch Speeds

G15.1 Inch speed 1 0.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G15.2 Inch speed 2 0.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G15.3 Inch speed 3 0.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G16: Skip Frequencies

G16.1 Skip frequency 1 0.00 % ___________________ ___________________

138 CONFIGURATION REGISTER

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G16.2 Skip bandwidth 1 Off ___________________ ___________________

G16.3 Skip frequency 2 0.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G16.4 Skip bandwidth 2 Off ___________________ ___________________

G16.5 Skip frequency 3 0.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G16.6 Skip bandwidth 3 Off ___________________ ___________________

G16.7 Skip frequency 4 0.00 % ___________________ ___________________

G16.8 Skip bandwidth 4 Off ___________________ ___________________

G17: Brake

G17.1 DC brake time Off ___________________ ___________________

G17.2 DC brake current level 0% ___________________ ___________________

G17.3 DC break on delay Off ___________________ ___________________ EN

G17.4 Heating current Off ___________________ ___________________

G17.5 Dynamic brake No ___________________ ___________________

G18: Encoder

G18.1 Enable encoder No ___________________ ___________________

G18.2 Encoder PPR 1024 PPR ___________________ ___________________

G19: Fine Tuning – G19.1: IGBT Control

G19.1.1 Control type V/Hz ___________________ ___________________

G19.1.1b Vector control PMC Open loop speed ___________________ ___________________

G19.1.1c Perm Magnet Sync Mot I/Hz ___________________ ___________________

G19.1.3 PID Vout No ___________________ ___________________

G19.1.6 Auto Tuning No ___________________ ___________________

G19.1.7 Overmodulation Off ___________________ ___________________

G19.1.8 Pewave Yes ___________________ ___________________

G19.1.9 Switching frequency 4000 Hz ___________________ ___________________

G19: Fine Tuning – G19.2: Motor Load

G19.2.1 Minimum flux level 100 % ___________________ ___________________

G19.2.2 Boost voltage 0.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G19.2.3 Boost current 0.0 %

G19.2.4 Slip compensation No ___________________ ___________________

G19.2.5 Current limit factor 0.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G19.2.6 Initial frequency 0.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G19.2.7 Damping 2% ___________________ ___________________

G19.2.8 Reg bus voltage 800V ___________________ ___________________

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 139

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G19: Fine Tuning – G19.3: Motor model

G19.3.1 R stator 0.1 mΩ ___________________ ___________________

G19.3.2 R rotor 0.1 mΩ ___________________ ___________________

G19.3.3 L magnetization 0.1 mH ___________________ ___________________

G19.3.3 Back electrom. force 0.000 kV ___________________ ___________________

G19.3.4 L leakage stator 0.00 mH ___________________ ___________________

G19.3.4 L Stator D axis 0.00 mH ___________________ ___________________

G19.3.5 L leakage rotor 0.00 mH ___________________ ___________________

G19.3.5 L Stator Q axis 0.00 mH ___________________ ___________________

G19.3.6 Field weakening 90.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G19.3.7 Temperature coef R 20.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G19.3.8 Flux tuning 2.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G19.3.9 Params online estim No ___________________ ___________________

G19: Fine Tuning – G19.4: PID Control

G19.4.1 Kp speed 10.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G19.4.2 Ki speed 10.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G19.4.3 Kp torque 10.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G19.4.4 Ki torque 10.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G19.4.5 Kp I 10.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G19.4.6 Ki I 15.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G19.4.7 Kp Sensorless 50.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G19.4.8 Ki Sensorless 50.0 % ___________________ ___________________

G20: Serial Communication– G20.1: Modbus RTU

G20.1.1 Display baudrate 460800 bps baud/s ___________________ ___________________

G20.1.2 Modbus address 10 ___________________ ___________________

G20.1.3 Modbus baudrate 9600 bps baud/s ___________________ ___________________

G20.1.4 Modbus parity None ___________________ ___________________

G20.1.5 Communication timeout Off ___________________ ___________________

G20: Serial Communication - G20.2: Profibus

G20.2.1.1.1 to G20.2.1.1.16–
0 ___________________ ___________________
Custom Modbus addresses 1 to 16
G20.2.1.2.1 to G20.2.1.2.16–
Values of custom Modbus registers 0 ___________________ ___________________
1 to 16
G20.2.2.1.1 to G20.2.2.1.16–
Custom Modbus addresses 17 to 0 ___________________ ___________________
32
G20.2.2.2 to G20.2.2.2.16–Values of
0 ___________________ ___________________
custom Modbus registers 17 to 32

140 CONFIGURATION REGISTER

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G20.2.3 – Profibus node address 1 ___________________ ___________________

G20.2.4 – Connector Fault Mode Fault ___________________ ___________________

G20.2.5 – Connector State Off ___________________ ___________________

G20: Serial Communication – G20.6: Custom Modbus configuration

G20.6.1 to G20.6.1.20 – Custom Modbus
0 ___________________ ___________________
addresses 1 to 120
G20: Serial Communication – G20.6: Custom Modbus values
G20.7.1 to G20.7.1.20 – Values of custom
0 ___________________ ___________________
Modbus registers 1 to 120
G21: Networks – G21.1: Ethernet

G21.1.1 Automatic IP No ___________________ ___________________

G21.1.1.1 Assigned IP 0.0.0.0 ___________________ ___________________

G21.1.1.2 Assigned subnet 0.0.0.0 ___________________ ___________________

EN
G21.1.1.3 Assigned gateway 0.0.0.0 ___________________ ___________________

G21.1.2 IP address 0.0.0.0 ___________________ ___________________

G21.1.3 Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 ___________________ ___________________

G21.1.4 Gateway 0.0.0.0 ___________________ ___________________

G21.1.5 MAC address 0.27.119.129.238.66 ___________________ ___________________

G21: Networks – G21.2: TCP Client

G21.2.1 Client TCP timeout 1000 ___________________ ___________________

G21.2.2 Client TCP retries 1 ___________________ ___________________

G21: Networks – G21.3: EtherNet IP

G21.3.1.1 Automatic IP No ___________________ ___________________

G21.3.1.2 Assigned IP 0.0.0.0 ___________________ ___________________

G21.3.1.3 Assignet subnet 0.0.0.0 ___________________ ___________________

G21.3.1.4 Assigned gateway 0.0.0.0 ___________________ ___________________

G21.3.1.2 IP address 0.0.0.0 ___________________ ___________________

G21.3.1.3 Subnet mask 0.0.0.0 ___________________ ___________________

G21.3.1.4 Gateway 0.0.0.0 ___________________ ___________________

G21.3.1.5 MAC address A.B.C.D.E.F ___________________ ___________________

G21.3.4 Control mode Local ___________________ ___________________

G21.3.5 Reference Mode Local ___________________ ___________________

G21.3.6 PID Mode Local ___________________ ___________________

G21.3.7 Connector 1 status Off ___________________ ___________________

G21.3.8 Fault mode c1 Fault ___________________ ___________________

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 141

SD750 POWER ELECTRONICS

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G21.3.9 Connector 2 status Off ___________________ ___________________

G21.3.10 Fault mode c2 Fault ___________________ ___________________

G21: Networks – G21.4: Profinet

G21.4.1.1 IP address 192.168.1.143 ___________________ ___________________

G21.4.1.2 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 ___________________ ___________________

G21.4.1.3 Gateway 0.0.0.0 ___________________ ___________________

G21.4.1.4 MAC address 00-1B-77-81-EE-42 ___________________ ___________________

G21.4.4 Connector 1 status Off ___________________ ___________________

G21.4.5 Fault mode c1 Fault ___________________ ___________________

G21.4.6 Connector 2 status Off ___________________ ___________________

G21.4.7 Fault mode c2 Fault ___________________ ___________________

G23: Expansion – G23.2 Input / Output

G23.2.1 IO digital A status Off ___________________ ___________________

G23.2.2 IO digital A test No ___________________ ___________________

G23.2.3 IO digital B status Off ___________________ ___________________

G23.2.4 IO digital B test No ___________________ ___________________

G23.2.5 IO analog A status Off ___________________ ___________________

G23.2.6 IO analog A test No ___________________ ___________________

G23.2.7 IO analog B status Off ___________________ ___________________

G23.2.8 IO analog B test No ___________________ ___________________

G23: Expansion – G23.3 Comumunications

G23.3.1 Profinet board status Off ___________________ ___________________

G23.3.2 Profinet board test No ___________________ ___________________

G23.3.3 Profinet Com Error Fault ___________________ ___________________

G23.3.4 EthernetIP board state Off ___________________ ___________________

G23.3.5 EthernetIP board test No ___________________ ___________________

G23.3.6 EthernetIP Com Error Fault ___________________ ___________________

G23.3.7 Profibus board status Off ___________________ ___________________

G23.3.8 Profibus board test No ___________________ ___________________

G23.3.9 Profibus Com Error Fault ___________________ ___________________

G25: Master / Slave

G25.1 Role Master ___________________ ___________________

G25.2 Start fiber Start ___________________ ___________________

G25.3 Fault partner Yes ___________________ ___________________

142 CONFIGURATION REGISTER

POWER ELECTRONICS SD750

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2

G25.4 Stop partner fault Spin ___________________ ___________________

G25.5 Restart after reset No ___________________ ___________________

G25.6 Time out fiber 1.0 s ___________________ ___________________

G26: Fans

G26.1 Fans mode Run ___________________ ___________________

G26.2 Min temperature 47 ºC ___________________ ___________________

G26.3 Max temperature 51 ºC ___________________ ___________________

G26.4 Power off delay 1 min ___________________ ___________________

EN

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 143

24H TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE 365 DAYS A YEAR

FIND YOUR NEAREST DELEGATION

POWER-ELECTRONICS.COM/CONTACT/